Home

Agilent Technologies 5373A User's Manual

1. Interface Commands Interface functions Interface system terms ISEN command query MEASurement 5 89 K KEY command System Key number assignments Keyqueue L Learn String 5 24 LEDs front panel interface status 2 6 1 5 122 5 123 Listen Gf ace E A cat br 2 3 2 5 LOCal command System 5 16 Local Lockout poe MEER Local mode leidas Longform derivation LSN LED Ee neediest Index 3 HP 5373A Programming Manual Major Interface 2 3 manual organization of reference section explained Master Status Summary MSS message MATH Menu display Les MATH subsystem Measurement MEAS subsystem commands 5 73 Measurement Channel SOURce command 5 98 Measurements number per block MENu command query System Menu screens 2r Message Available MAV message Message delimiters Meta Messages a MMOD query only System Mnemonics iue qua fesse ad bugis px TR eve MODe command query input
2. HOLDOFF SAMPLING EDGE NTERVAL clc EDGE TME n EDGEKEDGE EDGE CYCLE ore EDGE EVENT N N EDGE PARITY e EDGE RANDOM pane ea E TIME TIME N N EVENTANTERVAL N N EXTERNALLY GATED MANUAL N N Symbol C or N indicates that a measurement can be made using the corresponding combination of Function Channel and Arming selections C Continuous Arming Block Sample Arming Non Continuous arming Start Stop Arming setups are limited to blocks of 1 measurement 1 DUAL Simultaneous Dual channel 2 results Frequency and Period options are A amp B A amp C B amp C Totalize option is A amp B 2 RATIO Frequency and Period ratio options A B A C B A B C C A C B Totalize ratio options A B 3 SUM Frequency and Period sum options are A B A C Totalize sum option is A B 4 DIFFERENCE Frequency and Period difference options are B A C A Totalize difference options are B A Default Arming ARMING CATEGORIES Category Automatic Continuous Arming Modes Block Holdoff is Automatic Sample Arm is Automatic Block Holdoff is User defined Sample Arm is Automatic Block is Automatic Sample Arm is User defined Block Holdoff is User defined
3. 5 35 HP 5373A Programming Manual Chapter 5 Numeric Subsystem Commands 5 37 COMMAND REFERENCE DISP Display Type command query 5 38 Continued EXP Expand data command query 5 39 SCR Scroll Results command 5 39 Graphic Subsystem Commands 5 41 CDAT Connect data on off command query 2825 47 COPY Copy Graph to Memory command 5 47 Event Time command 5 48 Event Count on First Channel query only 548 EVT2 Event Count on Second Channel query only 5 48 XARH X axis Auto Range Hold command 5 48 XMAX Set X axis Maximum command query 5 49 XMIN Set X axis Minimum command query 5 49 XMRH X axis Marker Range Hold command 5 49 XMSC X axis Manual Scale command query 5 50 GDIS Graphic Display command query 5 50 GRID Grid 5 50 HCON Histogram Continue command 5 51 HIST Histogram command 5 51 BWID Set Bin Width command query 5 51 XARH X axis Auto Range Hold command XMIN Set X Axis Minimum command query 5 52 XMRH X axis Marker Range Hold command 5 52
4. 3 27 Format JA 2 22 2 22 14 0 2 2 2 222 3 31 How Signals Are Converted to Binary Data 3 31 Producing Results 3 31 Binary Data 3 32 Converting Binary Data to Time Stamps Seda Aa ena 3 32 Producing Valid Time Stamps 3 32 Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers 3 32 Incorporating Interpolator Data 3 33 Generating Final Function Results from Time Stamps 3 33 1 3 35 How Signals Are Converted to Binary Data 3 35 Producing Results 3 35 Binary Data 3 36 Converting Binary Data to Time 3 36 Producing Valid Time Stamps 3 36 Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers 3 36 Incorporating Interpolator Data 3 37 Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between Block Arming Channel and Signal Channel 3 37 Generating Final Function Results from Time Stamps and Event Stamps 3 37 Continuous Time Interval Results 3 37 Format
5. Puntos ad vr REST Restart Measurement command SET Instrument Setup command query SMOD Sample Mode command query SUBS Subsystem query only TOD System Clock Time of Day command query 5 27 WINT Warmup Interval query only 5 27 WTS Wait to Send command query 5 27 CLS Clear Status command 5 28 ESE Event Status Enable command query 5 29 ESR Event Status Register query only 5 29 HSE Hardware Status Enable command query 5 30 HSR Hardware Status Register query only 5 30 IDN Instrument Identification query only 5 31 OPC Operation Complete command query 5 31 OPT Installed Options query only 5 31 PSC Power On Status Clear command query 5 32 RCL Recall Register command 5 32 RST Reset command 5 33 SAV Save Register command 5 33 SRE Service Request Enable command query 5 33 STB Read Status Byte query only 5 34 TRG Trigger 5 34 TST Self Test query
6. C 11 No digits specified entry aborted C 12 Non numeric key ignored 12 Not Talkconly 12 Number must be positive C 12 Numeric entry aborted C 12 Out of Range see Meas mode on System menu C 12 Plot Print aborted 2 2 C 13 Pre trigger precedes data Response timeout occurred Result format must be ASCII see System menu Sending output to plotter Sending output to printer Source channel has changed 14 Source input parameters changed C 14 Stop Arming precedes Start Arming 14 Undefined 2 1 2 14 Value of range set to limit C 14 Value out of range set to maximum 14 Value out of range set to minimum C 15 Waiting for arming Waiting for input Waiting for Manual Arm Waiting for 15 Waiting for Start
7. INH Inhibit Measurement command query ILEV Inhibit Level ISEN Inhibit Sense command query Memory Segmentation query only MSIZ Measurement Size command query PAM Pre trigger Amount command query PBL Pre trigger Blocks command query PRET Pre trigger Control command PMOD Pre trigger mode command query 5 94 PUN Pre trigger Units query only 5 94 PXSL Pre trigger External Arm Slope command query 5 95 SAMP Sample Arm Sublevel command 5 95 CHAN Arming Channel command query 5 95 DCH Delay Channel 5 96 DEL Delay Value command query 5 97 SLOP Slope command query 5 97 SOUR Measurement Source command query 5 98 SSIZ Sample Size command query 5 99 STAR Start Arm Sublevel command 5 99 CHAN Channel command query 5 100 DCH Delay Channel 5 100 DEL Delay command query 5 101 SLOP Slope 5 102 TVR Ti
8. SEL command query SGR command query 5 command query 5 64 SSCR command TVAR command 5 65 UPD 5 70 VCH 5 71 XARH command 5 48 5 51 5 66 XMAX command query 5 49 5 66 XMAX query 5 56 5 57 XMIN command query 5 49 5 67 XMIN 5 52 XMIN query 5 57 5 58 XMRH command 5 49 5 52 5 67 XMSC command query 5 50 5 52 5 68 XVAL query iore ere eee eye YARH command command query YMAX query YMIN command query YMIN query command YMSC command query YSC command query YVAL query ZOOM command GRAPHic Menu display Group Execute Trigger message Hardware Status Bit Hardware Status Bit Summary Message Hardware Status Enable Register Hardware Status register HBINwidth command query MEASurement 5 84 HBLock command query MEASurement 5 85 HCENter command query MEASurement 5 86 HELP Menu display HFORma
9. C 6 Events occurred which were not timed 4 9 Exponent disallowed due to mantissa C 9 Exponent entry disallowed C 9 Gate open C 10 Graphics not allowed for this meas C 10 Inhibit usage may distort results C 10 Index 5 HP 5373A Programming Manual Input line truncated to first 80 chars C 10 Input parameters may have changed Ca Interval sample value changed to 131 ms C 11 Measurement Aborted C 11 Measurement Measurement terminated no data C 11 No digits specified entry aborted C 12 Non numeric key ignored C 12 Not in Talk only C 12 Number must be positive C 12 Numeric entry aborted C 12 Out of Range see Meas mode on System In eni soar e ss e reos v revise C 12 Plot Print aborted C 13 Pre trigger precedes data C 13 Result format must be ASCII see System MENU sext p cou RR RANA C 13 Sending output to plotter C 13 Sending output to printer 13 Source channel has changed C 14 Source input parameters changed C 14 Undefined key 14 Value out of range set to limit C 14 Value o
10. Figure 3 A Frequency Measurement on Channel with Time Holdoff Arming Mode Showing Corresponding Binary Data Output Producing Results For all three functions the first sample in each block is unique it captures time of occurrence for the block arming edge No event data is provided for this sample Subsequent samples generate standard measurement results Continuous Time Interval results are generated by calculating elapsed time between contiguous samples 3 51 gt HP 5373A Programming Manual PRF Frequency PRI and Period results are generated by calculating both elapsed time and elapsed events between samples then taking the appropriate quotient Avoid accidental misuse of the first sample in each block The formulas are elapsed events or Frequency elapsed time PRI or Period elapsed events EXPANDED DATA Expanded Data for Continuous Time Interval measurements is Missed Events Missed Events are defined as trigger events which are counted between samples but which are not time stamped See the Glossary in this chapter for more details Avoid accidental misuse of first sample in each block The formula for calculating missed events is Missed Events elapsed events between samples 1 Expanded Data for PRF Frequency PRI and Period measurements is Measurement Gate Time Gate Time is generated by calculating elapsed time between samples
11. FUNCTION PRE TRIGGER J MEASurement MEAS MEASurement MEAS T Measurement FUNCtion function Pre trigger mode PMODe lt TIME TINTerval Frequency Time EXTernal or X gt Interval Totalize etc i Pre trigger amount PAMount lt number gt or Channel i SOURce lt channel gt lt number gt or Measurement lt number gt sample channel Pre trigger Units reply is 96 or Number of blocks BLOCK number SAMP Number of MSIZe or SSIZe number Pre trigger Location PLOCation retums measurements block pre trigger index Arming Mode ARMing arming mode Pre trigger external PXSLope lt POSitive or Block Holdotf Start STARt slope NEGative gt CHANnel A or Time Interval Detect DETect OFF ABOVe gt gt status lt INSide gt lt A or B gt lt OUTSide lt gt gt DELay number Detector Lower DLOWer number SLOPe lt POSitive or threshold NEGative gt Detector Middie DMIDdle lt number gt Sample Arm Stop SAMPle threshold CHANnel lt A B or Detecior Upper DUPPer lt number gt EXTemal threshold D CHannel A B or Measurement Inhibit INHibit ON or OFF OSCillator status DELay number ibi LORD POSilive 1 Inhibit Levet NEGative gt Inhibit Sense ISENse lt ABOVe or BELow MATH PROCess PROC Channel SOURce channel Referece SREFerence Set Reference CREFerence Ciear Reference Statistics STATistics ON or OFF Math
12. 8 70 Continued 5 3 73 How Signals are Converted to Binary Data 3 73 Producing Results 3 73 Expanded Data 3 73 Binary Data 3 74 Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps 3 74 Producing Valid Event 3 75 Correcting Event Data for Counter Rollovers 3 75 Producing Valid Time Stamps 3 75 Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers 3 75 Correcting for Rollovers Between Start and Stop 3 75 Correcting for Rollovers Between Measurements 3 76 Incorporating Interpolator Data 3 76 Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between the Start and Stop Channels 3 76 Generating Final Function Results From Event and Time Stamps Format How Signals are Converted to Binary Data Producing Results Expanded Data Binary Data Output Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps 3 78 Producing Valid Event Correcting Stop Channel Data for Counter Roll
13. lt 3 Acquiring measurement data C Alternate Timebase selected Press RESTART C 3 Arming has changed CA Arming parameter changed C4 Arming value changed by Fast Meas mode C 4 Arming input parameters changed CA Arming measurement source have lt C4 Binary output turned off C 5 Block or Measurement size changed C5 Calculating measurements C 5 Decimal point entry disallowed C5 Decimal point previously entered C5 Enter register number C6 Error 100 Unrecognized command 6 Error 120 Numeric Argument error 4 6 Error 151 Query not allowed Binary format 6 Error 100 No Listeners on bus C 6 Error 101 Talker no listeners C 6 Error 102 Bus conflict C7 Error 103 Key ignored in Remote eC Error 104 Key ignored in LLO CZ Error 107 Timebase unlocked Press RESTART eC Error 108 Ch and C 7 Error 109 Ch A Overvoltage C 7 Er
14. xiv Chapter 5 COMMAND REFERENCE Continued Table of Contents CLE Clear command 5 10 CLIS Carrier Frequency List query only 5 10 DAT System Clock Date command query 5 11 DLEN Data Length query 5 11 DMS Default Measurement Setup command 5 12 DSP Display command query 5 12 ERR Error query only 5 13 HOV Histogram Measurements Over Limit query only 5 13 HUND Histogram Measurements Under Limit query only 5 13 HWIT Histogram Measurements Within Limit query only 5 14 IDAT Inhibit Data query 5 14 KEY Key Simulation command query 5 15 LOC Local command 5 16 MEN Select Menu command query 5 17 MMOD Measurement Format command query 5 17 ODATa Output Measurement Data Results query only 5 18 OHIS Output Histogram Result query only i PLOCation Pre trigger Location query only PLOT Plot Screen command POD Pods Installed query only PRES Preset Instrument command PRIN Print Screen command REM Remote command
15. TRIGGER Tej 500 MHz TIMEBASE EVENT COUNTER 32 MEMORY EVENT DATA EVENT COUNTER 32 EVENT DATA BINARY HP IB BUFFER OUTPUT STATUS INTERPOLATOR TIME DATA 32 TIME COUNTER INTERPOLATOR STATUS DATA 80 INTN3H Figure 3 1 Simplified Block Diagram of HP 5373A Measurement Section with Binary Output EVENT COUNTER TIME COUNTER Inputs for the event counter come from Channel A B or C When a signal is applied to Channel A or B the event counter increments every time the signal meets the selected trigger criteria To increase count rate Channel C contains a high speed 4 1 frequency divider When measurements are made via Channel C the event counter increments on every fourth cycle of the input signal The time counter runs continuously counting the 500 MHz internal time base clock This counter keeps track of the time at which input events occur The 500 MHz clock frequency gives the time counter a resolution of 2 ns To increase resolution an interpolator circuit measures the small amount of time between the occurrence of an event count and the next 500 MHz clock pulse See Figure 3 2 EVENT o suis CLOCK SIGNAL LLL ty E 500 MHz MEASUREMENT WERZENOM Figure 3 2 Interpolation Between 2 ns Clock Pulses MAKING MEASUREMENTS How Measurement Results are Generated Binary Output Although the HP 5373A is a comp
16. 1 Connecting to a printer or plotter 4 CONTinue test command diagnostic 5 140 Controller 2 6 Controller aeu gau ray 2 3 D Data 2 16 DATe command query System 5 11 De limiters yates 4 18 DET command query MEASurement 5 80 Device Clear utilior eui vp ie ER aaa Device Clear message Device Dependent command Device Dependent commands Device Independent command Device Independent commands Diagnostic test numbers Index 1 HP 5373A Programming Manual Display Blank eee DLENgth query System DLOW command query MEASurement DMID command MEASurement DMS command System DSP command query System DUPP command query MEASurement E Envelope POWer FUNCtion command 5 83 EOI End or Identify 4 18 EOS End of String message 4 18 ERASe register command instrument state 5 132 Error 303 Response timeout occurred C 13 Error 105 Alternate Timebase selected Press RESTART C 3 Error 120 HP 5371A Graphics command no longer used Error 180 WARNING Frequency too high for
17. 16 Error 181 WARNING Frequency too low for 16 Error 182 WARNING Both frequencies out of auto trigger range C 16 Error message descriptions C 3 Error messages Error 100 Unrecognized command C 6 Error 120 Numeric Argument error C 6 Error 151 Query not allowed Binary format C 6 Error 102 Bus conflict Talk only C7 Error 150 Parameter conflict C 9 Error messages static defined Error quede ies saat ent ere en ea Error queue query command oe ERRor query System ESB Event Status Bit ESE command query system ESR query system Event Status Bit ESB Event Status Bit ESB Summary message 2 25 Event Status Enable Register 2 24 Event Status 2 22 2 23 F Failure messages Alternate Timebase selected Press RESTART C 3 Error 107 Timebase unlocked Press RESTART 325 rase eyed aw Eus C 7 Error 108 Ch A and B Overvoltage 7 Index 2 Error 109 Ch A Overvoltage Error 110 Ch Error 111 Power down before removing pods C 8 Error 160 Out of sensitivity cal C 9 Failure messages static defined
18. MATH subcommand MEAN subcommand MINimum subcommand NORMalize subcommand OFFSet subcommand RMSquare subcommand SCALe subcommand SDEViation subcommand SREFerence subcommand STATistics subcommand Subcommands VARiance subcommand zd SRE command query system 2 27 SRO TES 2 5 2 7 2 19 STARt arm 5 5 99 STARt command MEASurement 5 99 5 102 Static error messages definition 2 Static failure messages definition 2 Static status messages definition Statistics subcommands Status Byte Register Status enabling registers Status Menu display Status message descriptions Status messages Abort only allowed in Single C 3 Acquiring measurement data C 3 Arming has changed C4 Arming parameter changed 4 Arming value changed by Fast Meas mode C 4 Arming input parameters changed CA Arming measurement source have changed C 4 Binary output turned off C 5 Block or Measurement size changed C 5 Calculating measurements C 5 Decimal point entry disallowed C 5 Decimal point previously entered C 5 Enter register number
19. i pe FUNCtion Y HBINwidth gt separator bin arg Y Wi HBINwidth HBLock Seporator BBIN FARM HBLock HCENter seporator gt center arg HCENter HSPan separator span_org r HSPan HSTart separator start arg HSTart INHibit seporotor INHibit T seporator ILEVel ISENse gt seporotor x ISENse gt MSEGment MSIZe separator I measurement size_org MSIZe RRMEASXS Figure 5 8 MEASurement Subsystem FUNCTION PRE TRIGGER Syntax Diagram 3 of 4 5 75 HP 5373A Programming Manual CONTUINED MEASurement f SOURCE TABLE A A B A B lt gt B C B C lt gt OOU0Q0 U0 DOW gt gt D gt PAMount separator PAMount CO Ge I PBLocks separator PBLocks SINGle PMODe separator PMODe Gi j di PRETrigger PUNits PXSLope PRETrigger seporator separator PXSLope SAMPle Subievel SOURce SOURce SSiZe SSIZe STARt Sublevel seporator SEE SOURCE TABLE seporator P sample size arg p gt gt
20. Exactly 2 digits QL a 2 32 message unit NO END RRASCN3 Figure 2 3 ASCII Measurement Result Syntax Diagrams ASCII RESULT FORMAT Each ASCII measurement result consists of a fixed length 22 character data field top of Figure 2 3 To maintain a constant length leading spaces right justify the number within the field Embedded or trailing spaces are suppressed Leading spaces if any are followed by the algebraic sign of the number For positive values and zero the sign is sent as the ASCII space SP character otherwise a minus sign lt gt precedes the first digit of the number All representations of zero are expressed as lt SP gt 0 0E 00 there is no representation for negative zero The block labled digit to the right and left of the decimal point represents one of the 7 bit ASCII codes from 48 through 57 decimal which correspond to the numerals 0 through 9 respectively A decimal point is always sent as part of the ASCII measurement result message The exponent field consists of exactly two digits It is expressed in scientific format and unscaled units are always assumed Measurement Message Single Message Unit ASCII Measurement Result Format Examples HP IB General Information An ASCII measurement message is one or more message units that completely describe the measurement result When multiple data f
21. SYSTEM M fo HP IB Talk Only Addressing Kode Device Address Result Format iResponse Tiweout gt Options Channel C Installed opt 0382 iInput Pods fi has HP 548828 B has HP 54882 iFastport Copt 8281 Installed and Display Blank When a controller is installed the HP 5373A functions as a talker and a listener In the absence of a controller you can set the HP 5373A to Talk Only mode In this way you can send measurement results to another device such as a printer or plotter In Talk Only mode the HP 5373A functions only in an output condition The receiving device must be set to Listen Always INTERFACE 5373A recognizes two classes of commands COMMANDS device independent commands and device dependent commands Device independent commands are defined by the interface standard document and are the same for all instruments Device dependent commands are unique to the instrument and are defined by the instrument designer The device independent commands are described in the following paragraphs Device dependent commands are described in the Chapter 5 Command Reference Device Independent Device independent commands are identified by three letter Commands mnemonics such as GTL which represents Go To Local Device independent commands are sent as encoded bytes on the interface bus and not as ASCII st
22. 2 Floating point 2 38 Format ASCII measurement result 2 31 Format floating point block message 2 38 Format floating point measurement 2 37 2 38 FREQuency FUNCtion command 5 82 Frequency Deviation Carrier Frequency field 3 43 5 118 FUNCtion command query MEASurement 5 82 FUNCtion Menu WISPIAY does Ben CR rand 5 17 equivalent 5 73 G GET Group Execute Trigger message 2 16 graphic BWID command query CDAT command query COPY command ETIM sublevel commands query Lee rr puis 2 query GDIS command query GRID command query HCON command HIST command query HMIN query HPA command HSD query MCEN query MDM command query MDOW command MEM command MGR command MLEF command MMAX command MMIN command MMOV command MNEX command query MNUM query MOR command query MRAT MRIG command MUP command OUTL command query 5 62 PDEV query
23. BLOCK ARMED Chan 1 H 1 i Start J005 2 2 Stop BINARY DATA 15 oog WENN Figure 10C A Frequency Measurements on Channels A and B with Automatic Arming Mode Showing Corresponding Binary Data Output Producing Results Two channel Frequency and Period results are generated by extracting two discrete sets of single channel data from the data stream shown above Results are generated for the start channel by calculating both elapsed time and elapsed events between odd numbered samples start samples then taking the appropriate quotient The formulas are 3 99 HP 5373A Programming Manual or Frequency R UM PRI or Period apsed time elapsed events 198 Processing for the stop channel is almost identical Results are generated for the stop channel by using even numbered samples stop samples The measurement choice may require that these results be combined for example Frequency A B If so results are combined algebraically measurement by measurement EXPANDED DATA Expanded Data for PRF Frequency PRI and Period measurements is Gate Time Gate Times for the start channel are generated by calculating elapsed time between odd numbered samples start samples Gate Times for the stop channel are generated by calculating elapsed time between even numbered samples stop samples Binary D
24. TEST RESULTS DIM Stats a 1000 1STATISTICAL RESULTS Buff 1000 BUFFER IINITIALIZE CONSTANTS Counter 703 ASSIGN Counter TO 703 FORMAT OFF ASSIGN amp Controller buf TO BUFFER Buff FORMAT OFF Sample size 10 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 1 1 Hi_lim 4 40E 7 Lo_lim 4 30E 7 CLEAR Counter OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT counter PRESET Counter SMOD SINGLE Counter MEAS FUNC TINT SOUR AB Counter INP MOD COM Counter SSIZE Sample size Counter INT OUTPUT FPO Counter MENU NUM Counter NUM DISP NUM EXP OFF GOSUB Example 1 GOSUB Example 2 GOSUB Example 3 GOTO End of program 470 Example 1 READ JUST MEASUREMENT RESULTS 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 PRINT PRINT EXAMPLE 1 MEAS RESULTS TRIGGER Counter GOSUB Read_header RESET Controller_buf Program Examples 1ENTER LIMIT VALUES HERE IPRESET THE HP 5373A ISINGLE SAMPLE MODE AUTO arming SOURCE 1Set Input Channels to COMmon 15 SAMPLE SIZE OUTPUT FORMAT FLOATING POINT NUMERIC MENU SCREEN TURN OFF EXPANDED DATA 5 RESULTS 5 LIMITS STATS RESULTS 1 5 GATE RESULTS BLOCK DATA HEADER TRANSFER Counter TO Contro
25. The HP 5373A Modulation Domain Pulse Analyzer operates as a stand alone test instrument or can work as part of an HP IB instrumentation network When connected to an HP IB network you can control the instrument using a program running on a compatible controller such as the Hewlett Packard 9000 series 200 300 controller This manual describes how to write programs to direct the operation of the instrument Before attempting to program the 5373 take some time to become familiar with the content and organization of this manual Topics in this chapter include Who should read this manual m How to use this manual m Related documentation m HP IBoverview m Writing programs This manual is written for a diverse audience First time users Experienced programmers To quickly grasp and use the concepts and techniques described in this manual you should have some programmin experience using a high level language such as Pascal BASIC C or FORTRAN Knowing the BASIC language is helpful but not absolutely required For the sake of simplicity and continuity all the programming examples in this manual are HP 5373A Programming Manual Experienced Programmers HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL written in HP BASIC If you know another version of BASIC such as GW BASIC you should be able to transfer that knowledge to the requirements of programming the HP 5373A There is nothing to preclude the use of languag
26. gt XARHold XMRHold YARHold YMRHold XMINimum number BWIDth number YMAXimum number GRAP TVAR XMSCale ON or OFF YMSCale ON or OFF XARHoid XMRHold YARHold YMRHold XMINimum number XMAXimum number YMINimum number YMAXimum number GRAP ETIM XMSCale ON or OFF XARHold XMRHold XMINimum number XMAXimum number Figure 4 2 Relationship of Command Structure to Front Panel Control 2 of 3 4 5 HP 5373A Programming Manual NUMERIC NUMeric NUM Result Displays Result Statistics Result Statistics Limit Status Bold Gate Data Expanded data Scroll keys These we the Up Down Cursor Scroil front panel keys DISP NUMeric DISP STATistics OISP SPLit DISP LIMit DISP BOLD EXPand ON or OFF SYSTEM INTerface INT SCRoll DOWN or UP HP IB Configuration Talk Only Print source Result Format Response Timeout System Clock DATE TIME PSOurce DISPlay or MEASurement gt Print Source OUTPut lt ASCii or BINary FPOint MTSTatus lt ON or OFF gt Measurement Timeout Status MTValue number Measurement Timeout Value DATe lt year month day gt TODay hour minute seconds Time of Day INPUT INPut INP Channels MODe lt SEParate or Separate Common Trigger Event Channel Slope Mode Le
27. X axis Manual Scale command query 5 52 YARH Y axis Auto Range Hold command 5 53 YMAX Y axis Maximum Value command query 5 58 YMRH Y axis Marker Range Hold command 5 53 YMSC Y axis Manual Scaling command query 5 53 HMAX Histogram Maximum Value query only 5 54 HME Histogram Mean Value query only 5 54 HMIN Histogram Minimum Value query only 5 54 HPA Histogram Pause command 5 54 HSD Histogram Standard Deviation Value query only 5 55 MCEN Modulation Center Value query only 5 55 MDM Marker Display Mode 5 55 MDOW Move Marker Down 5 56 MEM Memory Graph command 5 56 X Axis Maximum query only 5 56 XMIN X Axis Minimum query only 5 57 YMAX Y Axis Maximum query only 5 57 YMIN Y Axis Minimum query only 5 57 MGR Main Graph command 5 57 XMAX X Axis Maximum query only 5 57 XMIN X Axis Minimum query only 5 58 Table of Contents Chapter 5 YMAX Y Axis Maximum query only COMMAND REFERENCE YMIN Y Axis Minimum query only Continued MLEF Move Marker Left command M
28. XMAR MDMode MARKer XVAL YMAR MDMode MARKer YVAL DELTA ON MDMode DELTa DELTA OFF MDMode MARKer XDEL MDMode DELTa XVAL YDEL MDMode DELTa YVAL STATistics MDMode STATistics MIN HMINimum MAX HMAXimum MEAN HMEan SDEV HSDev RESCale ZOOM FULL VAUToscale no equivalent XAUToscale ON XMSCale ON XAUToscale OFF XMSCale OFF YAUToscale ON YMSCale ON YAUToscale OFF YMSCale OFF CHANnel A B VCHannel A B C UPDate OFF no equivalent BINS no equivalent SCRoll LEFT no equivalent SCRoli RIGHt no equivalent DISPlay ON SGRaph MAIN MEMory ON SGRaph MEMory AEVents 1 BEVents EVT2 EVENts ON OFF no equivalent LIMit ON OFF no equivalent 3 HP 5373A Programming Manual FA Commands CLS command System ESE command query System ESR query System HSE command query System HSR query System IDEN query System command query System OPT query System PSC command query System RCL command System RST command System SAV command System 5 command query System TRG command System TST query System ABORt command System 5 8 Address HP IB Addressing Alpha format ARMing command query MEASureme
29. or Period i OF T0817 event stamp 1 event stamp Expanded Data for PRF Frequency PRI and Period measurements is Measurement Gate Time Gate Time is generated by calculating the elapsed time between samples Measurement Gate Time time stampj 1 time stamp TIME DEVIATION PHASE DEVIATION AND FREQUENCY DEVIATION RESULTS nA to t2 t3 1 e e3 e WENGONSM Figure 2B E Time Deviation and Phase Deviation Example Signal showing Time and Event Stamp Measurement Points Time Deviation 6 1 XP t 1 t1 Phase Deviation X P 6 1 ty x 360 Frequency Deviation 1 9 f 1 6 Notes 1 Period of reference signal 2 f frequency of reference signal 3 Results calculation assumes that the time stamp of the block arming edge is sample to excluded from the calculation shown Sample t is used as a reference edge the first result is generated by manipulation of sample t2 4 Result is negative if signal lags reference 3 50 Binary Output FORMAT 3 MEASUREMENT ARMING MODES Time Holdoff Event Holdoff Time Holdoff Event Holdoff Time Interval Event Interval Continuous Time Interval PRF Frequency PRI Period ON OFF How Signals Are Converted to Binary Data Example Frequency B Time Holdoff TIME STAMP OF BLOCK ARMING EDGE TIME HOLDOFF Jocyey J005 BINARY DATA JIOR
30. 1 Attn Following the OFFSET FLOWCHART the delay in Channel A is 9 900 ps 0 ps 400 ps 600 ps 10 900 ps Following the OFFSET FLOWCHART the delay in Channel B is 10 100 ps 0 ps 0 ps 0 ps 10 100 ps The offset to be added to the stop time data is Channel A delay Channel delay 10 900 ps 10 100 ps 800 ps Example 2 Measurement set up Time Interval B gt A Common Mode Channel A X2 5 Attn Channel B X2 5 Attn Following the OFFSET FLOWCHART the delay in Channel B is 10 100 ps 800 ps 400 ps 600 ps 11 900 ps Following the OFFSET FLOWCHART the delay in Channel A is 9 900 ps 0 ps 400 ps 0 ps 10 300 ps The offset that should be added to the stop time data is Channel delay Channel A delay 11 900 ps 10 300 ps 1600 ps OFFSET DETERMINATION FOR FORMATS 1B 3 2B Because these measurements time stamp the Block Arm the offset value refers to the delay between the block arming channel and the measurement channel The offset for these measurements is the delay between the measurement channel and the channel that arms the block of measurements The offset value should be subtracted from the first time datum this first time datum represents the time stamp of the Block Arm To calculate this offset use follow these steps 1 Determine the total delay on the block arming channel by following the OFFSET FLOWCHART for that channel 3 152 Binary Output 2 Dete
31. 15 Waiting for Stop 16 WARNING Both frequencies out of auto trigger range 16 WARNING Frequency too high for auto trigger C 16 WARNING Frequency too low for 16 HP 5373A Programming Manual Appendix D PROGRAMMING THE ARMING MODES Appendix E PROGRAM EXAMPLES Appendix F PROGRAM CONVERSION xxii Introduction Available Arming Modes Arming Mode Programming Commands Conventions used in Table D 2 Example Program Arming Excerpts Automatic Arming Mode Event Holdoff Arming Interval Sampling Arming Mode Event Interval Arming Status Byte Print Plot Teach Learn Programming Example E 11 Binary Data Output Examples Binary Example 1 Binary Example 2 Binary Example 1 ASCII Data Output Examples Floating Point Data Output Examples E 28 HP 5371A to 5373A Program Conversion F 1 5372A to HP 5373A Program Conversion F 1 1 BEFORE YOU START TO PROGRAM INTRODUCTION WHO SHOULD READ THIS MANUAL First Time Users
32. Binary Data Output er a 2 32 32 16 Normal Mode Bits 3 Fast Mode Bits 16 16 16 16 Figure 3 B Format 3 First Sample in Each Block n en oa ne 2 32 16 Normal Mode Bits 32 3 Fast Mode Bits 16 16 16 16 Figure 3 Format 3 Subsequent Samples Format 3 binary output is shown in Figures 3 B and 3 C above The first sample in each block contains two unused data fields as shown Each sample generates the binary data defined below 3 52 Binary Output First Sample UNUSED FIELD UNUSED FIELD TIME time of occurrence for each sample INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit EVENT binary event count current at sampling UNUSED FIELD TIME time of occurrence for each sample INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps a OTa 8 5 8 eJ Figure 3 D Format 3 Binary Output The binary data stream shown above was derived from the signal shown in Figure 3 A To produce valid event stamps your program must 1 Correct the binary event data for counter rollovers 2 If the measurement was made on Channel C multiply the event stamps data by four To produce valid time stamps your program must 1 Correct the binary time data for counter rollovers 2 Incorporate interpol
33. Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS HCEN 1E 6 Sets the Histogram Bin Center to 1 OUTPUT 703 MEAS HCEN Queries for the currently selected Histogram Bin Center setting Shortform HSP Histogram SPan Longform HSPAN The HSPan command sets the total time spanned for any of the histogram functions HCTinterval HPMTime HTIMe Setting HSPan can result in a change of the values associated with the HBINwidth HCENter or HSTart commands refer to the Operating Manual for further information about how setting the HSPan value interacts with HBINwid HCENter or HSTart The HSPan query returns the current Histogram Span value Range The Histogram Span is always 2000 times the HBINwidth bin width value thus the allowed choices for HSPan are the allowed choices for HBINwidth multiplied by 2000 The HSPan sequence begins with 400 nS 800 nS 1 6 usec 3 2 usec 4 usec HST Histogram Start command query INH Inhibit Measurement command query Command Reference Minimum and maximum limits are listed in Table 5 6 Examples Shortform Longform OUTPUT 703 MEAS HSP 400 9 Sets the Histogram Span to 400 nS OUTPUT 703 MEAS HSP Queries for the currently selected Histogram Span setting HST Histogram STart HSTART The HSTart command sets the start time for any of the histogram functions HCTinterval HPMTime HTIMe Setting HSTart can result in a change of the value associa
34. Longform MCENTER The MCENter queries asks for the modulation center value The result is obtained by analyzing the data between the vertical display markers for maximum Y axis peaks The center value is the midpoint between the peaks It is calculated as one of the results when MDMode equals MODulation Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP MCEN Queries for the Modulation Center value Shortform MDM Marker Display Mode Longform MDMODE The MDMode command sets the Marker Display Mode to MARKer DELTa STATistics or MODulation MARKer Marker coordinates X and Y DELTa marker values Delta X and Y between the two markers STATistics between the two markers MODulation parameters between the two markers 5 55 HP 5373A Programming Manual MARKer DELTa STATistics MODulation OUTPUT 703 GRAP MDM MARK Sets Marker Display Mode to Marker OUTPUT 703 GRAP MDM Queries for current Marker Display Mode MDOW move Marker DOWn MDOWN Use MDOWn to move the graphics display marker down This simulates using the front panel knob The complementary 1 to 80 OUTPUT 703 GRAP MDOW 40 Moves marker down 40 pixels MEM MEMory graph MEMORY The MEMory command selects the Memory Graph sublevel OUTPUT 703 GRAP MEM Selects the Memory Graph sublevel XMAX X axis Maximum value XMAXIMUM Use XMAXimum to query the X axis maximum value for the Parameters
35. ON OFF OUTLine PDEViation Mt SELect gt separator DISPloy t SELect SGRaph SGRaph separator MAIN SCALe ZOOM MAIN MEMory BOTH SMARker SMARker seporotor SSCRoll separator TVARiation Sublevel UPDate seporator WHiLe a LETT uPDote UPDote Figure 5 4 GRAPhic Subsystem Syntax Diagram 3 of 4 RRGRASKS Command Reference CONTINUED CoRaPhic T VCHannel seporotor gt VCHannel XVALue YSCale YVALue seporator Li ZOOM separator FULL RRGRAAXS Figure 5 4 GRAPhic Subsystem Syntax Diagram 4 of 4 EVT1 GH XARHold XMAXimum separator e number org XMAXimum gt XMINimum gt f separator number_arg gt XMINimum gt XMRHold OFF 5 Figure 5 5 GRAPhic Subsystem Sublevel Syntax Diagram 5 45 HP 5373A Programming Manual ae ee separator number_org gt BWiDth gt XARHold XMiNimum separator number arg XMINimum 1
36. The TEST command executes the diagnostic corresponding to the test number sent with the command The test numbers are 1 Self Test 14 CRT RAM 2 Time Base 15 LED Latch 3 Input Pods 16 CRT Controller 4 Input Amplifiers 17 Key Controller 5 Histogram 18 DMA Controller 6 CountICs 19 Front Panel 7 Gate Timer 20 CRT Adjustment 8 Measurement RAM 21 CRT Video Pattern 9 System ROM 22 External Amp 10 System RAM 23 Randomizer 11 Non volatile RAM 24 12 Real Time Clock 25 13 Coprocessor Calibrate Interps Cal Sensitivity The TEST query returns the PASS FAIL status and message of the last diagnostic test that was run OUTPUT 703 DIAG TEST 12 Executes the Real Time Clock diagnostic test Examples OUTPUT 703 DIAG TEST Queries the 5373A for the status and message of the last test Shortform Longform UFA run Until FAil UFAIL The UFAil command selects the Until Fail testing mode In this mode the HP 5373A continues running a diagnostic test until a failure occurs at which point the test is paused To enable the Until Fail mode send ON to turn off the mode send OFF After a test has been paused it can be continued by sending the CONTinue command or by pressing the Run softkey on the displayed test screen The UFAil query returns the current status of the Until Fail mode 5 141 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 142 Parameters Examples ON OFF
37. elapsed events PRF or Frequency elapsed time PRI or Period tim elapsed events Note that if the stop sample precedes the start sample the values for both elapsed time and elapsed events will be negative but the final result will be be a positive quantity EXPANDED DATA Expanded Data for PRF Frequency PRI and Period measurements is Measurement Gate Time Gate Time is generated by calculating elapsed time between start and stop samples Note that if the stop sample precedes the start sample the Measurement Gate Time calculation will be negative unless a provision is made in your algorithm for correction 3 106 Binary Output Binary Data Output In this format one of two patterns will occur If start precedes stop S sioe If stop f stor gt uwuseo ET EJ gt EVENTS TIME gt 32 32 32 32 16 2 16 16 16 16 Normat Mode Bits 32 Fast Mode Bits 16 16 3 MEOQUNDM Figure 10D C Format 10D Binary Output Start Before Stop The second pattern occurs if stop precedes start ET A 5 ART Fs ART 35 Normal Mode one 32 Fast Mode Bits 16 3 E MIO Figure 10D D Format 10D Binary Output Stop Before Start The two possible formats for binary output are shown above Each measurement consists of two samples start and stop If start precedes stop use the format shown in Figure 10D C Each pair of samples each measurement generates the set of bina
38. time datum 2 ns interpolator datum x 0 1 ns Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between the Start and Stop Channels There are several possible signal paths running from input connectors on the HP 5373A front panel to measurement hardware inside the instrument Signal routing depends on the selection of several parameters including Common Input Mode and Attenuation To adjust for this variation add a correction value called an offset to each stop channel time stamp Start channel time stamps require no correction Use Technical Note 4 to determine the correct value of offset for your application For the stop channel time stamp corrected stop time stamp stop time stamp offset Generating Final Function Results From Time Stamps Time Interval results are generated by calculating elapsed time between start time stamp and stop time stamp Time Interval corrected stop time stamp start time stamp 3 59 mid lon E D gt HP 5373A Programming Manual 3 60 Binary Output Format 4B ANDED CHANNEL S DATA ARMING MODES A B Automatic Interval Sampling Edge Holdoff Parity Sampling Repetitive Edge Sampling Repetitive Edge Parity Sampling Random Sampling Edge Interval Edge Event Edge Parity Edge Random Time Time Event Event MEASUREMENT Time Interval Time Time Event Event Time Interval A B ON BoA
39. variance B lt gt root variance B lt gt rms B lt gt lt allan variance B NL END Floating Point Measurement Result Format HP IB General Information Limit Testing Statistics Examples When the HP 5373A displays the LIMITS screen the statistical data above is not available Instead information about the number of measurements which passed and failed the limit testing high low and inside limits is sent The format is Single Result in LIMIT Screen low values A pass values A gt inside values A gt NA values A gt high values A NL END Dual Result in LIMIT Screen low values A pass values A inside values A gt NA values A gt high values A gt low values B pass values B inside values B NA values B lt gt high values B NLS END The floating point format Figure 2 4 offers faster transfer rates compared to ASCII rates by sending each result in a packed eight byte format The HP 5373A implements the double precision 64 bit floating point representation specified by ANSI TEEE Standard 754 1985 The floating point block message syntax is shown in Figure 2 4 Note that each block of data is terminated with EOI denoted in this text as END Exactly 6 digits RRFPFENS Figure 2 4 Floating Point Format Block Message Syntax 2 37 HP 5373A Prog
40. 3 48 Channel C Correction Producing Valid Time Stamps Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers 3 48 Incorporating Interpolator Data 3 48 Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between Block Arming Channel and Signal Channel 3 49 Generating Final Function Results from Time Stamps and Event Stamps Continuous Time Interval Results PRF Frequency PRI and Period Results Time Deviation Phase Deviation And Frequency Deviation 3 50 Format3 ore cines Mok D INC E ree UN e 3 51 How Signals Are Converted to Binary Data 3 51 Producing Results 3 51 Expanded Data 3 52 Binary Data 3 52 First Sample 3 53 Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps 3 53 Producing Valid Event 3 54 Correcting Event Data for Counter Rollovers 3 54 Channel Correction 3 54 Producing Valid Time Stamps 3 54 Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers 3 54 Incorporating I
41. A gt B ARM OUTPUT 703 STAR SLOP NEG CHAN DEL 25 DCH B The first program line selects a Time Interval measurement Channel A to Channel B with Event Holdoff arming The second line sets the measurement to begin after a negative edge on Channel A followed by 25 events on Channel B Figure D 2 shows the HP 5373A as it would be programmed Figure D 2 Event Holdoff Arming Mode Waiting for arming Time Int A Frequency FUNCTION Measurement Channel PRI block of weas Period Pre trigger Total Meas 188 Pulse Width Arming Mode f After edge of Pulse Count pos edges Offtine of Chan Then arm a block of measurements Sample Ara Duty Cycle jfrm sampling on meas channel automatically More D 7 HP 5373A Programming Manual Figure D 3 Interval Sampling Arming Mode Interval Sampling Arming Mode OUTPUT 703 MEAS FUNC FREQ SOUR A ARM ISAM 5 DEL 100E 6 This program line selects a Channel A Frequency measurement with Interval Sampling arming The interval is set to 100 microseconds Figure D 3 shows the HP 5373A as it would be programmed PRF PRF A 17 264 72 MHz Frequency FUNCTION Measurement Channel PRI Acquire MA block of IEEE Period Pre trigger Total Meas 1
42. Channel C Correction When making measurements on Channel C the event counter sees only one out of every four input events To correct for this multiply event data by four This must be done after correcting for counter rollovers PRODUCING VALID TIME STAMPS Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers Binary time data increases monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred An overflow processing routine must scan the time data for any datum which is smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Time Overflow Correction value to that datum and all subsequent data then continue the 3 41 pZ N gt HP 5373A Programming Manual scan An example routine is given in Technical Note 3 Time Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Incorporating Interpolator Data gt 250 The algorithm for producing time stamps from binary time data and binary interpolator data is 2A time stamp time datum x 2 ns interpolator datum x 0 1 ns Generating Final Function Results from Time Stamps and Event Stamps CONTINUOUS TIME INTERVAL RESULTS Continuous Time Interval results are generated by calculating elapsed time between contiguous time stamps For each contiguous pair Continuous Time Interval time stamp time stamp Expanded Data for Continuous Time Interval measurements is Missed Events Missed Events are defined as t
43. Correcting for Rollovers Between Start and Stop Correcting for Rollovers Between Measurements Incorporating Interpolator Data Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between the Start and Stop Channels 3 64 Generating Final Function Results From Time Stamps 3 65 Format 5A i oce tases ERR TM A OE S ao e aiti 3 67 How Signals are Converted to Binary Data 3 67 Producing Results 3 67 Expanded Data 3 68 Binary Data 3 68 Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps 3 68 Producing Valid Event 3 69 Correcting Event Data for Counter Rollovers 3 69 Channel C Correction 3 69 Producing Valid Time Stamps 3 70 Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers 3 70 Incorporating Interpolator Data 3 70 Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between the Start and Stop Channels 3 70 Generating Final Function Results From Event and Time Stamps 370 viii Table of Contents Chapter 3 Time Interval Results 3 70 BINARY OUTPUT Frequency PRI and Period Results
44. Statistical and Math functions are disabled The MANUAL input triggering mode is used to set the input voltage trigger levels Except where noted in the table a sample size of 10 blocks of 1000 measurements 10 000 total measurements is used to obtain the values m All values include the measurement time as well as the transfer time of the data using an input signal of 13 MHz 76 9 ns m For BINARY output rates the values represent the number of measurements sent to the controller and stored in a buffer without processing Processing time in the controller will vary with the controller the program language and the particular program 2 29 HP 5373A Programming Manual Table 2 7 Measurement Output Rates Binary Measurement Function ASCII Floating Point Normal Fast Time Interval 550 1200 12 000 16 000 Continuous Time Interval 2000 19 500 25 000 Time Interval 1200 T 12 000 16 000 Frequency Single Channel 1600 14 000 20 000 Frequency Dual Channel Single Result 750 6 000 9 500 Frequency Dual Channel Dual Result 300 750 6 000 9 500 Totalize Single Channel 2100 8 000 n a Totalize Dual Channel 2 1400 6 000 n a Rise Fall Times Pulse Width Pulse Offtime Duty 1000 12 000 16 000 Cycle Phase Dual Channel 450 850 12 000 16 000 Phase Deviation 1500 14 000 20 000 Frequency Deviation 1500 14 000 20 000 Time Deviation 14
45. TvResult TVResult separator ALL Figure 5 8 MEASurement Subsystem FUNCTION PRE TRIGGER Syntax Diagram 4 of 4 5 76 See PRET in MEASurement command list RRMEAQNS Command Reference Y CHANnel seporotor CHANnel N separator Bone CX x M DCHannel DELay separator event arg interval_arg cycle_arg DELay SLOPe separator POSitive NEGative SLOPe RRFUN3N3 Figure 5 9 MEASurement Subsystem SAMPle Sublevel Syntax Diagram 5 77 HP 5373A Programming Manual E A aay CHANnel DCHannel separator gt time arg RRFUNAN3 Figure 5 10 MEASurement Subsystem STARt Sublevel Syntax Diagram 5 78 Command Reference ARM Shortform ARMing Arming Longform ARMING comman ue dquety The ARMing command selects the arming for measurement of input signals Only certain arming modes are allowed for a given measurement function Appendix D describes allowed combinations of measurement functions and arming modes Refer to the operating manual for detailed descriptions of the arming modes The ARMing query returns the currently active arming mode Parameters Arming options are PARAMETER ARMING AUTOMATIC AUTo
46. in the direction of an arrow For example if you enter from the left at the box labeled Subsystem Selectors you can choose one of the eight subsystems select a command drop down and select a sublevel command if applicable come back to the top and stop Or continue by inserting a separator at the top of the diagram and then loop back and select another subsystem Subsystem commands and sublevel commands diagrammed in this illustration are completely collapsed representations of what you see diagrammed at the start of the respective Command Reference entries Chapter 5 The Command Reference diagrams are expanded to show every command and sublevel command and give applicable command arguments and modifiers Queries are also diagrammed Programming Rules and Guidance Subsystem System 1 Selectors Commands NUMeric Subsystem Commands a Subsystem Commands Y Sublevel Commands FUNCTIONS f gt MEASurement f X 1 gt PRE TRIGGER Subsystem Commands 5 Sublevel Commands Subsystem Commands Sublevel Commands PROCess i gt Subsystem Commands Sublevel Commands ISTote Subsystem Commands epe Commands 3 Subsystem Commonds i TEST DlAGnosti
47. 28 softkey 5 58 DOWN cursor 29 softkey 6 59 LEFT cursor 32 FUNCTION menu 60 NUMERIC menu 33 MATH menu 61 GRAPHICS menu 34 INSTRUMENT STATE menu 62 STATUS menu 35 TEST menu 63 PRINT 36 INPUT menu 64 SHIFT 37 PRE TRIGGER menu 65 LOCAL 38 SYSTEM menu 66 RESTART 39 HELP menu 67 SINGLE REPET 40 49 digits 0 9 68 MANUAL ARM see note 50 Decimal point 69 SAVE 51 plus minus 70 RECALL 52 ENTER 71 PRESET m 5373A Programming Manual 5 16 LOC Local commanij Examples OUTPUT 703 KEY 39 Presses the HELP menu key OUTPUT 703 KEY Queries for the last 20 keys that were pressed NOTE The MANUAL ARM key provides two functions Provides manual control of the measurement gate for Totalize measurements using MANUAL arming mode This is the only measurement and arming mode for which this key performs a manual arm function Aborts a measurement in progress The function is performed for all measurement and arming modes other than Totalize measurements using MANUAL arming mode This function is identical to using the ABORt command Shortform LOCal Longform LOCAL The LOCal command returns the instrument to Local front panel operation The LOCal command performs a similar operation to the Clear Lockout Set Local HP IB message This command is provided for controllers with limited HP IB control capability The HP IB Clear Lockout Set Local message is the preferred method o
48. 5 137 OUTP Output Format command query 5 138 PSO Print Source command query 5 138 Diagnostic TEST Subsystem 5 139 CONT Continue Test 5 140 PAUS Pause Test command 5 140 STOP Stop Test command 5 140 TEST Run Test command query 5 141 UFA Run Until Fail 5 141 Introduction 222 2 2 1 Connecting to a Controller 1 Connecting to a Printer or Plotter 4 HP 5373A Programming Manual Appendix Default Measurement Setups 1 DEFAULT MEASUREMENT General Conditions B 1 SETUPS Appendix C Introduction 2 22 2 2 STATUS AND ERROR Static Status Messages MESSAGES Momentary Status Messages Momentary Warning Messages Static Error Messages Static Failure Messages Error Queue Query Command Status And Error Message Descriptions C 3 Abort only allowed in Single
49. Commands in this subsystem are equivalent to the front panel COMMANDS INSTRUMENT STATE menu screen The syntax diagram for the ISTate subsystem command including the REGister sublevel is illustrated in Figure 5 15 sep arator iSTote gt m ERASe seporator REGister separator De Ug li PROTect T PROTect REGister The REGister command must be used to select a register before the REGister query can be used RRISTRNS Figure 5 15 Instrument State Syntax Diagram 5 131 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 132 ERAS Erase Register command REG Register command query PROT Protect Register command query Shortform ERAS ERASe register Longform ERASE The ERASe command erases a specified non protected register If a protected register is specified a Register protected error occurs If Register 0 is specified a Register out of range error occurs Parameters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Example OUTPUT 703 IST ERAS 3 Erases register 3 if that register is not protected Shortform REG REGister Longform REGISTER The REGister command specifies the register to be protected by the PROTect command Register 1 through 9 may be specified for protection Register 0 is always protected if specified a Register out of range error occurs Refer to the SAV and RCL system commands for information about using the registers for saving an
50. EVENT STATUS REGISTER Reading the Event Status Register The Hardware Status Enable Register is read with the HSE query This query returns an integer value representing the sum of the binary weighted values of the register bits as previously described for the Hardware Status Register For example a returned integer value of 68 64 4 indicates that bit 6 and bit 2 of the Hardware Status Enable Register are set to 1 thus enabling bit 6 POF Power On Failure and bit 2 APD Channel A Pod of the Hardware Status Register The Hardware Status Enable Register is written to with the HSE command The numeric argument of this command must be the integer representation of the sum of the binary weighted values of the enabled bits Using the example of the previous paragraph an integer value of 68 would be written to the register to set bit 6 and bit 2 to 1 The Hardware Status Enable Register is cleared by m Sending the HSE command with a numeric data value of zero A power on transition if PSC is true The Event Status Register is a 16 bit register that reflects generic error conditions and operating states These status conditions are summarized by the Event Status Bit ESB summary message which appears in bit 5 of the Status Byte Register Table 2 5 defines the status bits contained in the Event Status Register as well as the specific HP 5373A implementation Note that the HP 5373A uses only some of the available bits
51. IF Num meas Block size THEN Disp Measurement aborted Number of measurements amp VAL Num meas ELSE Disp Measurement complete Number of measurements amp VAL Num meas END IF OUTPUT Hp5373a Loc 1 Put in local DISP Disp SUBEXIT 1 Waiting If a non assigned softkey is pressed just RETURN RETURN 1 SUBEND Transfer data SUB Plot it Data pts Freq Seconds COM Measurements INTEGER Block size Num meas REAL Samp time Time out INTEGER I GINIT GCLEAR GRAPHICS ON VIEWPORT 25 100 RATIO 30 98 CSIZE 3 5 PEN 7 LINE TYPE 3 FRAME PEN 1 LINE TYPE 1 CLIP OFF Min freq MIN Freq Max freq MAX Fred IF Max freq Min lt 1 THEN Max freq Max freq 1 E 5 ABS Max freq Min freg Min freq 1 E 5 ABS Min freq END IF WINDOW 0 1 0 1 MOVE 0 1 LORG 8 LABEL VAL DROUND Max freq 10 amp MOVE 0 5 LABEL Hz MOVE 0 0 LABEL VALS DROUND Min freq 10 amp MOVE 0 0 LORG 6 LABEL MOVE 0 0 E 4 Program Examples 1540 LORG 3 1550 LABEL 0 1560 MOVE 5 0 1570 LORG 6 1580 LABEL seconds 1590 MOVE 1 0 1600 LORG 9 1610 Total_time SUM Seconds 1620 LABEL PROUND Total time 12 1630 CLIP ON 1640 PENUP 1650 PEN 3 1660 Prior time 0 1670 WINDOW O Total time Min freq Max freq 1680 FOR I 1 TO Num meas 1690 PLOT Seconds I Prior_time Freq I 1700 Prior_time Seconds I Prior_time 1710 NEXT I 1720 SUBEND Plot it 1730 1 1740 1 1750 1 1760 SUB Sort data D
52. OUTPUT 703 DIAG UFA ON Runs the currently selected diagnostic test and pauses if a failure occurs OUTPUT 703 DIAG UFA Queries for the current on off status of the Until Fail mode INTRODUCTION CONNECTING TO A CONTROLLER APPENDIX A HP IB INTERCONNECTION The HP 5373A has two HP IB operating modes m Talk Listen This mode is for bi directional communication The HP 5373A can receive commands and setups from the controller and can send data and measurement results w Talk Only In this mode the HP 5373A can send data and measurement results it cannot receive commands or setups from the controller Refer to the operating manual for instructions on how to change the HP IB operating modes Section 2 of this programming manual describes how to set the HP 5373A HP IB address Connect the HP 5373A to a controller by simply installing an HP IB cable such as an HP 10833A cable between the two units Figure A 1 Figure A 1 2 of 2 provides interconnection data about the rear panel connector on the HP 5373A This connector is compatible with the HP 10833A B C D cables Up to 15 HP IB compatible instruments including the controller can be interconnected in a system The HP IB cables have identical piggy back connectors on both ends so that several cables can be connected to a single source without special adapters or Switch boxes System components and devices m
53. On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Time Overflow Correction value to that datum and all subsequent data then continue with the scan An example is given in Technical Note 3 Time Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Incorporating Interpolator Data The algorithm for producing time stamps from binary time data and binary interpolator data is time stamp time datum x 2 ns interpolator datum 0 1 ns 3 48 Binary Output Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between Block Arming Channel and Signal Channel There are several possible signal paths running from signal input connectors on the HP 5373A front panel to measurement hardware inside the instrument Signal routing depends on the selection of several parameters including Common Input Mode and Attenuation To adjust for this variation subtract a correction value called an offset from the time stamp associated with the first sample in each block Subsequent time stamps require no correction UseTechnical Note 4 to determine the correct value of offset for your application For the first sample in each blak corrected time stamp time stamp offset Generating Final Function Results from Time Stamps and Event Stamps NOTE The Block Start Status Bit is bit 6 of the interpolator status field The Block Start Status Bit is 1 for the first sample in a block When this occurs the corresponding time datum con
54. TEST DIAG YMSCale GRAP TVAR TODay System YMSCale GRAP HIST TODay System YMSCale GRAP TVAR TRiGger INP SOUR YSCale GRAP TRiGger INP SOUR YSCale GRAP TVARiation GRAP YVALue GRAP TVResult MEAS TVResult MEAS ZOOM GRAP UFAil DIAG CLS System DIAG ESE System UPDate GRAP ESE System UPDate GRAP ESR System HSE System VARiance PROC SOUR HSE System VCHannel GRAP HSR System VCHannel GRAP IDN System OPC System WINTerval System OPC System WTSend System OPT System WTSend System PSC System PSC System XARHold GRAP ETIM RCL System XARHold GRAP HIST RST System XARHold GRAP TVAR SAV System XMAXimum GRAP ETIM SRE System XMAXimum GRAP TVAR SRE System XMAXimum GRAP ETIM STB System XMAXimum GRAP MEM TRG System XMAXimum GRAP MGR TST System XMAXimum GRAP TVAR XMINimum GRAP ETIM XMINimum GRAP HIST XMINimum GRAP TVAR XMINimum GRAP ETIM XMINimum GRAP HIST XMINimum GRAP MEM XMINimum GRAP MGR XMINimum GRAP TVAR XMRHold GRAP ETIM XMRHold GRAP HIST XMRHold GRAP TVAR XMSCale GRAP ETIM SYSTEM COMMANDS sep arator SYSTEM COMMANDS Command Reference System commands control general instrument functions Your program can issue them at any time That is you can issue a system command no matter which subsystem is designated the active subsystem System commands do not change the subsystem selection when the system command executes the HP 5373A returns to the curren
55. The OPC query returns a 1 when an operation is complete Note that the value returned will always be 1 because the OPC query is not parsed until all previous commands have been completed Examples OUTPUT 703 OPC Set the OPC bit in the Event Status Register to 1 when all operations are finished OUTPUT 703 OPC Queries for operation completion Shortform OPT installed OPTions Longform OPT The OPT query returns a string indicating which options are installed in the HP 5373A The string returned is either NONE no options installed or the option number For example 030 Option 030 Rear Panel Inputs installed Example OUTPUT 703 OPT Queries for installed options 5 31 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 32 PSC Power On Status Clear command query RCL Recall Register command Shortform PSC Power on Status Clear Longform PSC The PSC command controls the automatic power on clearing of the Service Request Enable register Event Status Enable register and the Hardware Status Enable register Sending the PSC command with any number that rounds to a non zero value causes the HP 5373A to clear set to 0 all bits in the registers at power on Sending PSC 0 allows the HP 5373A to send a Service Request at power on if required and if the appropriate register bits have been enabled The PSC query returns the value of the Power On Clear flag A re
56. The HP 5373A responds to Inhibit by discarding measurements in which either start sample stop sample or both have been Inhibited Thus measurements requiring a start and stop sample such as Time Interval or measurements requiring first and second attempts at data capture such as Totalize will always be delivered to the binary output in pairs as expected 3 15 5373A Programming Manual Time Stamps Associated With Block Arming Edge Inhibit Status Bit The Interpolator Status Field see paragraph entitled Interpolator Status Field which follows contains information regarding the Inhibit function Bit 5 in this field is the Inhibit status bit If bit 5 is 1 the current measurement sample was preceded by Inhibit Otherwise bit 5 is 0 Measurement Results When activated Inhibit extends the elapsed time between samples Because the HP 53734 services Inhibit selectively many measurement results will not be affected There are two ways Inhibit will affect measurements m During measurements which have both a start and a stop signal Inhibit extends the interval between measurements It does not affect the time between start and stop m Forallother measurements asserting Inhibit affects data by extending the measurement gate time Certain measurements produce not only standard measurement data but arming information as well For these measurements the trigger event which arms the block produces the first time
57. There are N samples for this format NOTE Although this routine is written for 2N samples only the stop data is valid in this mode and the odd numbered samples are ignored Data Structure Notes 1 One dimensional array 2 Odd indices are unused 3 Even Indices reference Stop Samples FOR i 1 TO N 1 IF event 2 i 2 lt event 2 i THEN 113 next sample less than current sample FOR j 1 1 TO 1 all following samples event 2 j event 2 j 2 321add overflow value NEXT j ENDIF NEXT i 3 144 FORMAT 8 See Format 4A FORMAT 10A See Format 4A FORMAT 10B See Format 4B FORMAT 10C See Format 4A Binary Output 3 145 HP 5373A Programming Manual FORMATS 11 12 AND 13 Rollover processing in Totalize mode also checks to see if the time and event data increase monotonically If a time or event datum is less than a previous datum then a counter rollover must have occurred Care must be taken however to determine which time and event data is valid In Totalize mode the 5373A attempts to capture event data twice Thus event data must be checked to see whether the first attempt or the second attempt at data capture is valid This is done by checking the appropriate status bit in the Interpolator Status Field If the status bit is a zero use the first attempt at data capture if the status bit is one use the second attempt at data capture and subtract 1 from the binary number re
58. Time and event stamps must have been corrected for offset and counter rollover as discussed above before performing calculations Pulse Offtime tz to 1 3 96 Binary Output PHASE Chan A Chan B H t2 13 n 15 tg 41 eg CPER Figure 10B I Phase Example Signal Showing Time and Event Stamp Measurement Points The formula for calculating Phase is given below In Figure 10 1 t and e refer to time stamps and event stamps respectively Time and event stamps must have been corrected for offset and counter rollover as discussed above before performing calculations Phase fractional phase difference whole number of cycles of phase difference 12142 t2i Phase A rel B Zit 21 t2i 2 t2i e2 i 2 7 2i fe 41 7 7 62i 42 e2 x 360 t2i 1 61 2 t2 1 t2i 1 e2i 1 7 2i 1 Phase B rel A cai 42 92 621 1 e x 360 3 97 gt EP 5373A Programming Manual 3 98 Binary Output Format 10C EXPANDED DATA ON OFF MEASUREMENT PRF Frequency PRI Period CHANNEL S ARMING MODES Dual Automatic Ratio Interval Sampling Sum and Edge Sampling Difference of Edge Interval and How Signals are Converted to Binary Data Example Frequency A and B Automatic P CHANNEL MEASUREMENT
59. display The signal used for this measurement example was a 19 MHz input signal A one millisecond gate time sample interval was selected For this measurement the HP 5373A uses output format 2A see Chapter 3 Binary Output for details on format types 1 98887 9 S9E 7 i tah T m i m i 1 888825513E 7 amp seconds 4 8949993984 MIT Figure E 1 Binary Example Graphic Display E 21 HP 5373A Programming Manual Binary 3 Program Listing INTEGER Buff 1 4096 1 5 BUFFER Block size REAL Freq 1 4095 Time 1 4095 COM Constants Format bytes Two expl6 Two exp32 Block size 4095 As an input parameter this specifies the number of 1 MEASUREMENTS requested As an output parameter it 1 Specifies the number of time stamps returned 1 usually MEASUREMENTS 1 unless system was aborted 1 1 Two 16 2716 Two exp32 2 32 Format bytes 10 EVENTS 4 BYTES TIME 4 BYTES STATUS INTERP 1 2 BYTES SET UP CONSTANTS Gate time 0 PRINT CHR 12 Clear alpha screen INPUT ENTER GATE TIME 0 FOR AUTOMATIC ARMING Gate time Transfer data Gate time Block size Buff Convert bin72 Block size Buff Time Freq Plot data Time Freq END SUB Transfer data Gate time INTEGER Block size Data buff BUFFER Transfer data Sets up and transfers a block of data from the HP5373A DISP Setting up
60. for details on format types The frequency measurements are sent over the HP IB as binary data The example program then converts the binary data in the controller and displays the measurements This example program contains three subroutines 1 Transfer data This subroutine sets up the HP 5373A to take 10 Frequecy measurements It then initiates the measurements and uses the TRANSFER statement to read the measurement data from the HP 5373A 2 Convert bin72 This subroutine converts the binary Time Event and Interpolator data into Time and Event Stamps which are then used to calculate the Frequency measurements 3 Disp data This subroutine displays the value of the Time Stamp of the Block Arm and the 10 Frequency readings To use this program 1 Install an an HP 54002A 50Q Input Pod as the HP 5373A CHANNEL A Input 2 Connect a 10 MHz signal to Channel A 3 LOAD and RUN the program Binary 2 Program Listing INTEGER Buff 0 12 1 7 BUFFER Block size Dimension Buff to hold Event Time and Interpolator data for 10 measurements Because this measurement uses Format 3 output mode there lare N41 Time and Event Stamps plus 1 extra Time Stamp for the Time Stamp tof the Block Arm This gives a total of 12 Time and Event Stamp sets leach set being stored in 7 bytes REAL Freq 1 10 Time stamp 0 10 Dimension Freq and Time arrays to hold Imeasurements com Constants Format_bytes Two_exp16 Two_exp32 Block_size 10 Block_size spe
61. smallest time value in each pair called true start and identifies the largest time value in the preceding pair called true stop If true stop is greater than true start a counter rollover has occurred between pairs The appropriate Time Overflow Correction should be added to all data subsequent to true stop Following correction resume the scan at the next pair An example routine is given in Technical Note 3 Time Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Incorporating Interpolator Data The algorithm for producing time stamps from binary time data and binary interpolator data is time stamp time datum X 2 ns interpolator datum x 0 1 ns 3 93 22707 p HP 5373A Programming Manual Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between the Start and Stop Channels 5 There are several possible signal paths running from signal input connectors on the HP 5373A front panel to measurement hardware inside the instrument Signal routing depends on the H selection of several parameters including Common Input Mode and Attenuation To adjust for Lll this variation add a correction value called offset to each stop channel time stamp Start 108 channel time stamps require no correction Use Technical Note 4 to determine the correct value of offset for your application The formula is corrected stop time stamp stop time stamp offset Generating Final Function Results
62. stop time stamp offset Generating Final Function Results From Event and Time Stamps Time Interval results are generated by calculating elapsed time between start time stamp and stop time stamp Time Interval corrected stop time stamp start time stamp Expanded Data for Time Interval measurements is Missed Events Missed Events are trigger events which are counted between start and stop samples in the same measurement but which are not time stamped The formula is Missed Events stop event stamp start event stamp 1 3 76 Binary Output Format 6 MEASUREMENT CHANNEL S Time Interval gt BoA How Signals are Converted to Binary Data ARMING MODES Time Holdoff Event Holdoff Example Time Interval A gt B Time Holdoff ME ASUREMENTS REF e TIME HOLDOFF Start BB C Je CJ8CJE 9808 9063 BINARY DATA Figure 6 A Time Interval A gt Measurement With Time Holdoff Arming Mode Showing Corresponding Binary Data Output Producing Results Time Interval results are generated by calculating the elapsed time between start and stop samples EXPANDED DATA Expanded Data for Time Interval A gt and Time Interval B gt A is normally Missed Start Channel Events and Missed Stop Channel Events For this format 6 only Missed Stop Channel Events are available Missed Stop Channel Events are defined as stop cha
63. 000 000 the corresponding Block Size is decreased to keep the total less than 2E 15 measurements Type Static Status Associated With System Operation This message is displayed while the HP 5373A is calculating the measurement results It is erased when the calculation process is complete Type Momentary Associated With Numeric Entry Status This message occurs when a decimal point is not allowed at this point in the current numeric entry sequence because the exponent value has already been specified e g the value currently being entered is 1 2E 01 Type Momentary Associated With Numeric Entry Status This message occurs when a decimal point is not allowed at this point in the current numeric entry sequence because a decimal point has already been entered e g the value currently being entered is 1 2 HP 5373A Programming Manual Enter register number Error 100 Unrecognized command Error 120 Numeric Argument error Error 151 Query not allowed Binary format Error 100 No Listeners on bus Error 101 Talker no listeners Type Static Status Associated With Save Recall This message appears after pressing the SAVE or RECALL keys prompting the user to select one of the saved configuration registers Type Static Error Associated With Standard HP Error This message occurs when an invalid command has been sent via HP IB Examples are commands not valid for the currently sp
64. 000 20 000 eee TI Histogram T Histogram Continuous Envelope Power4 Amplitude Modulation4 NOTES TO TABLE 2 7 1 Event Event Arming for Time Interval or 2 Interval Sampling of 100 ns 3 Characterized using full Histogram format consequently all 200 Histogram bin counts are transferred Results are bin counters per second 4 Characterized using ten measurements 2 30 Aborting a Measurement BINARY OUTPUT FORMAT HOW TO USE ASCII AND FLOATING POINT FORMATS ASCII Measurement Result Format HP IB General Information Sometime you may want to abort a measurement before the process is complete A program listed in Appendix E demonstrates how to abort any HP 5373A measurement Use the ABORT command to halt measurement at any time You can retrieve all data captured up to the time the ABORT command executes When set for Binary data output the HP 5373A outputs raw data from its internal count registers For more information on use of the Binary output format see Chapter 3 ASCII and floating point data formats are described in the following paragraphs See Appendix E for example programs which demonstrate use of data in these formats Use the ASCII measurement result format to transmit processed measurement data To accomodate a wide range of values the ASCII measurement results are formatted as illustrated in the syntax diagrams in Figure 2 3 2 31 HP 5373A Programming Manual
65. 113 Producing Valid Time Stamps 3 113 Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers 3 113 Incorporating Interpolator Data 3 113 Generating Final Function Results from Time Stamps and Event Stamps 3 114 Format 12 2 2222 2 2 hr e rh rm 3 115 How Signals Converted to Binary Data 3 115 Producing Results 3 15 Expanded Data 3 115 Binary Data 3 116 Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps 3 116 HP 5373A Programming Manual Chapter 3 Producing Valid Event 3 117 BINARY OUTPUT Henne the Datum Which Represents the Valid ere vent Count Continued Correcting Event Data for Counter Rollovers 3 117 Producing Valid Time Stamps 3 117 Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers 3 117 Incorporating Interpolator Data 3 117 Generating Final Function Results From Time Stamps and Event Stamps 3 118 Formatia o etie Dire ev 3 119 How Signals are Converted to Binary Data 3 119 Producing Results 8 119 Expanded Da
66. 2 i 2 TO 2 N 1 Ifor all following samples event j event j 2732 overflow value to all samples 3 146 Binary Output NEXT j ENDIF ELSE valid next sample is that pairs first read attempt check second read and first read IF event 2 i 1 lt event 2 i THEN next sample lt than current sample FOR j 2 i 1 TO 2 N41 1for all following samples event j event j 2 32 tadd overflow value to all samples NEXT j ENDIF ELSE valid current sample is first read attempt IF 1 2 i 2 THEN valid next sample is that pair s second read attempt check first read and second read IF event 2 i 2 lt event 2 i 1 THEN next sample lt than current sample FOR j 2 i42 TO 2 N 1 1for all following samples event j event j 2 32 ladd overflow value to all samples NEXT j ENDIF ELSE valid next sample is that pair s first read attempt check first read and first read IF event 2 i41 lt event 2 i 1 THEN next sample lt than current FOR j 2 1 1 TO 2 N 1 1 all following samples event j event j 2 32 tadd overflow value to all samples NEXT j ENDIF ENDIF NEXT i The algorithm for the time data is N the number of desired results There are 2 N 1 samples for this format NOTE Only use the second attempt at data capture This example uses a one dimensional array to hold all the binary time data Data in the odd indices is unused Data in the even indices contain time data for cor
67. 85 Producing Results 3 85 Expanded Data 3 85 Binary Data 3 86 Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps 3 87 Producing Valid Event 5 3 87 Correcting Start Channel Data for Counter Rollovers 3 87 Correcting Stop Channel Data for Counter Rollovers 3 87 Producing Valid Time Stamps 3 88 Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers 3 88 Incorporating Interpolator Data 3 88 Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between the Start and Stop Channels 3 88 Generating Final Function Results From Time Stamps 3 88 10 3 89 How Signals Converted to Binary Data 3 89 Producing Results 3 90 Expanded Data 3 90 Binary Data 3 91 Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps 3 91 Producing Valid Event 3 92 Correcting Start Channel Data for Counter Rollovers 3 92 Correcting Stop Channel Data for Counter Rollovers 3 92 Producing Valid Time Stamps 3 93
68. A inside values A NA values A gt high values A END Dual Result in LIMIT Screen header low values A pass values A inside values A gt lt NA values A gt high values A low values B pass values B inside values B NA values B high values B END INTRODUCTION How Binary Data Is Created 3 BINARY OUTPUT Binary data output is the one of the fastest ways of transferring data from the HP 5373A 50 to 100 times faster than other formats Transfer rates of 19 500 measurements per second or more can be achieved using the binary output Much of this speed is achieved because the binary output is unprocessed data from the HP 5373A measurement circuits Binary data must be processed externally in order to obtain measurement results PRF Frequency Time Interval etc data may also be combined in new ways to fulfill the needs of special applications This chapter describes the various binary output data formats how to process the data from these formats and how to combine the processed data to obtain measurement results The HP 5373A captures data in two types of count registers event and time Both are 32 bit counters consisting of two 16 bit integrated circuits in series The accuracy and resolution of the time counter is increased by a circuit called an interpolator See Figure 3 1 HP 5373A Programming Manual m TRIGGER
69. B 1 OUTPUT Counter PROC SOUR A LIM OFF STAT OFF TURN LIMITS STATS OFF OUTPUT Counter NUM DISP NUM EXP ON 1 DATA ON 1 TRIGGER Counter GOSUB Read header READ BLOCK DATA HEADER 1 FOR AND TI THERE IS NO EVENT DATA FOR LAST MEASUREMENT I SINCE EVENT DATA NEEDS TWO ENDPOINTS FOR EACH MEASUREMENT 1 RESET Controller buf TRANSFER Counter TO Controller buf COUNT Num bytes READ MEASUREMENT AND GATE RESULTS PRINT PRINT MEAS MEAS RESULT EVENT A EVENT B J 1 FOR I 1 TO Sample size 1 IREAD MEASUREMENT AND GATE RESULTS Meas a I Buff J Event a I Buff J41 Event b I sBuff J42 PRINT I Meas a I Event a I Event b I J I 3 NEXT I Read_header 1 ENTER Counter USING 8A Header Num bytes VAL Header 3 PRINT Num bytes BYTES EXPECTED End of program END HP 5371A to HP 5373A PROGRAM CONVERSION HP 5372A to HP 5373A PROGRAM CONVERSION APPENDIX PROGRAM CONVERSION The HP 53734 feature set is considerably enhanced over that of the HP 5371A Thus for the most part the HP 5371A HP IB command set is a subset of the HP 5373A HP IB commands Those HP 5371A commands which have been changed in the HP 5373A are shown in Table F 1 along with their equivalent HP 5373A commands When the HP 53734 is sent one of the HP 5371A commands from this table it will translate to the equivalent new command then execute the
70. Chapter 9 Math Menu in the HP 5373A Operating Manual NOTE The HP 5373A will return 1E38 for these queries if statistics are not being calculated for the channel selected with SOURce Shortform AVAR Allan VARiance Longform AVARIANCE The AVARiance query returns the value of the Allan Variance The Allan variance is calculated by taking the sum of squares of differences between consecutive measurements for the last set of measurements This value will not be calculated if the Inhibit function is enabled Example OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR A A VAR Queries for the Allan Variance value Shortform MAX MAXimum Longform MAXIMUM The MAXimum query returns the maximum value in the last set of measurements Example OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR A MAX Queries for the maximum value in the last set of measurements MEAN Mean query only MIN Minimum query only RAV Root Allan Variance query only RMS RMSQ Root Mean Square query only SDEV Standard Deviation query only Command Reference Shortform MEAN MEAN Longform MEAN The MEAN query returns the mean value of the last set of measurements Example OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR A MEAN Queries for the arithmetic mean of the last set of measurements Shortform MIN MINimum Longform MINIMUM The MINimum query returns the minimum value in the last set of measurements Example OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR B MI
71. Data Parity Sampling Repetitive Edge Sampling Repetitive Edge Parity Sampling Random Sampling Edge Interval Edge Parity Edge Random ON OFF Automatic ON OFF Automatic Interval Sampling Edge Holdoff Edge Interval Example Time Interval B gt A Automatic 3 89 gt 0 E HP 5373A Programming Manual RR IEASUREME ARMED Start Bae Stop 451 JOCJEJ BINARY DATA Figure 10B A Time Interval gt A Measurement on Channel gt A with Automatic Arming Mode Showing Corresponding Binary Output Producing Results Time Interval results are generated by calculating the elapsed time between start and stop samples Characteristic of Time Interval measurements start may follow stop as shown above In these cases the measurement result is negative EXPANDED DATA Expanded Data for Time Interval A gt or Time Interval gt A measurements is Missed Start Channel Events and Missed Stop Channel Events Missed Start Channel Events are defined as start channel trigger events which are counted between start samples but which are not time stamped The formula is Missed Events events elapsed on the start channel between successive starts 1 Missed Stop Channel Events are defined as stop channel trigger events which are counted between stop samples but which are not time st
72. Duty Cycle iFollowing the block arming sequence sampling meas channel after More 9 HP 5373A Programming Manual D 10 INTRODUCTION ABORT APPENDIX E PROGRAM EXAMPLES Refer to the sample programs for guidance in programming the HP 5373A Sample programs in this appendix include Abort Status Byte Print Plot Teach Learn Binary ASCII Floating point NOTE All the program examples in this Appendix require that an HP 54002A 50Q Input Pod be installed as the HP 5373A CHANNEL A Input This example program uses the INTERVAL sampling mode of the HP 5373A to make a frequency measurement The measurement can be completed in 3 ways It can end when all of the samples determined by the variable Block_size are taken when the user presses the Abort softkey on the computer or when a measurement takes longer than specified in the variable Time_out You specify which way to end a measurement The program consists of a main program and 3 subprograms In the main program variables are assigned to set up the 5373A Block size indicates the number of measurements you want taken if an abort does not occur Samp_time defines the sample interval Time_out controls how long the program waits before issuing the ABORT command As the example program is listed the HP 5373A aborts a measurement three HP 5373A
73. Figure 14 B Format 14 Binary Output Format 14 binary output is shown in Figure 14 B above Each sample generates the binary data described below START EVENT instrument s first attempt at capture of a valid event datum UNUSED FIELD INT status bits only Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit START EVENT instrument s second attempt at capture of a valid event datum TIME time of occurrence for sample INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Totalize Status 1 bit 13 STOP EVENT instrument s first attempt at capture of a valid event datum UNUSED FIELD INT status bits only Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit STOP EVENT instrument s second attempt at capture of a valid event datum TIME time of occurrence for sample INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Totalize Status 1 bit 13 Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps Jj JL JeJo 98 eo JC Jen MCBDINOM Figure 14 C Format 14 Binary Output 3 124 Binary Output The binary data stream was derived from the signal shown in Figure 14 A To produce valid event stamps 1 Identify each datum which represents a valid event count e or 2 Correct the valid event count for counter rollovers To produce valid time stamps 1 Correct the binary time data for counter rollovers 2 Incorporate the interpolator data 3 Correct for diffe
74. GRAPhic subsystem queries of binary parameters are returned as 1 for values of ON and 0 for values of OFF the numeric representations are defined by IEEE standards as the shortforms for the alpha arguments ON and OFF The parameter field following a command can be alpha or numeric parameter field must be one of three types Numeric An integer floating point or exponential value When sending an exponent the characters E or e must be used to delimit the mantissa The syntax follows the integer NR1 decimal NR2 or exponential NR3 formats illustrated in Figure 4 3 Alpha ASCII strings that start with an alpha character and are followed by any Programming Rules and Guidance printable character except lt space gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt or lt _ gt An apostrophe lt gt is allowed Examples of alpha arguments are OFF and ON ASCII String Any collection of ASCII characters delimited by quotation marks lt gt except that embedded quotation marks are not allowed Block A block of binary data defined as lt gt lt length gt lt length bytes gt lt DAB gt lt DAB gt where lt length gt is a single byte that contains the number of lt length bytes gt The number specified by lt length bytes gt represents the number of data bytes DAB that follow In the following example the number 6 means that 6 bytes are used to iden
75. HOLDOFF OPTIONS Auto Sampling EDge Holdoff Time HOLdoff EVent Holdoff SAMPLING OPTIONS No Holdoff HOLDOFF SAMPLING Interval SAMpling Time SAMpling Cycle SAMpling Edge SAMpling Parity SAMpling Random SAMpling Repetitive EDGe Repetitive PARity EDge INterval EDge Time EDge EDge EDge EDge EVent OPTIONS EDge Parity EDge Random Time INTerval Time TIMe EVent INterval EVent EVent Externally GATed MANual Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS ARM AUT Sets the HP 5373A to use Automatic arming start the measurement on the next trigger edge and repetitively sample on each trigger edge OUTPUT 703 MEAS ARM Queries for the currently selected Arming mode 5 79 HP 5373A Programming Manual BLOC Block Size command query DET Time Interval Detect 5 80 command query Shortform BLOC size Longform BLOCK The BLOCk command sets the number of blocks of measurements taken the block size The BLOCK query returns the current block size number of blocks Range 1 to 99 999 999 Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS BLOC 10 Sets the HP 5373A to take 10 blocks of measurements each block consisting of the number of measurements set by the MSIZe command OUTPUT 703 MEAS BLOC Queries for the number of blocks Shortform DET time interval DETect Longform DETECT The DETect command determines the setting of the Tim
76. HP 5373A switches from Remote to Local mode if one of the following conditions occurs m The Go To Local interface command is received m The REN Remote Enable line goes false in other words the LCLL meta message is received The LOCAL programming command is received Use this command when the REMOTE command is used to go to Remote m Aninternal return to local message goes active generated by the front panel LOCAL key but only if Local Lockout is inactive The HP 5373A settings remain unchanged during remote to local transitions The front panel RMT LED is unlighted while the HP 5373A is in the Local mode When the TALK LISTEN HP IB mode is selected from the front panel the instrument may be addressed to talk or listen using the bus commands When so addressed the instrument remains configured until you send an abort message IFC send a listen address matching the listen address of the instrument or send a universal untalk command UNT The instrument is shipped from the factory in the addressable mode with the talk and listen adresses set to 3 You can set the HP 5373A to Talk Only Talk Only mode enables limited bus operation without an HP IB controller connected You can display or change the addresses from the front panel When set to talk only mode the instrument does not respond to any bus message Select this mode if you want to directly output data to a plotter or printer without using a c
77. LEVel command sets the trigger level for the currently selected input channel when the HP 53734 is in the Manual trigger mode refer to the TRIGger command description The desired trigger level in volts is sent with the command If the HP 5373A is in Repetitive Auto or Single Auto mode this command is ignored if a normally correct trigger level value is sent If an incorrect value is sent an error message is displayed The LEVel query returns the value of the current trigger level for the selected 53702A Range 54002A Range 54002A Range 54001A Range input channel X1 attenuation 0 Vdc to 2 0 Vdc in 2 mV steps nominal X1 attenuation 2 0 Vdc to 2 0 Vdc in 2 mV steps nominal X2 5 attenuation 5 0 Vdc to 5 0 Vdc in 5 mV steps nominal 20 0 to 20 0 Vdc in 20 mV steps nominal External Arm Range 5 0 Vdc to 5 0 Vdc in Examples 20 mV steps nominal OUTPUT 703 INP SOUR A LEV 1 Sets the Channel A trigger level to 1 V OUTPUT 703 INP SOUR B LEV Queries for the current Channel B trigger level RLEV Relative Trigger Level command query Command Reference Shortform RLEV Relative trigger LEVel Longform RLEVEL The RLEVel command sets the relative trigger level in either Repetitive Auto or Single Auto mode for the selected input channel The desired relative trigger level in percentage is sent with the command If the HP 5373A is in manual trigger mode thi
78. MATH ON or OFF Offset OFFSet number Normalize NORMalize number Scale SCALe number Limits UMit ON or OFF High HLIMit number Low LLIMit number TEST DIAGnostic DIAG Pun TEST lt number gt Pause PAUSe Continue CONTinue INSTR STATE Continues execution of instrument STate IST atest suspended by the PAUSe command Write Protect REGister lt number gt PROTect lt ON or gt Until Fail UFAil ON or OFF Erase Register Data ERASe number STOP Figure 4 2 Relationship of Command Structure to Front Panel Controls 1 of 3 GRAPHIC GRAPhic GRAP To select particular G DiSplay lt 5 graph for display TVARiation or gt Show Graph SGRaph MAIN or MEMory or BOTH Copy Main graph to COPY Memory Select active marker SMARker lt BLACk or color WHITe gt MORient VERTical or Active marker HORizontal gt orientation To move active vertical MLEFt lt number gt marker left To move active vertical MRIGht number marker right To move active MUP number horizontal marker up To move active horizontal marker down Marker Max Marker Min Move inactive marker to position of active marker Marker Display Mode Marker Next Mode Screen scroll graph scroll using arrow keys Zoom in out or return to full scale Outline status Grid status Y axis scaling mode Update mode sele
79. ON Edge Event BoA NOTE In the first of the three measurement modes listed above Expanded Data OFF gives this format 4B Event data is not available with Expanded Data OFF In the second and third measurement modes event data is unavailable regardless of whether Expanded Data is ON or OFF Thus in all three measurement modes listed above event data is not available in this format Time Interval 3 61 D 5373A Programming Manual How Signals are Converted to Binary Data Example Time Interval gt A Automatic es Start Start E Stop Stop BINARY DATA WERE JOM Figure 4 Time Interval Measurement on Channel A gt B with Automatic Arming Mode Showing Corresponding Binary Data Output Producing Results Time Interval results are generated by calculating the elapsed time between start and stop events Characteristic of Time Interval measurements start may follow stop as shown above In these cases the measurement result is negative Binary Data Output START START STOP STOP Je Je Normal Mode Bits 32 16 32 16 Fast Mode Bits 16 16 16 16 MEO Figure 4 Format 4B Binary Output Format 4B binary output is shown in Figure 4B B above Each measurement consists of two samples start and stop Input channels associated with start and stop data must be identified See Technical Note 4 for information on how
80. OUTPUT 703 INP SOUR A TRIG Queries for the current Channel A input trigger mode 5 113 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 114 Process Math PROCESS MATH SUBSYSTEM COMMANDS Cres CARRier separator ee ee ee separator number_arg I RRPROCKS Figure 5 13 PROCess MATH Subsystem Syntax Diagram Command Reference The PROCess MATH subsystem controls math functions Statistical functions and test limit value setup The functions in this subsystem are equivalent to those available via the MATH menu screen The top level syntax diagram for the PROCess MATH subsystem commands is Figure 5 13 The SOURce sublevel command syntax is illustrated in Figure 5 14 5 115 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 116 separator CREFerence HLIMit separator high limit value org LIMit separator Limit LLIMit TET separator low limit value arg LLIMit MATH MATH NORMalize NORMalize separator separator H normal arg gt gt OFFSet seporator t offset arg OFFSet SCALe separator gt f scale arg SCALe SREFerence SREFerence gt J eddo
81. PRI and Period function selection commands may be used interchangeably The HP 5373A will make the final choice of PRF Frequency PRI or Period as its function depending on the combination of function command given and the input pod detected for the specified channel If the HP 5373A detects HP 53702 at the input for the specified channel PRF or PRI will be the selected function respectively Otherwise the function selected will be Frequency or Period respectively The FUNC query will return the selected function which may not necessarily be the same as the one you specified as described above in this note 5 83 HP 5373A Programming Manual HBIN Histogram Bin Width command query Shortform HBIN Histogram BIN width Longform HBINWIDTH The HBINwidth command sets the bin width for any of the histogram functions HCTinterval HPMTime HTIMe Setting HBINwid can result in a change of the values associated with the HCENter HSPan and HSTart commands refer to operating manual for more information The HBINwidth query returns the currently set value Allowable bin width choices can be computed from the expressions 200 pS 2N where N 0 1 2 and 2 nS 2M where M 0 1 2 3 The merging of these expressions produces the list of allowed bin widths which begins with the sequence FROM SECOND EXPRESSION 200 pS 400 pS 800 pS 1 6 nS 2 nS 32 nS 4 nS FROM FIRST EXPRESSION If you program t
82. SAMP CHAN A Selects Channel A to be the sampling or stop arming signal source OUTPUT 703 MEASSAMP CHAN Queries for the sample arming or stop arming source DCH Delay CHannel DCHANNEL The DCHannel command for the sample arm sublevel selects the input channel to be the source of a delayed arming signal for sampling arming or stop arming The DCHannel query returns the currently selected source for the delay arming signal NOTE The oscillator parameter O or OSC for the sample arm DCHannel command can only be selected for cycle sampling CSAMpling arming For all other types of arming only A or B parameters can be selected Parameters Examples A OSCillator OUTPUT 703 MEAS SAMP DCH OSC Selects the HP 5373A timebase oscillator as the source of a delayed sample arming or stop arming signal OUTPUT 703 MEAS SAMP DCH Queries for the input channel source of the delay arming signal DEL Delay Value command query SLOP Slope command query Command Reference Shortform DEL DELay value Longform DELAY DELay command for the SAMPle arm sublevel selects the number of occurrences required to satisfy the selected sample arm or stop arm conditions time events interval or cycles Refer to Appendix D for information about allowable arming modes The DELay query returns the currently selected delay value Parameters The ranges for each type of sample
83. SUMMARY MESSAGE As shown in Table 2 6 four bits in the Status Byte Register contain summary messages reflecting instrument status The summary messages are defined below When high the MSS summary message indicates that the HP 5373A has a reason for requesting service The MSS message appears in bit 6 of the Status Byte Register The other 7 bits of the Status Byte Register are ANDed with the corresponding bits in the Service Request Enable Register and the resulting values are ORed to determine the MSS summary message Although the MSS message is sent as bit 6 of the response to the STB query it is not sent in response to a serial poll Instead the RQS Request For Service message is returned when the HP 53734 is serial polled When high the ESB summary message indicates that one or more enabled events in the Event Status Register occurred since this register was last read or cleared The ESB message appears in bit 5 of the Status Byte Register The bits of the Event Status Register are ANDed with the corresponding bits of the Event Status Enable Register and the resulting values are ORed to determine the ESB message 2 25 HP 5373A Programming Manual MESSAGE AVAILABLE MESSAGE MEASUREMENT COMPLETE MCB HARDWARE STATUS BIT HSB SUMMARY MESSAGE 2 26 Reading the Status Byte Register When high the MAV summary message indicates that the 5373A is ready to accept a request by the controll
84. Sample Arm is User defined Non Continuous Arming Modes Holdoff Modes Sampling Modes Start Arm is Automatic Stop Arm is User defined Start Arm is User defined Stop Arm is User defined Holdoff Sampling Modes ARMING MODE PROGRAMMING COMMANDS Programming the Arming Modes Table D 2 summarizes the programming commands for the default settings of each arming mode The arming modes are in the left most column of the table and the programming commands are listed across the top Here is an example of how to use Table D 2 to program an arming mode 1 Specify the measurement and source channel A frequency measurement on Channel B is used here OUTPUT 703 MEAS FUNC FREQ SOUR B 2 Finda supported arming mode for frequency from Table D 1 Event Event is used here 3 Specify the arming mode from Table D 2 OUTPUT 703 ARM EVEV 4 Specify the start arm sublevel commands by adding to the previous program line OUTPUT 703 ARM EVEV STAR SLOP POS CHAN A DEL 5 DCH B This program line now sets the measurement to begin after a positive edge on Channel A followed by 5 events on Channel B 5 Specify the stop arm sublevel commands OUTPUT 703 SAMP DEL 15 DCH This program line sets the measurement to end after 15 events on Channel B Note that the start and stop delay events are both referenced to the positive edge on Chann
85. Service Request SRQ is generated on the interface when an enabled status bit is set The HP 5373A can asynchronously request service from the controller that is in charge of the bus 2 5 HP 5373A Programming Manual REMOTE LOCAL PARALLEL POLL DEVICE CLEAR DEVICE TRIGGER CONTROLLER Front Panel Interface Status LEDs At power up the instrument is under front panel local control When the HP 5373A receives a programming command it switches to Remote Once in Remote programmable functions cannot be affected by the front panel controls The LOCAL key may be used to manually return to local control only if the Local Lockout LLO is off If Lockout is on the LOCAL key is ignored and the bus command LOCAL must be sent to disable LLO and return to local control The HP 5373A does not respond to parallel poll When a universal or selected Device Clear is received the HP 5373A clears any errors present clears all input and output buffers and resets the hardware for a new measurement When a Device Trigger is received the instrument will start a new measurement if the sample rate is set to SINGLE If the sample rate is set to REPETITIVE the Device Trigger command will start a new measurement The HP 5373A cannot be used as a controller The remote status of the HP 5373 is indicated by four Interface Status LED annunciators RMT LSN TLK SRQ in the upper right corner of the front panel
86. Start Bit 6 Totalize Status 1 151 and Totalize Status 2 TS2 How to Process Binary Data Correct For Counter Rollover Process Interpolator Data Determine Offset Compute Time Stamps Compute Event Stamps Compute Measurement Results Special Topics Introduction Arming 5373A Programming Manual Chapter 3 Measurements Requiring More Than One Sample 3 15 BINARY OUTPUT Inhibit Status 3 16 Continued Measurement Results 3 16 Time Stamps Associated With Block Arming Edge 3 16 Interpolator Status Field 3 17 InterpolatorData 3 17 Statis Bits ci vob ais EI MERCEDE Pl rr reete 3 17 Inhibit 3 17 Block Start 3 18 Totalize Status 1 Totalize Status2 3 18 Fast sigs a Mc Faces iate 3 18 Pre trigger 3 19 Single Block Pre triggered Acquisition 3 20 Multiple Block Pre triggered Acquisitions 3 20 Processing Pre trigger Binary Output 3 21 EX persia M ne 3 21 Glossary 2 is sve in Eo FUE PX AO NS VER TR SS TONITE EE RE Oe Gd 3 23 How to Use Table 3 1 Format Guide
87. Time is given below In Figure 10B E t and refer to time stamps and event stamps respectively Time and event stamps must have been corrected for offset and counter rollover as discussed above before performing calculations Rise Time 6 t9 1 FALL TIME Figure 10B F Fall Time Example Signal Showing Time and Event Stamp Measurement Points The formula for calculating Fall Time is given below In Figure 10B F t and e refer to time stamps and event stamps respectively Time and event stamps must have been corrected for offset and counter rollover as discussed above before performing calculations Fall Time toi toj 1 3 95 HP 5373A Programming Manual PULSE WIDTH F e R M A VT p 1 e on 10B Figure 10B G Positive Pulse Width Example Signal Showing Time and Event Stamp Measurement Points The formula for calculating Pulse Width is given below In Figure 10B G t and e refer to time stamps and event stamps respectively Time and event stamps must have been corrected for offset and counter rollover as discussed above before performing calculations Pulse Width t toi 1 PULSE OFFTIME Figure 10B H Negative Pulse Width Example Signal Showing Time and Event Stamp Measurement Points The formula for calculating Pulse Offtime is given below In Figure 10B H t and e refer to time stamps and event stamps respectively
88. Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit EVENT instrument s second attempt at capture of a valid event datum TIME time of occurrence for sample INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Totalize Status 1 bit 13 Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps Jb Jo Dv EJ 2 4 gt ei u ez gt e t2 gt MCBOTONGM Figure 11 C Format 11 Binary Output SS The binary data stream was derived from the signal shown in Figure 11 A To produce valid event stamps 1 Identify each datum which represents a valid event count e or e 2 Correct the valid event counts for counter rollovers To produce valid time stamps 1 Correct the binary time data for counter rollovers 2 Incorporate the interpolator data 3 112 Binary Output PRODUCING VALID EVENT STAMPS Identifying the Datum Which Represents the Valid Event Count The Totalize Status 1 Bit TS1 is bit 13 of the Interpolator Status Field see Interpolator Status Field under Special Topics at the front of this chapter TS1 identifies the datum which represents the valid event count If TS1 0 use e the instrument s first attempt at valid event data capture This is the valid binary event count If TS1 1 use e the instrument s second attempt at valid event data capture Subtract 1 from the integer represented by e The subtraction results in a valid binary ev
89. and describes HP 5373A commands The reference is prefaced by introductory material that defines the audience and explains how the section is organized The listing scheme is explained Finally the introduction to the section concludes with a master list of commands organized able information Use this master list to find a command alphabetically without regard for subsystem or sublevel The presentation of material here assumes a given level of expertise and knowledge To fully benefit from the information in the command listings you should first read and understand the foregoing sections on HP IB commands and programming rules and guidance Within this section tabbed divisions correspond to subsystem levels System commands come first they are all general purpose commands Then the ordering is by corresponding front panel function layout from top to bottom right to left starting with the NUMeric subsystem commands Here is the scheme System NUMeric GRAPhic MEASurement FUNCTION PRE TRIGGER INPut PROCess MATH ISTate INTerface SYSTEM DIAGnostic TEST HP 5373A Programming Manual WHAT EACH LISTING INCLUDES Pre trigger commands are alphabetically integrated with MEASurement subsystem commands even though there is a separate front panel pushbutton dedicated to pre trigger functions In the HP IB scheme pre trigger commands are viewed as an extension of the MEASurement subsystem Commands within a
90. and the parameter sent with MRIG is ignored Shortform MUP move Marker UP Longform MUP Use MUP to move the graphics display marker up This simulates using the front panel knob The complementary command is MDOWn Range 1 to 90 Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP MUP 40 Moves marker up 40 pixels Shortform OUTL OUTLine mode Longform OUTLINE This command applies to Histograms It turns outline mode on or off When OUTLine is on the instrument displays only the silhouette of a Histogram Meaning only the tops of the Histogram bins are drawn connected vertically as required Conversely setting OUTLine off draws lines from the top of each respective bin to the Histogram base stated another way the right and left sides of the bin extend from top to bottom The query form asks for the current setting The panorama graph is always drawn in OUTLine on mode The OUTLine query returns the Outline Mode status Parameters ON OFF PDEV Peak Deviation query only SEL Select Graph Menu Level command query Command Reference Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP OUTL ON Turns Outline Mode on OUTPUT 703 GRAP OUTL Queries for current Outline Mode Shortform PDEV Peak DEViation Longform PDEViation Use the PDEViation query to obtain the peak deviation value This result is obtained by analyzing the data between the vertical display markers to arrive at an estimate of the maximum Y axis peaks
91. arming and stop arming condition are listed below If the Measurement Mode is NORMal TIME 2 nanoseconds to 8 seconds in 2 ns steps EVENTS 1 to 4E 9 events in 1 event steps If the Measurement Mode is FAST TIME 2 nanoseconds to 131 2 nS steps EVENTS 1 to 65 000 events in 1 event steps INTERVAL 100 ns to 131 us in 100 ns steps CYCLES 2528 26 Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS SAMP DEL 10 If Event sample arming is currently selected this example tells the HP 5373A to sample arm for 10 events If Time sample arming is currently selected the time value of 10 would default to the Time range upper limit of 8 seconds OUTPUT 703 MEAS SAMP DEL Queries for the current delay value Shortform SLOP SLOPe Longform SLOPE The SLOPe command for the sample arm sublevel selects the slope of the sample arming or stop arming signal The SLOPe query returns the currently selected arming channel slope 5 97 5373A Programming Manual SOUR Measurement Source 5 98 command query Parameters POSitive NEGative Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS SAMP CHAN A SLOP POS Selects positive edge of Channel A signal for sample arming or stop arming OUTPUT 703 MEAS SAMP CHAN A SLOP Queries for the Channel A arming slope for sample or stop arming Shortform SOUR measurement SOURce Longform SOURCE The SOURce command for the Measurement subsystem selects the desired input channel
92. as a guide to devising your own rollover processing routines to process rollovers in both event and time data A counter rollover occurs when the 32 bit time or event counter reaches its maximum count 232 1 and is incremented by one At that point the counter returns to zero and begins counting until it again reaches 232 1 Because the counters the 5373A freerunning this can happen at any time in the measurement process To convert time and event data into valid time stamps and event stamps your program must detect and compensate for counter rollovers Time and event data should always increase If a specific time or event datum is smaller than the preceding time or event datum a counter rollover must have occurred Counter rollover processing consists of finding each time or event datum that is less than its immediately preceding time or event datum then adding 232 to all following time or event data NOTE For measurements the above explanation does not apply For information on how to process counter rollovers for Time Interval measurements see the examples for Format 4A processing NOTE The following examples are designed to show the general program flow for processing counter rollovers The code is not intended for direct use In all examples the binary data has been converted to decimal data Counter Rollover Processing FORMATS 1A 2A The rollover processing routine for time Data is N the nu
93. be the integer representation of the sum of the binary weighted values of the enabled bits Using the example of the previous paragraph an integer value of 36 would be written to the register to set bit 5 and bit 2 to 1 The Event Status Enable Register is cleared by Sending the ESE command with a numeric data value of zero power on transition if PSC is true The Status Byte Register Table 2 6 is an 8 bit register containing the summary messages generated by the Hardware Status Register the Event Status Register Output Buffer and other instrument conditions It also contains the Request Service RQS Master Status Summary message in bit 6 HP IB General Information Table 2 6 5373A Status Byte Register Binary Bit Weight Status Bit Condition 7 128 Not used 6 64 RQS MSS Request Service Master Status Summary High indicates that the 5373A has a reason for requesting service 5 32 Event Status Summary ESB High indicates that an event in the Event Status Register ESR has occurred 4 16 Message Available MAV High indicates that the 5373A is ready to output data 3 8 Not used 2 4 Not used 1 2 Measurement complete MCB c 0 1 Hardware Status Summary HSB High indicates that an event in the Hardware Status Register HSR has occurred Summary Messages MASTER STATUS SUMMARY MSS MESSAGE EVENT STATUS BIT ESB
94. channel 2 results Frequency and Period options are A amp B A amp C B amp C Totalize option is A amp B 2 RATIO Frequency and Period ratio options are A B A C B A B C C A C B Totalize ratio options are A B B A 3 SUM Frequency and Period sum options are A B A C B C Totalize sum option is A B 4 DIFFERENCE Frequency and Period difference options B C Totalize difference options are A B B A ARMING CATEGORIES Category Continuous Arming Modes Non Continuous Arming Modes Automatic Block Hoidoff is Automatic none Sample Arm is Automatic Holdoff Modes Block Holdoff is User defined none Sample Am is Automatic Sampling Modes Block Holdoff is Automatic Sample Arm is User defined Start Arm is Automatic Stop Arm is User defined Holdoff Sampling Modes Block Holdoff is User defined Sample Arm is User defined Start Arm is User defined Stop Arm is User defined 3 29 HP 5373A Programming Manual 3 30 Binary Output FORMAT 1A EXPANDED MEASUREMENT CHANNEL S DATA ARMING MODES Continuous Time Interval OFF Automatic Interval Sampling Repetitive Edge Sampling How Signals Are Converted to Binary Data Example Continuous Time Interval Automatic BLOCK MEASUREMENTS ARMED ES Chan A a es gt BINARY DATA WEIN NOM Figure 1A A Continuous Time Inte
95. command BWID Set Bin Width command query XARH X axis Auto Range Hold command Command Reference Shortform HCON HCONtinue a paused display Longform HCONTINUE This command is one part of a pair of commands that control the Pause Continue Hardware Histogram feature After sending a PAUSe command issue an HCONtinue command to continue the acquisition Refer to HPAuse command Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP HCON Restart paused Hardware Histogram acquisition Shortform HIST HISTogram Longform HISTOGRAM The HISTogram command selects the Histogram sublevel Additional sublevel commands control Histogram graph features Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP HIST YMSC ON Turns Y axis Manual Scaling on Shortform BWID set Bin WIDth Longform BWIDTH Use the BWIDth command to set the desired Bin Width for Histogram graphs Range 2E 10 to 1E 24 Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP HIST BWIDJ2E 10 Sets Bin Width to 200 pS OUTPUT 703 GRAP HIST BWID Queries for the current Bin Width value Shortform XARH X axis Auto Range Hold Longform XARHOLD Use XARHold to copy the current X axis values to manual scaling parameters This copies the X axis minimum and maximum values and uses them to set up XMINimum and BWIDth parameters 5 51 5373A Programming Manual 5 52 XMIN Set X Axis Minimum command query XMRH X axis Marker Range Hold command XMSC X axis Manual Scale
96. correct value of offset for your application For the stop channel time stamp corrected stop time stamp stop time stamp offset 3 64 Binary Output Generating Final Function Results From Time Stamps Time Interval results are generated by calculating elapsed time between start time stamp and stop time stamp Characteristic of Time Interval measurements start may follow stop as shown in Figure 4B A In such a case the resulting measurement is negative Time Interval corrected stop time stamp start time stamp 3 65 a zoO0om D ue HP 5373A Programming Manual 3 66 Binary Output Format 5A EXPANDED MEASUREMENT CHANNEL S DATA ARMING MODES Automatic Edge Holdoff Interval Sampling Repetitive Edge Sampling Random Sampling Edge Interval Edge Random ON OFF Time Sampling Edge Time Edge Event Externally Gated Time Interval PRF Frequency PRI Period How Signals are Converted to Binary Data Example Frequency A Externally Gated MEASUREMENT EX GI L BINARY DATA MENO HOM Figure 5A A Frequency Measurement on Channel A with Externally Gated Arming Mode Showing Corresponding Binary Data Output Producing Results Time Interval results are generated by calculating the elapsed time between start and stop samples PRF Frequency PRI and Period results are generated by calculating both the elap
97. data in each block CLIS outputs length information followed by the carrier value for each consecutive block For ASCII the length information is the number of values that follow For floating point the length information is the number of bytes that follow 8 times the number of values As an example consider a phase deviation measurement using 2 blocks of 100 measurements non averaged CLIS would return 2 indicating 2 values follow carrier for block 1 carrier for block 2 gt DAT System Clock Date command query DLEN Data Length query only Command Reference Shortform DAT system clock DATe Longform DATE The DATe command sets the system clock date The format for setting the date is DAT yyyy mm dd where yyyy is the year number 19yy mm is the month number 1 through 12 and dd is the day number 1 through 31 The DATe query returns a string in the format dd mmm yyyy where mmm is the three letter month abbreviation rather than a number Example OUTPUT 703 DAT 1989 8 19 Sets the system clock date to August 19 1989 Example OUTPUT 703 DAT Queries for the current system clock date Shortform DLEN Data LENgth Longform DLENGTH Use the DLENgth query to identify the number of measurement results that are provided when an ODATa query is used or just an enter or transfer follows measurement completion This query is especially useful prior to ASCII data readout
98. datum in each block When this occurs there will be no corresponding event datum Measurements which produce this type of data are single channel PRF Frequency PRI Period Continuous Time Interval Phase Deviation Frequency Deviation or Time Deviation measurements armed in the following manner m Edge Holdoff Event Holdoff Time Holdoff Edge Cycle Edge Edge Edge Interval Event Interval m Time Interval Your data reduction program must identify the block arming sample and process it as an exception To identify an arming sample examine bit 6 in the Interpolator Status field Bit 6 is always 1 in the first sample of each block For the single channel measurements and the arming modes given above the first sample in the block will be the block arming sample In all subsequent samples bit 6 will be 0 Binary Output When your program encounters arming data it should consider the special characteristics of arming sample data The measurement sample will include an UNUSED event data field if your binary output is Format 2B or Format 3 The block arming signal uses a different electrical path than the other signals Thus an offset correction is required to compensate for the differential path length See Technical Note 4 at the end of the format section for offset corrections 5 4 3 2 1 0 INTERPOLATOR DATA TOTALIZE STATUS 1 TOTALIZE STATUS 2 BLOCK START INHIBIT Figure 3 6 16 bit Interpolato
99. depends on the selection of several parameters including Common Input Mode and Attenuation To adjust for this variation add a correction value called an offset to each stop channel time stamp Start channel time stamps require no correction Use Technical Note 4 to determine the correct value of offset for your application For the stop channel time stamp corrected stop time stamp stop time stamp offset Generating Final Function Results From Event and Time Stamps TIME INTERVAL RESULTS Time Interval results are generated by calculating the elapsed time between the start time stamp and the stop time stamp Time Interval corrected stop time stamp start time stamp Expanded Data for Time Interval measurements is Missed Events Missed Events are events which are counted between measurements but are not time stamped they are events missed between current stop and next start The formula is Missed Events start event stamp 1 stop event stamp 1 PRF FREQUENCY PRI AND PERIOD RESULTS PRF Frequency PRI and Period results are generated by calculating both elapsed time and elapsed events then taking the appropriate quotient to produce the final result 3 70 Binary Output PRE Grr stop event stamp start event stamp i OF frequency 7 corrected stop time stamp start time stamp corrected stop time stamp start time stamp or Period stop event stamp start event stamp
100. diagrammed above the instrument makes two attempts to capture valid data for each sample Your program must use the status bits provided to merge the data from each pair of attempts into a single valid sample then process the set of valid samples 3 119 HP 5373A Programming Manual EXPANDED DATA Expanded Data for Totalize measurements is Measurement Gate Time Gate Time is generated 9 by calculating elapsed time between samples M Binary Data Output T 13 ED B A B A Normal Mode Bits 32 16 Fast Mode Bits i6 16 Figure 13 Format 13 Binary Output Format 13 binary output is shown in Figure 13 B above Each sample generates the binary data described below EVENT instrument s first attempt at capture of a valid Channel event datum EVENT instrument s first attempt at capture of a valid Channel A event datum UNUSED FIELD INT status data only Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit EVENT instrument s second attempt at capture of a valid Channel B event datum EVENT instrument s second attempt at capture of a valid Channel A event datum TIME time of occurrence for sample INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Totalize Status 1 bit 13 Totalize Status 2 bit 14 Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps 6 6 9Q98 O00S8 8SI8 8H08 Figure 13 Format 13 Binary Output The binary data s
101. false If the ATN control line is true the bus is in the command mode STATUS REPORTING AND SERVICE REQUEST HP IB General Information In the data mode the HP 5373A can receive and send data messages Input data messages include the program front panel functions and remote functions Output data messages include instrument status information the setting of specific functions measurement results and the learn string The learn string is a binary data string that contains a condensed coding of the entire instrument state Refer to SETup SETup and CALibrate in Chapter 5 Command Reference The HP 5373A can send a Service Request SRQ to the controller to indicate the need for attention and can interrupt the current sequence of events Typically the status reporting structure of the HP 5373A sends an SRQ to indicate that data is ready for transmission or that an abnormal condition exists See Figure 2 2 for information on the HP 5373A Status Reporting Structure 2 17 HP 5373A Programming Manual ta 115 tee 0 HARDWARE STATUS REGISTER AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND AND RENAL IAN qup ME EE HARDWARE STATUS ENABLE REGISTER Kr ode OUTPUT BUFFER NOT EMPTY bit 7 bit 0 SERIAL POLL STB QUERY AN
102. first sample in each block The formula for Missed Events is Missed Events elapsed events between samples 1 Binary Data Output wep UNUSED 2 32 16 Normal Mode Bits 3 Fast Mode Bits 16 16 16 Figure 2B B Format 2B First Sample in Each Block 3 46 Binary Output gt EVENTS 32 32 16 Normal Mode Bits Fast Mode Bits 16 16 16 Figure 2B C Format 2B Subsequent Samples Format 2B binary output is shown in Figures 2B B and 2B C The first sample in each block contains an unused data field as shown The first sample and subsequent samples generate the binary data defined below First sample UNUSED FIELD TIME time of occurrence for each sample INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit Subsequent samples EVENT binary event count TIME time of occurrence for each sample INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit Converting Binary Data To Event Stamps and Time Stamps OCJEJ JC Figure 2B D Format 2B Binary Output The binary data stream shown above was derived from the signal in Figure 2B A To produce valid event stamps your program must 1 Correct the binary event data for counter rollovers 2 If measurement was made on Channel C multiply the event stamp data by four 3 47 mh len N HP 5373A Program
103. for any start event datum smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such an event datum the routine must add the appropriate Event Overflow Correction value to that start datum and to all subsequent start data then continue with the scan Event Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Correcting Stop Channel Data for Counter Rollovers This correction process parallels that performed for start channel data Stop channel binary event counts increase monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred Note that stop channel event counts are provided with every other sample Monotonic increase should be expected for e2 e4 e6 etc See Figure 10B A The start data overflow processing routine may be used here by providing it with stop data The routine should then find the rollover points and add the overflow correction value to all subsequent data 3 92 Binary Output PRODUCING VALID TIME STAMPS Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers Since the Time Interval function will allow the stop sample to be collected before the start sample time data does not always increase monotonically When start and stop are reversed stop before start the stop time count is correctly smaller than the start time count Overflow processing routines must distinguish between start stop reversals and counter rollovers Overflow processing routines correct the data only when a counter rollover is detected Correction for co
104. for the data length Shortform DMS Default Measurement Setup Longform DMSETUP The DMSetup command sets various setup values to default conditions and is equivalent to consecutively pressing the front panel SHIFT and PRESET keys The default values set by the DMSetup command set a configuration for the current Measurement function that is appropriate for that function That is defaults are set for such values as Source channel Sample Size Arming plus associated Arming parameters as well as Input channel specifications Trigger Modes or Levels The DMSetup approach to setup is less powerful that PRESET Accordingly you may find using DMSetup more useful When using DMSetup general conditions applying to all measurement types and specific conditions applying only to certain measurement types are set Appendix B in this manual lists default measurement setups Example OUTPUT 703 DMS Sets default conditions for current measurement function Shortform DiSPlay Longform DSP The DSP command writes a quoted string not including quotes to the status line at the top of each menu screen The DSP query returns the string last written to the status line The returned string may be one that was written with the DSP command or an internally generated advisory message ERR Error query only HOV Histogram Measurements Over Limit query only HUND Histogram Measurements Under Limit query o
105. holdoff or start arming Parameters EXTernal X Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS STAR CHAN A Selects Channel A to be the block holdoff or start arming signal OUTPUT 703 MEAS STAR CHAN Queries for the block holdoff or start arming source Shortform Delay CHannel Longform DCHANNEL The DCHannel command for the start arm sublevel selects the input channel to be the source of a delayed arming signal for block holdoff or start arming The DCHannel query returns the currently selected source for the delay arming signal Parameters A B Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS STAR DCH B Selects Channel B as the source of a delayed block holdoff or start arming signal OUTPUT 703 MEAS STAR DCH Queries for the input channel source of the delay arming signal DEL Delay command query Command Reference Shortform DEL DELay Longform DELAY The DELay command for the start arm sublevel selects the number of occurrences required to satisfy the selected block holdoff or start arm conditions time or events Refer to appendices for arming mode information The DELay query returns the currently selected delay value Parameters The ranges for each type of block holdoff and start arming condition are If the Measurement Mode is NORMal TIME 2 nanoseconds to 8 seconds resolution 2 ns EVENTS 1 to 4E 9 events If the Measurement Mode is FAST TIME 2 nanoseconds to 131 us
106. i check next pair for smaller sample is stop less than start IF time 2 i 2 lt time 2 i 1 THEN use time 2 i 2 compare smallest sample of second pair with greatest of first second pair stop with first pair stop IF time 2 i 2 lt time 2 i THEN 114 less than add overflow value FOR j 2 i 1 TO 2 N Ito all following samples time j time j 2732 NEXT j ENDIF ELSE istop gt to start use time 2 i 1 compare smallest sample of second pair with greatest of first second pair stop with first pair stop IF time 2 it tl lt time 2 i THEN if less than add overflow to all following samples FOR j 2 1 1 TO 2 N time j time j 2 32 1 add overflow value NEXT j ENDIF ENDIF ENDIF NEXT i For Format 4B there is no event data FORMAT 5A See Format 2A FORMAT 5B See Format 4B FORMAT 6 The rollover processing routine for the time data is N the number of measurements There are 2N samples for this format 3 143 HP 5373A Programming Manual Data Structure Notes 1 One dimensional array 2 Odd indices reference Start Samples 3 Even indices reference Stop Samples FOR i 1 TO 2 N 1 IF time itl lt time i THEN lis next sample less than current sample FOR j 1 1 TO 2 N 1for all following samples time j time j 2 32 tadd overflow value NEXT j ENDIF NEXT i The rollover processing routine for the events data is N the number of measurements
107. in the register those not used are always set to zero The Event Status Register is read with the ESR query This query returns an integer value representing the sum of the binary weighted values of the register s bits For example a returned integer value of 36 3244 would indicate that bit 5 CME Command Error and bit 2 QYE Query Error of the Event Status Register were set to 1 When the Event Status Register is read all bits are cleared Clearing the Event HP IB General Information The Event Status Register is cleared by Status Register The CLS command power on transition The read operation initiated by the ESR query Table 2 5 5373A Event Status Register Binary Name and 5373A Bit Weight Defined Event Implementation 15 8 Reserved by TEEE Not used set to zero 7 128 Power On PON High indicates that the ac power same has been cycled 6 64 User Request URQ High indicates that Local LOCAL key pressed control has been activated 5 82 Command Error CME High indicates that a same syntax or semantic error has occurred 4 16 Execution Error EXE High indicates that invalid same range values or conflicting settings have been selected 3 8 Device Dependent Error DE Not defined Not used set to zero 2 4 Query Error QYE High indicates that no output same is present or pending 1 2 Request Control RQC High indicates that Not used set to zero Contr
108. limit 0 is returned if no Histogram data is available 5 13 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 14 HWIT Histogram Measurements Within Limit query only IDAT Inhibit Data query only Example OUTPUT 70 Queries for the number of measurements that were under the lower histogram limit Shortform HWIThin Histogram measurements WIThin the histogram limits Longform HWITHIN The HWIThin query returns the number of histogram measurements that were within the upper and lower histogram limits A 1 is returned if no Histogram data is available Example OUTPUT 703 HWIT Queries for the number of measurements that were within the upper and lower histogram limits Shortform IDAT Inhibit DATa Longform IDATa The IDATa query returns the inhibit data list so you can locate where inhibits occurred during a measurement You can read IDATa in ASCII or Floating Point output formats Formats follow the standard formats for these modes as described in Chapter 2 For more information about the Inhibit feature refer to the applicable section of the Operating Manual IDATa outputs length information followed by the measurement indices where inhibits occurred For ASCII the length information is the number of values that follow For floating point output format the length of information is the number of bytes that follow this will be 8 times the number of values As an example consider a
109. menu to any attached HP printer with graphics capability This command is available for all menu screens and is equivalent to pressing the front panel PRINT key The CANCel hardcopy command is available to abort the print output To use the PRINt command use the PSOurce Print SOurce command to select DISPlay for a copy of the screen menu or MEASurement for a copy of the measurement results REM Remote command REST Restart Measurement command Command Reference Example The following example shows a method for using the PRINt command 10 SEND 7 MTA LISTEN 3 DATA PRIN CHR 13 CHR 10 20 SEND 7 UNL 30 SEND 7 LISTEN 1 40 SEND 7 TALK 3 50 WRITEIO 7 23 11 60 END Shortform REM REMote Longform REMOTE The REMote command sets the HP 5373A to the Remote mode and sets the Local Lockout The REMote command performs an operation similar to the HP IB Remote message followed by the HP IB Local Lockout message This command is provided for use by controllers that have a limited HP IB capability If available the HP IB Remote and Local Lockout messages are the preferred method of switching the HP 5373A from Local to Remote and setting Local Lockout If the REN remote enable control line is true the HP 5373A REMote command will have no effect Example OUTPUT 703 REM Switches the HP 5373A from Local to Remote and sets Local Lockout NOTE This command should be used in conjunction with the LOCAL
110. nd sie ds ty eer Y TE RES 3 105 How Signals are Converted to Binary Data 3 105 Producing Results 3 106 Expanded Data 3 106 Binary Data 3 107 Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps 3 108 Producing Valid Time Stamps 3 108 Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers 3 108 Correcting for Rollovers Between Start and Stop 3 109 Correcting for Rollovers Between Measurements 3 109 Incorporating Interpolator Data 3 109 Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between the Start and Stop Channels Producing Valid Event Generating Final Function Results Expanded Data Format 11 How Signals Converted to Binary Data Producing Results Binary Data Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps 3 112 Producing Valid Event 3 113 Identifying the Datum Which Represents the Valid Event Count 3 113 Correcting Event Data for Counter Rollovers 3
111. new command If there is no equivalent command in the HP 5373A for example VAUTscale the HP 5373A status line will display HP5371A Graphics command no longer used Whenever this message is displayed an error number will be logged in the error queue so you may track occurrences of any non convertible commands We recommend however that you change HP 5371A commands to their HP 5373A equivalents so that your program may be more easily supported from this programming manual The HP 5373A feature set is similar to that of the HP 5372A Thus for the most part the HP 5372A HP IB command set is a subset of the HP 5373A HP IB commands Differences and similarities are discussed below m 5373A commands having the same names as HP 5372A commands are the same in both instruments Even though HP 5373A commands may have the same names as HP 5372A commands you may not find them grouped the same way in the HP 5373A displays as they were in the HP 5372A m The HP 5373A Preset measurement function is PRF or Frequency The HP 5372A Preset measurement is Time Interval Other HP 5373A Preset conditions also differ from those of the HP 5372A HP 5373A Programming Manual F 2 Some HP 5373A default measurement setup conditions differ from those of the HP 5372A Front panel hardkey identification for the HP 53734 is the same as for the HP 5372A The HP 5373A does not provide Window Margin Analysis the HP 5372A does HP 53
112. occurs across subsystems This means you must keep track of which subsystem is current to ensure the result you want The SUBSystem query can help in this regard The principle of selecting an active set of commands only applies to subsystem and sublevel commands system commands are a different case Your program can issue a system command at any time without regard to the active subsystem selection For example if your program selects the PROCess subsystem level and you then want to issue a PRINt command from the system command group you can do so without regard to the active subsystem The PROCess subsystem stays active and your program can continue to issue PROCess commands after the PRINt command executes In other words System commands have no effect on the active subsystem or sublevel DIFFERENCES BETWEEN HP IB AND FRONT PANEL CONTROL COMMAND MNEMONICS Choosing Either Shortform or Longform Programming Rules and Guidance There is not an exact one to one correspondence between HP IB commands and front panel controls For example there is no need to have a Key pushbutton on the front panel you merely push the desired key But a KEY command is required to simulate a key press using the HP IB control scheme Nevertheless mentally mapping the front panel control scheme to the HP IB command structure provides a useful way to remember which commands control which operating features In some cases differences ari
113. of 48 32416 indicates that bit 5 and bit 4 of the Service Request Enable Register are set to 1 thus enabling bit 5 ESB and bit 4 MAV of the Status Byte Register Note that the value of bit 6 will always be zero The Service Request Enable Register is written to by the SRE command The numeric argument of the SRE command must be the integer representation of the sum of the binary weighted values of the enabled bits Using the example of the previous paragraph an integer value of 48 would be written to the register to set bit 5 and bit 4 to 1 The Service Request Enable Register is cleared by Sending the SRE command with a data value of zero power on transition if PSC is true The ABORT message IFC control line true halts all bus activity When the instrument receives the abort message it becomes unaddressed and stops talking or listening The Request Service message RQS and the Status Byte are unaffected by the abort message 2 27 HP 5373A Programming Manual ASCII AND FLOATING POINT FORMATS Measurement Messages and Data Types Choosing an Appropriate Format 2 28 Measurement Output Rates You can get measurement results in either ASCII or Floating Point Format Appendix E lists annotated HP BASIC program examples that demonstrate programming techniques for ASCII Binary and Floating Point Measurement results are sent in measurement messages Measurement messages contain code
114. ra 5 25 RESTart command System 5 23 Gare elven IPC Root Allan Variance Root Mean Square 5 SAMPle arm MEASurement 5 95 SAMPle MEASurement Save recall registers Scaling factor Screens Selected Device Clear message 2 16 Sending data messages 2 16 Serial 2 3 Service request 2 5 2 19 Service Request Enable Register 2 27 Setreference c i lese dela elena eae annus 5 126 SETup command query System 5 24 Shortform 4 4 12 SINGle sample rate SMODe command Query 5 25 SIZe command query MEASurement 5 99 SMODe command query System 5 25 SOURce command query MEASurement 5 98 SOURce command query input 5 108 ATTenuation sublevel command 5 108 BIAS sublevel command 5 109 LEVel sublevel command 5 110 RLEVel sublevel command 5 111 SLOPe sublevel command 5 112 Subcommands 5 108 SOURce sublevel command query process AVARiance subcommand CREFerence subcommand LIMit subcommand LLIMit subcommand
115. resolution 2 ns EVENTS 1 to 65 000 events resolution 1 event NOTE An entered Time value greater than 8 seconds defaults to 8 seconds An entered event count greater than 4E49 defaults to 4 9 in NORMal Mode Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS STAR DEL 10 If Event sample arming is currently selected this example tells the HP 5373A to holdoff for 10 events If Time holdoff is currently selected the entered value of 10 would default to 8 seconds OUTPUT 703 MEAS STAR DEL Queries for the current delay value 5 101 HP 5373A Programming Manual SLOP Slope command query TVR Time Variation Result 5 102 command query Shortform SLOP SLOPe Longform SLOPE The SLOPe command for the start arm sublevel selects the slope of the block holdoff or start arming signal The SLOPe query returns the currently selected arming channel slope Parameters POSitive NEGative Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS STAR CHAN A SLOP POS Selects positive edge of Channel A signal for block holdoff or start arming OUTPUT 703 MEAS STAR CHAN A SLOP Queries for the Channel A arming slope for block holdoff or start arming Shortform TVR Time Variation Result Longform TVRESULT The TVResult command determines the setting of the Time Variation Result mode Use this command to specify the kind of Time Variation result you want computed when a multiple block measurement is made that can entirely fi
116. results of the process Example Program IThis program demonstrates the use of the Hardware Status Register IThe program is set up to cause the HP 5373A to enable SRQ when la measurement block contains a frequency out of the user defined ttest limits Techniques shown also apply to the Event Status Register 1 To run this demo the 10 MHz Timebase Output from the rear of the HP 5373A must be connected to the Channel A input via a BNC cable When the program is running the computer CRT will show the number of completed measurements To show how the Hardware Status Register be used to pull SRQ do the following RUN the program As measurements are made the computer measurement blocks completed After several measurement blocks are made do the following When the Gate LED is on disconnect and then quickly re connect the BNC at Channel A This will simulate a change in frequency that will be out of limits causing the HP 5373A to signal SRQ The computer CRT will then show the results from the SRQ CRT updates the number of CLEAR SCREEN Low limit 9 999E46 High limit 1 0001E47 ASSIGN Hp5373a TO 703 CLEAR 8Hp5373a OUTPUT 8Hp5373a PRES OUTPUT 8Hp5373a SMOD SING OUTPUT Hp5373a MEAS FUNC FREQ OUTPUT Hp5373a 512 250 OUTPUT 8Hp5373a SOUR A OUTPUT Hp5373a ARM ISAM OUTPUT Hp5373a SAMP DEL 004 OUTPUT Hp5373a PROC SOUR A LIM ON OUTPUT 8Hp5373a LLIM Low limit OUTPUT 8Hp5
117. rollover has occurred Similarly when the stop sample precedes the start sample the stop sample event count will be smaller than the start event count unless a counter rollover has occurred Note that the event counters are always reset between pairs so there will be no continuity in event counts between pairs The overflow detection routine should examine the last collected datum in each pair If the last collected datum is smaller than the first collected datum the routine must add the appropriate Event Overflow Correction value to the last collected datum Then the next pair is examined and the process repeats Event Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Generating Final Function Results Frequency PRI and Period results are generated by calculating both elapsed time and elapsed events between start and stop samples then taking the appropriate quotient The formula is PRE or lts stop event stamp start event stamp i OF Frequency resuttsi 7 corrected stop time stamp start time stamp corrected stop time stamp start time stamp PRI or Period result Stop event stamp start event stamp EXPANDED DATA Expanded Data for PRF Frequency PRI and Period measurements is Measurement Gate Time Measurement Gate Time is generated by calculating the absolute value of elapsed time between start and stop samples The formula is Gate Time ABS stop time stamp start ti
118. setups The SETup command restores the settings defined by the array of bytes returned by the SETup query The SETup command must be followed by a carriage return CR and line feed LF to signal the instrument that the next data to follow on the bus is the byte sequence The setup byte sequence must immediately follow an error occurs if something else another command or some other form of data is sent The setup data is sent as a binary block in the following form lt gt lt non zero digit length word DAB DAB END The non zero digit is a single ASCII numeral specifying the number of words in length word The length word is an unsigned binary integer that is x digits long where x is specified by the non zero digit representing the number of Data Bytes DAB The SET query causes the HP 5373A to transmit the current measurement setup to the external controller in the form of a binary block of data The binary block is in the form described above except that the non zero digit is always the number 6 and the length word is always 6 digits long Command Reference Examples The program example Figure 5 2 demonstrates how to use the SETup query and SETup command to save and restore an instrument setup Also see Teach Learn Program Example in Appendix E 10 tExample of learn mode using the SET query and the SET command 20 1 30 The SET query reads information from the 5373A that s
119. since there is no length information provided with the measurement output This result is also useful for pre triggered or aborted measurements where the actual number of results may be different than those predicted by computing the Block Size x Block Count product Specifically if the data output is any Non Hardware histogram function the data length value is the actual number of measurements that are output If there are several values read with each measurement for example Gate Time you need to take this multiple value output into account Another way of looking at the value provided by DLENgth is that it is the number you would use to terminate a FOR I 1 TO N reading loop regardless of how many values are entered per loop pass If the data output is histogram data any Histogram function DLENgth provides the number of bins 5 11 HP 5373A Programming Manual DMS Default Measurement Setup command DSP Display command query that are output This bin value is dependent upon the selected Histogram format refer to HFORmat command If you selected COMPressed format DLENgth returns the number of non zero bins since this is the number of measurement pairs bin index bin value that are output If you select FULL format DLENgth returns the value 2000 since every bin is output If no measurement data is available at the time DLEN is executed a zero will be returned Example OUTPUT 703 DLEN Queries
120. subsequent data then continue the scan An example is given in Technical Note 3 Event Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 PRODUCING VALID TIME STAMPS Time and interpolator data is delivered with the second data capture for each sample To produce valid time stamps your program must 1 Correct the binary data for counter rollovers 2 Incorporate interpolator data 3 Correct for differences in electrical path length between the start and stop channels Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers Binary time data increases monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred An overflow processing routine must scan the time data for any datum which is smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Time Overflow Correction value to the datum and all subsequent time data then continue the scan An example is given in Technical Note 3 Time Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Incorporating Interpolator Data The algorithm for producing time stamps from binary time data and binary interpolator data is time stamp time datum 2 ns interpolator datum x 0 1 ns Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between the Start and Stop Channels There are several possible signal paths running from input connectors on the HP 5373A front panel to measurement hardware inside the instrument Signal routing depends on the select
121. that might change are Trigger Mode Trigger Slope or Trigger Level Type Momentary Associated With Parameter Status Coupling This message occurs when both the Arming selection and Measurement Source channel have been changed to resolve conflict with the Measurement Function that has been entered Binary output turned off Block or Measurement size changed Calculating measurements Decimal point entry disallowed Decimal point previously entered Status and Error Messages Type Momentary Associated With Parameter Status Coupling This message occurs when the instrument is in the Binary output mode and the Envelope Power or Amplitude Modulation function has been selected Binary output mode is not supported for Envelope Power or Amplitude Modulation measurements The instrument defaults to ASCII output mode Type Momentary Associated With Parameter Status Coupling This message occurs if a Block Size or Measurement Size is entered which causes the total number of measurements to exceed 2E 15 This is applicable to Histogram TI modes in particular When this happens the entered parameter is allowed but the other is defaulted to keep the total acquisition size less than 2E 15 measurements For example if the Measurement Size is 20 000 000 measurements the maximum Block Size enterable is 99 999 999 to insure that the total is less than 2E 15 If the Measurement Size is increased so that it is greater than 20
122. the interface initializes to an idle state no activity on the bus If n matches the instrument address the instrument becomes a listener The front panel LOCAL key is disabled if the instrument is in remote mode All front panel key presses are ignored MLA is the listen address LAD that matches the instrument address MTA is the talker address TAD that matches the instrument address 2 9 HP 5373A Programming Manual Table 2 2 Device Independent Commands Continued Mnemonic Command Name Description NRE Not Remote Enable The instrument returns to front panel local operation Local Lockout is cleared NUL Null No effect when received by the instrument REN Remote Enable The instrument enters the remote state and is enabled to respond to interface commands when addressed as a listener SDC Selected Device Clear If the instrument is a listener will cause the same response as DCL SPD Serial Poll Disable Terminates serial polling and returns the instrument to a normal talker state to output device dependent data rather than status information SPE Serial Poll Enable Establishes serial polling and enables the instrument to send the serial poll status byte when addressed to talk TAD Talk Address n If n matches the instrument address the instrument becomes a talker UNL Unlisten The instrument is unaddressed and terminates listening A single device cannot be unaddressed without unaddre
123. the Time_out For this to happen Block_size Samp_time gt Time_out For a Block size of 1000 and Samp time of 004 Time out should be less than 1000 004 or 4 seconds The user hits the ABORT softkey on the computer Transfer data Data pts Freq Seconds Sort data Data pts Freq Seconds Plot it Data pts Freq Seconds 1End of main program SUB Transfer data Data pts Freq Seconds COM Measurements INTEGER Block size Num meas REAL Samp time Time out COM Instruments Hp5373a counter DIM Header 10 Disp 80 Program Examples FOR I 0 TO 23 Blank all the softkeys ON KEY I LABEL GOSUB Waiting NEXT I Transfer data Sets up and transfers a block of data from the HP5373A DISP Setting up measurement ASSIGN Counter TO 703 FORMAT OFF IFORMAT OFF uses the internal data of the computer 1INecessary for Floating Point Output ASSIGN Hp5373a TO 703 CLEAR Hp5373a Clear all SPOLL 8Hp5373a sure nothing is pending in the 5373A OUTPUT Hp5373a PRES 1 Preset the HP 5373A OUTPUT Hp5373a MEN INF Bring up information menu 1 OUTPUT Hp5373a SRE 16 Set Service Request Enable mask to pull SRQ on the Measurement Available bit of the HP 5373A 1 2 1 OUTPUT Hp5373a SMODE SING 1 Put HP 5373A in single measurement mode OUTPUT 8Hp5373a INT OUTP FPO Set data output to Floating Point OUTPUT Hp5373a MEAS FUNC FREQ Measur
124. the binary data defined below EVENT binary event count UNUSED FIELD TIME time of occurrence for each sample INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution 24 16 Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps 7 Y CJOCJEJ CJOCJESJ Figure 8 C Format 8 Binary Output The binary data stream shown above was derived from the signal shown in Figure 8 A To produce valid event stamps your program must correct the binary event data for counter rollovers To produce valid time stamps your program must 1 Correct the binary time data for counter rollovers 2 Incorporate interpolator data 3 Correct for differences in electrical path length between the start channel and the stop channel PRODUCING VALID EVENT STAMPS Correcting Event Data for Counter Rollovers Successive event counts increase monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred An overflow processing routine must scan the event data for any event datum smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Event Overflow Correction value to that datum and to all subsequent data then continue with the scan Event Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 3 82 Binary Output PRODUCING VALID TIME STAMPS Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers Binary time data increases monotonically unless a counter rollover h
125. the maximum allowable value The parameter is defaulted to that maximum value Value out of range set to minimum Waiting for arming Waiting for input signal Waiting for Manual Arm Waiting for Pre trigger Waiting for Start Arming Status and Error Messages Type Momentary Associated With Numeric Entry Status This message occurs when the entered parameter value is below the minimum allowable value The parameter is defaulted to that minimum value Type Static Status Associated With Measurement Status This message occurs when the HP 5373A is waiting for the specified arming event to occur before making the first measurement Type Static Status Associated With Measurement Status This message occurs when the HP 5373A has met the specified arming condition and is waiting for measurements to begin no input signal has been detected Type Static Status Associated With Measurement Status This message appears when a Totalize measurement with Manual arming is stared The HP 5373A is waiting for the MANUAL ARM key to be pressed which will open the gate Type Static Status Associated With Measurement Status This message occurs when the HP 5373A is waiting for the specified Pre trigger condition to occur before making a block of measurements Type Static Status Associated With Measurement Status This message appears when the measurement in progress is waiting for the start arm
126. the other seven bits optional are Table 2 6 used to indicate the type of service required STATUS BIT Not applicable A single bit of device dependent The HP 5373A does not use this status information which may be message logically combined with status bit information from other devices on the controller PASS CONTROL Not applicable Passes bus controller The HP 5373A does not use this responsibilities from the current message controller to a device which can L assume the bus supervisory role ABORT IFC Unconditionally terminates bus All HP IB activity terminated and communications and returns control returns to the system control to the system controller controller Talk and Listen are cleared for the HP 5373A and all other devices on the bus which terminates all bus communications The HP 5373A status remains as it was just prior to receipt of the Abort message Any partially entered HP IB data message is aborted The ABORT Meta message is distinct from the HP5373A ABORT Command 2 12 REMOTE OPERATION Local Mode HP IB General Information Through meta messages bus devices can exchange control and measurement information The command sequences are typical in that different controllers may send different sequences for a given meta message but will produce the same result When the HP 5373A operates in Remote mode all front panel controls are disabled except the power switch and the LOCAL ke
127. this manual both versions are given Distinctions are clarified in the text of this chapter and in accompanying illustrations and tables In this manual front panel control names are spelled out and printed in all capital letters If a front panel name is abbreviated on the instrument that is the way it is spelled if the reference is to the front panel designation For example INSTR STATE stands for Instrument State on the instrument The applicable HP IB command convention generally spells out the longform ISTate of the corresponding subsystem The HP 5373A front panel layout gathers functionally related pushbutton controls in groups for example RESULTS HP IB STATUS MENU SELECTION DATA ENTRY INSTRUMENT CONTROL Likewise The HP 5373A hierarchical command structure Figure 4 1 gathers functionally related HP IB commands in groups The command groups approximately follow the instrument menus If you are not already familiar with the HP 5373A Programming Manual FUNCTION PRE TRIGGER 2 pushouttons NUMERIC GRAPHIC INPUT ASurement NUMerc GRAPHic NPUD MATH FUNCTION PRE TRIGGER PROCess 2 pushbutlons ME ASurement INSTR SYSTEM STATE INTerfacel STate HELP DIAGnostic No equvaient LT SUBSYSTEM COMMAND GROUPS Command Hierarchy GRAPhic INPut STate DiAGnostics TEST NUMeric ME ASurement PROCess INTerface FUNCTION PRE TRIGGER MATH SYSTEM Sub
128. time data whether the start sample or stop sample is first in each pair 3 Incorporate interpolator data 4 Correct for differences in electrical path length between the start and the stop channel To produce valid event stamps your program must 1 Identify the binary output pattern for each pair of samples 2 Correct the binary data for counter rollovers PRODUCING VALID TIME STAMPS Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers Since this function will allow the stop sample to be collected before the start sample time data does not increase monotonically When start and stop are reversed the stop time count is correctly smaller than the start time count Your overflow processing routine must distinguish between start stop reversals and counter rollovers Overflow processing routines must correct the data only when a counter rollover is detected Correction for counter rollovers can be accomplished in two scans of the time data The two scan processes are described below First a scan which corrects for rollovers between start and stop then a scan which corrects for rollovers between measurements start stop pairs 3 108 Binary Output Correcting for Rollovers Between Start and Stop Counter rollovers which occur between start and stop are detected when subtraction of start data from stop data produces an out of range result If a subtraction produces a number greater than Maximum leave the stop datum uncorrected and add the
129. will remain in the format that it originated in Note that switching to Binary output format will empty the output buffer The OUTPut query returns the selected output format Note that queries are prohibited in Binary output mode therefore the response to the OUTPut query can never indicate the Binary output format Parameter ASCii Floating POint BINary Examples OUTPUT 703 INT OUTP ASC Tells the HP 5373A to output data to the controller in ASCII measurement format OUTPUT 703 INT OUTP Queries for the selected output format Shortform PSO Print SOurce Longform PSOURCE The PSOurce command selects the data source for generating a hardcopy output using the PRINt or PLOT commands When using the PRINt command MEASurements can be selected to get a copy of the measurements results or DISPlay can be selected to get a copy of the current screen When using the PLOT command only DISPlay can be chosen as the data source The PSOurce query returns the currently selected data source Parameters DISPlay MEASurements Examples OUTPUT 703 INT PSO DISP Selects the screen as the data source for printing OUTPUT 703 INT PSO Queries for the selected data source Diagnostic Test Command Reference DIAGNOSTIC The DiAGnostic TEST subsystem performs selected TEST SUBSYSTEM diagnostic tests on the HP 5373A to verify that functions work COMMANDS properly and to identify faulty
130. 0 gt lt 0 gt Length byte lt 0 gt lt 0 gt lt 8 gt 01000001 01100011 00010010 11010000 10 0 MHz 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 END Multiple result example Frequency A amp B Frequency A 10 MHz Frequency B 5 MHz lt gt Block lt 6 gt Preamble lt 0 gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt Length byte lt 0 gt lt 1 gt lt 6 gt 01000001 01100011 00010010 11010000 10 0 MHz 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 01000001 01010011 00010010 11010000 5 0 MHz 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 END 2 39 HP 5373A Programming Manual 2 40 NOTE Dual channel results are transferred in the sequence A B A C B C for simultaneous two channel measurements Alphanumeric Examples SECOND GROUP In the following examples a simplified notation represents the different formats of response elements To receive this data the Numeric screen must be in either NUMERIC BOLD or SPLIT mode In the following examples header header consisting of 6 and 6 digits giving length res A gt result for the primary measurement channel res B result for the secondary measurement channel limit A limit B 0 0 for pass results 1E0 for high results 1 0 for low results 1E38 for inside results 1E38 for NA results gate A gate time for the primary measurement channel gate B gate time for the secondary measurement channel lt mean gt lt allan vari
131. 08 Pulse Width Aruing Mode Block Holdoff Ara a block of measurements automatically Pulse Offtiae Sample Ara Duty Cycle sampling on mw Figure D 4 Event Interval Arming Mode Programming the Arming Modes Event Interval Arming Mode OUTPUT 703 MEAS FUNC FREQ SOUR A BLOC 1 MSIZ 164 OUTPUT 703 ARM EVIN STAR SLOP NEG CHAN B DEL 40 DCH A OUTPUT 703 SAMP DEL 10E 3 The first program line selects a Frequency measurement on Channel A One block of 164 measurements will be collected The second line selects the Event Interval arming mode The measurement begins after a negative edge on Channel B followed by 40 events on Channel A The third line sets measurement samples to be taken on the trigger event after every 10 milliseconds Figure D 4 shows the HP 5373A as it would be programmed For a detailed explanation of all the arming modes refer to the Operating Manual Waiting for arming PRF A FUNCTION _ Measurement Channel PRI Acquire block of seas Period Pre trigger Total Meas 164 Pulse width IARE Arwing Mode Block Holdoff After edge of MENJ Pulse Count pos edges Chan A Then a block of measurewents Sample
132. 10D A If the stop sample precedes the start sample the binary data is delivered as shown in Figure 10D B Note that the variation takes place measurement by measurement the first pair of samples might resemble Figure 10D A while the second pair of samples might resemble Figure 10D B Example 1 Frequency A Event Event arming start precedes stop start armed after 3 Channel A events stop armed after 2 Channel B events F MEASUREMENT Chan A CNN 04 i Chan B N 1 i2 ext ARM i i f sug sto REF ARMED ARMED EDGE Start Stop BC BINARY DATA Figure 10D A Frequency Measurement on Channel with Event Event Arming Mode Showing Corresponding Binary Output Example 2 Frequency A Event Event arming stop precedes start start armed after 3 Channel A events stop armed after 2 Channel B events 3 105 gt 5373 Programming Manual MEASUREMENT Er ST RA EDGE ARMED ARMED 29056 Stop Goa 4 1 BINARY DATA WENEN Figure 10D B Frequency Measurement on Channel A with Event Event Arming Mode Showing Corresponding Binary Output Producing Results PRF Frequency PRI and Period results are generated by calculating both elapsed time and elapsed events between start and stop then taking the appropriate quotient The formulas are
133. 1A Graphics command no longer used C 10 Response timeout occurred C 13 WARNING Both frequencies out of auto trigger range C 16 WARNING Frequency too high for 16 WARNING Frequency too low for auto trigger C 16 Warning messages defined WINT System WINT query System Index 7 5373A Programming Manual Index 8
134. 200 1210 1220 1230 1240 1250 1260 1270 1280 1290 1300 1310 1320 1330 1340 1350 1360 1370 1380 1390 1400 1410 1420 1430 1440 1450 1460 1470 1480 1490 1500 1510 1520 1530 1540 1550 1560 1570 1580 1590 1600 1610 1620 1630 1640 1650 1660 INTEGER I OUTPUT KBD CHRS 255 amp K Clear ALPHA screen GINIT GCLEAR GRAPHICS ON VIEWPORT 15 90 RATIO 20 75 CSIZE 3 5 PEN 7 LINE TYPE 3 FRAME LINE TYPE 1 CLIP OFF Min ti MIN Time interval Max ti MAX Time interval IF Max ti Min ti THEN Max ti Max 1 1 5 ti Min ti Min ti 1l E 5 ABS Min ti END IF WINDOW 0 1 0 1 MOVE 0 1 LORG 8 LABEL VAL DROUND Max ti 6 amp MOVE 0 5 LABEL Hz MOVE 0 0 LABEL VALS DROUND Min ti 6 amp 8 MOVE 0 0 LORG 6 LABEL MOVE 0 0 LORG 3 LABEL 0 MOVE 5 0 LORG 6 LABEL seconds MOVE 1 0 LABEL MOVE 1 0 LORG 9 LABEL PROUND Time stamp SIZE Time stamp l1 12 CLIP ON PENUP PEN 3 MOVE 0 0 WINDOW 0 Time_stamp SIZE Time_stamp 1 Min_ti Max ti PENUP PLOT Time stamp l Time interval 1 FOR I 2 TO SIZE Time stamp l DIV 2 1 PLOT Time stamp I 2 Time interval I NEXT I SUBEND Program Examples E 17 HP 5373A Programming Manual Binary Example 2 This program sets up the HP 5373A to take 10 Frequency measurements using Time Interval arming For this measurement the HP 5373A uses output format 3 see Chapter 3 Binary Output
135. 2A 3 39 How Signals Are Converted to Binary Data 3 39 Producing Results 3 39 Expanded Data 3 40 Binary Data 3 40 vi Table of Contents Chapter 3 Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps 3 41 BINARY OUTPUT Producing Valid Event 3 41 Continued Correcting Event Data for Counter Rollovers 3 41 Channel C Correction 3 41 Producing Valid Time Stamps 3 41 Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers 341 Incorporating Interpolator Data 3 42 Generating Final Function Results from Time Stamps and Event Stamps 3 42 Continuous Time Interval Results 3 42 FREQUENCY PRI and PEriod Results 342 Time Deviation Phase Deviation And Frequency Deviation Results Format 2B re EE Ee XS How Signals Are Converted to Binary Data Producing Results Expanded Data Binary Data Output Converting Binary Data To Event Stamps and Time Stamps 3 47 Producing Valid Event 3 48 Correcting Event Data for Counter Rollovers
136. 373a HLIM High limit OUTPUT 8Hp5373a NUM DISP LIM OUTPUT Hp5373a MEN NUM 1 OUTPUT Hp5373a HSE 128 1 1 the CRT tLow limit 9 999 MHz 1High limit 10 001 MHz 1The HP 5373A Timebase is 10 000 MHz tset up path for HP 5373A 1Clear any messages 1Preset the HP 5373A 1Put it in single measurement mode IMake a frequency measurement 1Set the measurement size to 250 lUse Channel 1Interval Sampling 14 msec sample intervals ITurn test limits on iset the lower limit ISet the upper limit 1 1 the limit display ITurn on the Numeric display HP 5373A CRT will show the 1results of the limit test iset the Hardware Status Enable Register to tenable the measurement limit bit OUTPUT Hp5373a SRE 1 1Set the Service Request Enable register to HP 5373A Programming Manual 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 1pull SRQ when Hardware Status Bit is set 1 OUTPUT Hp5373a REST start new measurement ON INTR 7 GOTO Srq 1 SRQ then go to Srq and process it ENABLE INTR 7 2 tEnable the interrupt DISP Measurement in progress 1Stay in this loop as long as each block 10f measurements passes the test limits 1An SRQ will exit this loop Test one SPOLL 8Hp5373a IF BIT Test one 4 THEN N N 1 DISP Measureme
137. 4095 4095 8181 HOLDOFF EDGE HOLDOFF 4096 8190 4096 8190 4095 8190 TIME HOLDOFF 4096 8190 8190 EVENT HOLDOFF SAMPLING INTERVAL SAMPLING 4096 8181 4096 8191 TIME SAMPLING CYCLE SAMPLING 8191 06 SAMPLING 8191 PARITY SAMPLING REPET EDGE SAMPLING REPET EDGE PARITY SAMPLING RANDOM SAMPLING HOLDOFF SAMPLING MANUAL EDGE NTERVAL 4096 4096 8090 4 5 405 4085 8190 EDGE EDGE feof aos woos PO EDGE CYCLE feo EDGE EVENT th EDGE PARITY 4096 EDGE RANDOM 4096 4096 TIME INTERVAL d 8190 4095 TIME TIME 1 1 1 EVENTANTERVAL 8190 EVENT EVENT 1 1 1 EXTERNALLY GATED 4096 2048 2048 1 DUAL Simultaneous Dual channel 2 results Frequency and Period options A amp B A amp C B amp C Totalize option is A amp B 2 RATIO Frequency and Period ratio options are A B A C B A B C C A C B Totalize ratio options are A B B A 3 SUM Frequency and Period sum options are A B A C B C Totalize sum option is A B 4 DIFFERENCE Frequency and Period difference options are B A B C C A Totalize difference options are 5 91 HP 5373A Programming Manual Table 5 7 Maximum Measurements per Block 2 of 2 ARMING MODE MEASUREMENT FUNCTION HISTOGRAM CO
138. 5 121 LIM Limit Testing command query 5 122 Lower Limit command query 5 123 MATH Math Modifiers command query 5 123 NORM Normalize 5 124 OFFS Offset command query 5 125 SCAL Scale command query 5 125 SREF Set Reference command query 5 126 STAT Statistics 5 127 AVAR Allan Variance query only 5 128 MAX Maximum query only MEAN Mean query only MIN Minimum query only RAV Root Allan Variance query only 5 129 RMS RMSQ Root Mean Square query only 5 129 SDEV Standard Deviation query only 5 129 VAR Variance query only 5 130 Instrument State Subsystem Commands 5 131 ERAS Erase Register command WIPE aire s 5 132 REG Register command query 5 132 PROT Protect Register command query 5 132 Interface SYSTEM Subsystem Commands 5 135 HFOR Histogram Format command query 5 136 MIST Measurement Timeout Status command query 5 136 MTV Measurement Timeout Value command query
139. 6 time interval measurements versus time To use this program 1 Install an an HP 54002 50Q Input Pod as the HP 5373A CHANNEL A Input 2 Connect a 10 kHz signal to Channel A 3 LOAD and RUN the program Binary 1 Program Example E 14 INTEGER Buff 0 8192 1 3 BUFFER Block size 1Dimension Buff to hold Time data for 4096 Time Interval measurements 1Because this measurement uses Format 4A output mode there are 2N Time Stamps This gives a total of 8192 Time Stamps each being 3 bytes long 1 REAL Time_interval 1 4096 Time_stamp 1 8192 Dimension Time interval and to hold 4096 measurements COM Constants Format bytes Two expl6 Two exp32 Program Examples 90 Block size 40961 Block size specifies the number of measurements to be 100 1 taken 4096 is the maximum number of measurements for 110 1 Time Interval measurements using Automatic arming 120 1 130 Two expl6 2 16 1 SET UP CONSTANTS 140 Two exp32 2 32 150 Format bytes 6 160 IThis measurement uses Format 4A The output therefore is represented as 170 ITime 4 BYTES INTERPOLATOR 2 BYTES 180 1 190 Transfer data Block size Buff 200 Convert bin72 Block size Buff Time interval Time stamp 210 Plot data Time interval Time stamp 220 END 230 SUB Transfer data INTEGER Block size Data buff BUFFER 240 Transfer data Sets up and transfers a block of data from the HP 5373A 250 DISP Setting up measurement 260
140. 72A Window Margin Analysis commands and queries are not recognized by the HP 5373A These commands and queries are CMARgin DWINdow DWINdow EMARgin ENOlse LMARgin LNOIse MLEVel MLEVel MREad MREad PSHift WALL WHIStogram WMULtiple WOFFset WTYPe WTYPe The HP 5373A FUNCTION menu PRF Frequency Softkey action depends on the pod installed in the selected channel If the pod is an HP 53702A Envelope Detector PRF will be chosen If the pod is an HP 53702A 50Q Input Pod Frequency will be chosen If a two channel measurement has been specified and either channel does not have an HP 53702A pod Frequency will be chosen Similar logic applies to the PRF Period Softkey The HP 5373A does not make Peak Amplitude measurements The HP 5372A does The HP 5373A Pulse Width measurement is the same as the HP 5372A Positive Pulse Width measurement The HP 5373A Pulse Offtime measurement is the same as the HP 5372A Negative Pulse Width measurement The HP 5373A can make Frequency Deviation measurements The HP 5372A cannot HP 5373A PROCess MATH menu CARRier parameters except MANual are different than those of the HP 5372A HP 5371A Program Conversion Table F 1 HP 5373A to HP 5371A Command Equivalents HP 5371A COMMANDS HP 5373A COMMANDS MARKer X SMARker BLACk MARKer O SMARker WHITe MARKer PEAK MMAX MARKer CENTer no equivalent MARKer RIGHt MRIGht MARKer LEFT MLEF
141. A Stop channel slope positive Start delay events 1 Start delay time 200 ns Start delay channel A Stop delay events 1 Stop delay interval 1045 Stop delay time 15 Stop delay cycles 16 Stop delay channel A Measurement mode Normal Segmentation Off TV Averaging On Inhibit Off Inhibit Threshold Inhibit Sense Above TI Detect region Above TI Detect lower value Ons TI Detect middle value Ons TI Detect upper value Ons Pre trigger Off Graphics Presets Displayed Graph Histogram Active marker selection Vertical Black X axis Manual Scale status Off Y axis Manual Scale status Off Update status While update between blocks Connect status Off scale status Histogram Linear 5 21 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 22 PRIN Print Screen command Table 5 3 Preset Conditions Continued FUNCTION MODE OR VALUE PRESET STATE Outline status Histogram On Grid status Off View channel for dual channel A measurements Marker Display Mode Marker Marker Next Mode Pixel Marker Min tracking status Inactive Marker Max tracking status Inactive Graphics menu level Main X and Y manual scaling parameters set to Histogram Xmin 0 Binwidth 200 ps Ymax 100 Time Variation Xmin 0 Xmax 0 Ymin 0 Ymax 0 Event Time Xmin 0 Xmax 0 Shortform PRIN screen Longform PRINT The PRINt command copies either measurement results or a bit map of the currently displayed
142. A Binary Output 3 68 Binary Output The binary data stream shown above was derived from the signal shown in Figure 5A A To produce valid event stamps your program must 1 Correct the binary event data for counter rollovers 2 Multiply the event stamp data by four if the measurement was made on Channel C To produce valid time stamps your program must 1 Correct the binary time data for counter rollovers 2 Incorporate interpolator data 3 Correct for differences in electrical path length between the start channel and the stop channel PRODUCING VALID EVENT STAMPS Correcting Event Data for Counter Rollovers Successive event counts increase monotonically see NOTE below unless a counter rollover has occurred An overflow processing routine must scan the event data for any datum smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Event Overflow Correction value to that datum and to all subsequent data then continue with the scan Event Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 NOTE Measurements armed as Time Sampling Edge Time or Edge Event will reset the event counters sometime before each start sample Overflow processing routines for measurements using these arming modes should expect event counts to increase when comparing a start sample to its corresponding stop sample However because of the reset it is incorrect to compare the current st
143. ARMING truncates to ARM ARMing Alternate Command Mnemonics MAXIMUM COMMAND LINE LENGTH COMMAND FORM AND SEQUENCE Programming Rules and Guidance The HP 5373A accepts alternate forms of certain shortform command mnemonics to accommodate industry accepted standards or variations For example you can use RIS RISE or RTIM to select the Rise Time function All alternate shortform command mnemonics are listed in Table 4 1 Table 4 1 Alternate Command Mnemonics Function or Parameter Mnemonics Common PRF Pulse Repetition Frequency PRF or FREQuency Frequenc PRI Pulse Repetition Interval or PRI or PERiod Period Duty Cycle DUTY OR DCYC DCYCIe Fall Time FALL or FTIM FALLtime FTIMe Rise Time RIS RISE or RTIM RISEtime RTIMe Time Interval TIM TIME or TINT TINTerval Measurement size sample size these MSIZ or SSIZ MSIZe SSIZe functions are identical Ground GRO or GND GROund Root Mean Square RMS or RMSQ RMSQuare The HP 5373A accepts a maximum command line of 80 characters including delimiters If more than 80 characters are sent the extra characters are truncated and an error message appears on the status line of the display This 80 line limit does not include the terminating e g CR LF characters If you are using an HP 85B computer as a controller a false error occurs when sending command lines of 64 to 79 characters If a line length between 64 and 79 character
144. Arming parameter changed Arming value changed by Fast Meas mode Arming input parameters changed Arming measurement source 4 have changed INPUT connector Press the front panel RESTART key or send the HP IB RESTART command to restart measurements If the message was caused by connecting the external reference the restarted measurements will be based on that external reference otherwise they will be based on the Internal Timebase Type Momentary Associated With Parameter Status Coupling This message occurs when the Arming selection has been changed to resolve conflict with another parameter that has been entered such as changing Measurement Function Type Momentary Associated With Parameter Status Coupling This message occurs when an Arming parameter has been changed to resolve conflict with another parameter that has been entered Examples of Arming parameters that might be changed are Arming channel or delay value Type Momentary Associated With Parameter Status Coupling This message occurs when an Arming value has been changed to accomodate the Fast Measurement mode This mode restricts arming to occur within 131 usec Type Momentary Associated With Parameter Status Coupling This message occurs when both the Arming selection and one or more Input menu parameters have been changed to resolve conflict with another parameter that has been entered Examples of Input menu parameters
145. COVERED BY THIS MANUAL in the introduction of the HP 5373A Operating Manual SERIAL NUMBER Serial Number Prefix 3102 Edition 1 E0191 Copyright HEWLETT PACKARD COMPANY 1991 5301 Stevens Creek Boulevard Santa Clara California 95052 8059 All rights reserved Printed JANUARY 1991 GD HEWLETT MANUAL PART NUMBER 05373 90003 7 PACKARD Microfiche Part Number 05373 90004 Safe GENERAL BEFORE APPLYING POWER SAFETY EARTH GROUND Considerations This product and related documentation must be reviewed for familiarization with safety markings and instructions before operation This product is a Safety Class I instrument provided with a protective earth terminal Verify that the product is set to match the available line voltage and the correct fuse is installed Refer to instructions in Appendix B of the Operating Manual An uninterruptible safety earth ground must be provided from the mains power source to the product input wiring terminals or supplied power cable Safety Symbols Instruction manual symbol the product WARNING will be marked with this symbol when itis THIS DENOTES A HAZARD CALLS ATTEN necessary for the user to refer to the in TION TO A PROCEDURE PRACTICE OR THE IF sa gt struction manual Indicates hazardous voltages LIKE WHICH IF NOT CORRECTLY PER FORMED OR ADHERED TO COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY DO NOT PROCEED BEYOND A WARNING SIGN UN
146. Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers 3 93 Correcting for Rollovers Between Start and Stop 3 93 Correcting for Overflows Between Measurements 3 93 Incorporating Interpolator Data 3 93 Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between the Start and Stop Channels 3 94 Generating Final Function Results Duty Cycle Rise Time Fall Time Pulse Width Pulse Offtime Format 10C How Signals are Converted to Binary Data Producing Results Expanded Data Binary Data Output Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps 3 101 Producing Valid Event 3 101 Chapter 3 BINARY OUTPUT Continued Table of Contents Correcting Start Channel Event Data for Counter Rollovers 3 101 Correcting Stop Channel Event Data for Counter Rollovers Channel C Correction Producing Valid Time Stamps Correcting Time Data For Counter Rollovers 3 102 Incorporating Interpolator Data 3 102 Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between Start and Stop Channels 3 102 Generating Final Function Results 3 103 Format 10D ih vei ces
147. Counter USING K Meas a I 370 PRINT I Meas a I 380 NEXT I 390 CLEAR 703 400 RETURN 410 1 420 Example 2 1 430 READ MEASUREMENT RESULTS LIMIT TEST RESULTS AND STATISTICS ON CHANNEL 440 PRINT 450 PRINT EXAMPLE 2 MEAS LIMIT AND STATS RESULTS FOR CHANNEL A 460 OUTPUT Counter PROC SOUR A LIM ON STAT ON TURN LIMITS AND STATS ON 470 OUTPUT Counter MENU NUM IDISPLAY RESULTS AND STATS 480 OUTPUT Counter NUM DISP SPLIT EXP OFF 490 500 TRIGGER Counter 510 FOR I 1 Sample size 1READ MEASUREMENT AND LIMIT TEST RESULTS 520 ENTER Counter USING K Meas a I Limit a I 530 PRINT I Meas a I Limit a I 540 NEXT I 550 1 560 PRINT 570 PRINT STATISTICS 580 FOR I 1 TO Nr of stats 1READ STATISTICAL RESULTS 590 ENTER Counter USING K Stats a I 600 PRINT I Stats a I 610 620 630 640 650 IREAD MEASUREMENT RESULTS AND GATE DATA FOR CHANNELS A AND 660 PRINT 670 PRINT EXAMPLE 3 MEASUREMENT AND GATE RESULTS FOR CHANNELS A AND B 680 690 OUTPUT Counter MEAS SOUR A B 1SOURCE CHANNELS A amp B 700 OUTPUT Counter PROC SOUR A LIM OFF STAT OFF TURN LIMITS AND STATS OFF 710 OUTPUT Counter NUM DISP NUM EXP 1EXPANDED DATA 720 730 TRIGGER Counter 740 FOR I 1 Sample_size READ MEASUREMENT AND GATE RESULTS 750 ENTER Counter USING K Meas a I Meas b I Gate a I Gate b I 760 PRINT 770 PRINT 780 PRINT TAB 7 CHANNELS A AND MEASUREMENTS Meas_a I Me
148. D d ed Mie ed NUES NUMEN PC OR Figure 2 2 5373A Status Reporting Structure 2 18 EVENT STATUS REGISTER EVENT STATUS ENABLE REGISTER STATUS BYTE REGISTER rsv eeu SERVICE REQUEST MSSS_NS Status Registers Status Enabling Registers General Information The status reporting structure of the HP 5373A consists of three status registers containing single bit summary messages representing current hardware status or the occurrence of an event Each status register has a corresponding enabling register so you can set the conditions under which the HP 5373A generates an SRQ The three status registers of the HP 5373A are m Hardware Status Register indicates status of the measurement and input amplifier circuitry m Event Status Register indicates parsing and execution errors m Status Byte Register contains the summary messages from the Event Status and Hardware Status Registers In addition the Status Byte Register reports the status of the Output Buffer and measurement computer The three Status Enable Registers set the conditions under which the HP 5373A generates an SRQ The HP 5373A sends an SRQ to the controller after a 0 to 1 transition of an enabled condition The Enable Registers are m Hardware Status Enable Register m EventStatus Enable Register m Service Request Enable Register Each bit in an Enable Register is logical ANDed wi
149. D GTL to local front panel operation control Instrument status is that set just prior to receipt of the Local message 2 11 HP 5373A Programming Manual Table 2 3 Meta Messages Continued Meta Command General Specific Message Sequence Description HP 5373A Response LOCAL LLO Disables local front panel Disables LOCAL key The 5373A LOCKOUT controls of selected devices remains in remote operation until a Local message is received on the bus LOCAL LCLL Returns all devices to local front Returns 5373A to local control CLEAR panel control and and clears Local Lockout message LOCAL simultaneously clears the Local LOCKOUT Lockout message SERVICE SRQ Indicates a device requires service The HP 5373A sends a Service REQUEST by the controller Service requests Request message to the controller occur when specific hardware under certain conditions as related conditions occur such as a defined by the settings of the time base oscillator out of lock an Event Status Enable and input pod removed and so on Hardware Status Enable registers This message is ignored by the HP 5373A when received STATUS BYTE UNL MLA Presents status information of a The HP 5373A sends status TAD SPE particular device one bit information to the controller The data SPD UNT indicates whether or not the assignment of the bits in the device currently requires service Status Byte are shown in
150. Differences in Electrical Path Length Between the Start and Stop Channels There are several possible signal paths running from signal input connectors on the HP 5373A front panel to measurement hardware inside the instrument Signal routing depends on the selection of several parameters including Common Input Mode and Attenuation To adjust for this variation add a correction value called an offset to each stop channel time stamp Start channel time stamps require no correction Use Technical Note 4 to determine the correct value of offset for your application For the stop channel time stamp corrected stop time stamp stop time stamp offset Generating Final Function Results From Time Stamps Time Interval results are generated by calculating elapsed time between the start time stamp and stop time stamp Time Interval corrected stop time stamp start time stamp Expanded Data for Time Interval is Missed Events Missed Events are trigger events which are counted but which are not time stamped Missed Start Channel Events start event stamp 1 start event stampi 1 Missed Stop Channel Events stop event stamp 1 stop event stamp 1 3 88 Binary Output Format 10B EXPANDED MEASUREMENT CHANNEL S DATA ARMING MODES Time Interval A gt ON Automatic Bo A Edge Holdoff Pulse Width Offtime Rise Time Fall Time Duty Cycle A rel B BrelA Interval Sampling How Signals are Converted to Binary
151. Do not compute measurement results using adjacent end data from different blocks i e last sample from previous block and first sample from current block Compute all measurement results using only data from the same block Besides the Block Arming data problem event counters are reset between blocks in some arming modes These arming modes are Time Holdoff Event Holdoff Edge Cycle Time Interval Event Interval Time Sampling Edge Time Edge Event Time Time Event Event When event counters are reset between blocks event data in adjacent blocks will be uncorrelated Glossary GLOSSARY Counter Rollover Counter Overflow Event Data Event Stamp Expanded Data Inhibit Binary Output This occurs when a time or event counter within the HP 5373A goes from maximum count to zero during a measurement Because the HP 5373A acquires data continuously any counter rollover must be detected and corrected before computing final measurement data Data generated from the event counters in the HP 5373A In general event data represents the number of trigger events which occur in the input channel Specifically when measuring PRF or frequency event data represents cycles of the incoming signal in Time Interval measurements an event count as well as a corresponding time count results from properly armed start and stop input signals In the Binary output each event datum is represented by an unsigned 32 bit binary num
152. ED FIELD TIME stop sample time of occurrence INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit 3 86 Binary Output Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps Figure 10A C Format 10A Binary Output The binary data stream shown above was derived from the signals shown in Figure 10A A To produce valid event stamps your program must 1 Correct the start channel binary event data for counter rollovers 2 Correct the stop channel binary event data for counter rollovers To produce valid time stamps your program must 1 Correct the binary time data for counter rollovers 2 Incorporate interpolator data 3 Correct for differences in electrical path length between start channel and stop channel PRODUCING VALID EVENT STAMPS Correcting Start Channel Data for Counter Rollovers Start channel event counts increase monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred Note that start channel event counts are provided with every other sample Monotonic increase should be expected for data 1 3 5 etc See Figure 10A A An overflow processing routine must scan the start data for any start datum smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the the routine must add the appropriate Event Overflow Correction value to that start datum and to all subsequent start data then continue with the scan Event Overflow Co
153. END Shortform PODs installed Longform POD The POD query returns a string indicating which input pods or rear panel options are currently installed if any The string returned is HPnnnnnA HPnnnnnA where nnnnn is the Hewlett Packard model number 53702 54001 54002 or 54003 The first name in the string is the Channel A pod the second name is the Channel B pod If a respective pod slot is empty NONE is returned in the appropriate string position Example OUTPUT 703 POD Queries for the currently installed input pods Shortform PRES PRESet instrument Longform PRESET The PRESet command resets the instrument to default settings This command performs the same function as the RST command Refer to Table 5 3 for a list of the HP 5373A preset conditions Note that the PRESet command clears the key queue but does not clear the error queue Example OUTPUT 703 PRES Presets the HP 5373A to default conditions Command Reference Table 5 3 Preset Conditions FUNCTION MODE OR VALUE PRESET STATE Measurement Function PRF if HP 53702A Envelope Detector Pod is installed in CHANNEL A or Frequency Measurement Channel A Block Size 100 Block Count 1 HW Histogram Start 05 HW Histogram Binwidth 200 pS HW Histogram Span 400 nS HW Histogram Center 200 5 HW Histogram Block Arm Fast Arm Arming Automatic Start channel A Start channel slope positive Stop channel
154. ENT THIS IS OUTSIDE THE LOOP TO AVOID INDEXING BEFORE THE FIRST MEASUREMENT Eventl FNGet 4byte val 1 1 Buff Timel FNGet 4byte val 1 3 Buff IF Eventl lt Event0 THEN Eventl Eventl4Two exp32 Overflow occurred IF Timel Time0 THEN Time ovfl Time ovfl4Two exp32 1 Time 1 Timel Time_ovf1 2 E 9 Buff 1 5 MOD 32 1 E 10 Time0 offset Freq 1 Eventl Event0 Time l Event0 Eventl Time0 Timel IF VAL SYSTEM VERSION CLOCK THEN ON CYCLE 1 GOSUB Disp update this only if CLOCK binary is loaded FOR I 2 TO Block size 1 Eventl FNGet 4byte val I l Buff Timel FNGet 4byte val I 3 Buff IF Eventl Event0 THEN Eventl Eventl4 Two exp32 1 Overflow IF Timei Time0 THEN Time ovfl Time ovfl4Two exp32 Time I Timel Time_ovfl 2 E 9 Buff I 5 MOD 32 1 E 10 TimeO offset Freq I Eventl Event0 Time I Time I 1 Event0 Eventl Time0 Timel NEXT I Buff 1 Block_size 1 Format_words Time 1 Block_size 1 Freq 1 Bloc k size 1 E 23 HP 5373A Programming Manual 1070 OFF CYCLE 1080 SUBEXIT 1090 Disp update DISP Converting binary data I of Block_size completed 1100 RETURN 1110 SUBEND Convert_bin72 1120 1 1130 DEF FNGet 4byte val INTEGER Indexl Index2 Buff BUFFER 1140 Get 4byte val Converts two BASIC INTEGER types into an unsigned 32 bit nu mber 1150 COM Constants Format bytes Two 16 exp32 1160 RETURN Buff Index1 Index2 Buff Indexl1 Index2 lt 0 Two_exp16 Buff Inde
155. ESULTS Binary Output Continuous Time Interval results are generated by calculating elapsed time between samples Elapsed time between the first and second sample in each block represents the elapsed time between the block arming edge and the first signal edge For the first sample in each block Block arming data first measurement channel time stamp block arming timestamp For subsequent samples Continuous Time Interval time stamp time stamp Expanded Data for Continuous Time Interval measurements is Missed Events Missed Events are defined as trigger events which fall between samples but are not time stamped The formula for calculating Missed Events is Missed Events event stamp 1 event stamp 1 PRE FREQUENCY PRI AND PERIOD RESULTS PRF Frequency PRI and Period results are generated by calculating both elapsed time and elapsed events between samples then taking the appropriate quotient to produce the final result The elapsed time between the first and second sample in each block represents the elapsed time between the block arming edge and the first sampled signal edge For first sample in each block Block arming data first measurement channel time stamp block arming time stamp 3 55 gt gt lt HP 5373A Programming Manual For subsequent samples event stamp 1 event stamp n cor Frequency time stamp 1 time stamp t
156. ESet command System Preset PRF FUNCtion PRI FUNCtion PRINt command System PROCess MATH MATH subsystem SOURce sublevel command query 5 121 PROCess MATH subsystem CARR command query CFR command query CSL command query CST PROC command query SOUR command query PROCess MATH subsystem description 5 115 Processing considerations 4 18 Program Command Format alpha and numeric arguments 4 14 alpha format block format numeric format parameter 4 14 String format Program flow Program message terminators 4 18 Programming teach learn 4 19 tips e PSOurce command query interface 5 138 PUN query only MEASurement 5 94 PXSLope command query MEASurement 5 95 R Receiving the Abort message 2 27 Receiving the data message 2 16 REGister command query instrument state 5 132 Sublevel Rymer e ees 5 132 REMote command System 5 23 Remote mode Remote Operation REPetitive sample rate SMODe command QUI ecce cO e etter d Ro x y
157. ETUP FILE CONTAINS FRONT PANEL 15 INFORMATION AND WOULD 1NOT NORMALLY BE PURGED ITHIS EXAMPLE PROGRAM PURGES ITHE FILE SO IT IS NOT LEFT ON USER S DISK DRIVE Program Examples E 13 HP 5373A Programming Manual BINARY DATA OUTPUT EXAMPLES Binary Example 1 Below are three program listings that demonstrate the use of the binary output of the HP 5373A The programs illustrate the setup capture transfer and results of measurements made at the Channel A input of the HP 5373A Refer to chapter 3 of this programming manual for detailed explanations of binary programming and data conversion techniques This program sets up the HP 5373A to take 4096 Time Interval measurements using Automatic arming For this measurement the HP 5373A uses output format 4A see Chapter 3 Binary Output for details on format types The time interval measurements which are sent over the HP IB as binary data are converted in the controller and plotted versus time This example program contains three subroutines 1 Transfer data This subroutine sets up the HP 5373A to take 4096 time interval measurements It then initiates the measurements and uses the TRANSFER statement to read the measurement data from the HP 5373A 2 Convert_bin72 This subroutine converts the binary Time and Interpolator data into time stamps which are then used to calculate the time interval measurements 3 Plot data This subroutine plots the 409
158. EVT2 query returns the current event count on the second channel The second channel is defined as the second channel in the source equation for instance B is the second channel in the source equation A Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP TVAR EVT2 Queries for the current event count on the second channel 5 65 HP 5373A Programming Manual XARH Shortform XARH X axis Auto Range Hold X axis Auto Range Hold Longform XARHOLD command Use the XARHold command to copy the current X axis values to the Manual Scaling parameters Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP TVAR XARH Copies current X axis values to the Manual Scaling parameters XMAX Shortform XMAX X axis MAXimum value Set X axis Maximum Longform XMAXIMUM command query Use the XMAXimum command to set the X axis maximum value The XMAXimum query returns the current X axis maximum value Range 0 to 1E 8 seconds Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP TVAR XMAX 2 0 Sets maximum X axis value to 2 0 seconds OUTPUT 703 Queries for the current X axis maximum value NOTE The query outputs different formats depending on whether the graph addressed is main graph MGR or memory graph MEM The main graph query returns data in numeric format while the memory graph query returns data in string format For example If the XMAX for MGR and MEM are both 746 4782 us GRAP MGR XMAX returns the numeric value 746 4782E 06
159. Errata Title amp Document Type 5373A Programming Manual January 1991 Manual Part Number 95373 90003 Revision Date January 1991 HP References in this Manual This manual may contain references to HP or Hewlett Packard Please note that Hewlett Packard s former test and measurement semiconductor products and chemical analysis businesses are now part of Agilent Technologies We have made no changes to this manual copy The HP referred to in this document is now the Agilent XXXX For example model number HP8648A is now model number Agilent 8648A About this Manual We ve added this manual to the Agilent website in an effort to help you support your product This manual provides the best information we could find It may be incomplete or contain dated information and the scan quality may not be ideal If we find a better copy in the future we will add it to the Agilent website Support for Your Product Agilent no longer sells or supports this product You will find any other available product information on the Agilent Test amp Measurement website www tm agilent com Search for the model number of this product and the resulting product page will guide you to any available information Our service centers may be able to perform calibration if no repair parts are needed but no other support from Agilent is available Agilent Technologies 5373A Modulation Domain Pulse Analyzer PROGRAMMING
160. Example MDOW Shortform Move Marker Down Longform command command is MUP Range Example Shortform Memory Graph Longform command Example XMAX Shortform X Axis Maximum Longform query only Memory Graph Example 5 56 OUTPUT 703 GRAP MEM XMAX Queries for current X axis maximum value XMIN X Axis Minimum query only YMAX Y Axis Maximum query only YMIN Y Axis Minimum query only MGR Main Graph command XMAX X Axis Maximum query only Command Reference Shortform Longform XMIN X axis MINimum value XMINIMUM Use XMINimum to query the X axis minimum value for the Memory Graph Example OUTPUT 703 Queries for current X axis minimum value Shortform YMAX Y axis MAXimum value Longform YMAXIMUM Use YMAXimum to query the Y axis maximum value for the Memory Graph Example OUTPUT 703 GRAPE MEM YMAX Queries for current Y axis maximum value Shortform YMIN Y axis MINimum value Longform YMINIMUM Use YMINimum to query the Y axis minimum value for the Memory Graph Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP MEM YMIN Queries for current Y axis minimum value Shortform MGR Main GRaph Longform MGRAPH The MGRaph command selects the Main graph sublevel Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP MGR Selects the Main Graph sublevel Shortform XMAX X axis MA Ximum value Longform XMAXIMUM Use XMAX
161. Expanded Data for PRF Frequency PRI and Period measurements is Measurement Gate Time Gate Time is generated by calculating the elapsed time between current start and stop time stamps Measurement Gate Time corrected stop time stamp start time stamp a gt 3 71 Euh Ioni HP 5373A Programming Manual 3 72 Binary Output Format 5B EXPANDED MEASUREMENT CHANNEL S ARMING MODES Time Interval AB ON Edge Event How Signals are Converted to Binary Data Example Time Interval A Edge Event MEASUREMENT Chan fli Tu ER 2 3 14 dr ee ARM 7 sra se ARMED ARMED Start Stop 908 H08 BNARY DATA Figure 5 x Time Interval Measurement on Channel A with Edge Event Arming Mode Showing Corresponding Binary Data Output Producing Results Time Interval results are generated by calculating elapsed time between start and stop samples EXPANDED DATA Expanded Data for Time Interval measurements is Missed Events Missed Events are defined as trigger events which are counted between start and stop samples but which are not time stamped See Glossary in this chapter for more details The formula is Missed Events elapsed events between start and stop 1 3 73 ETT E gt gt HP 5373A Programming Manual NOTE This definition is intentionall
162. Format bytes 3 270 ASSIGN Hp5373a TO 703 1 HP 5373A s ADDRESS 280 OUTPUT 8Hp5373a PRES 1 PRESET 290 OUTPUT 8Hp5373a MEN INF STATE MENU 300 OUTPUT 8Hp5373a SMODE SING SINGLE MEASUREMENT MODE 310 OUTPUT 6Hp5373a INT OUTP BIN BINARY OUTPUT 320 OUTPUT Hp5373a MEAS FUNC TINT MEASURE TIME INTERVAL 330 OUTPUT Hp5373a MEAS SOUR gt CHANNELS gt 340 OUTPUT 8Hp5373a MSIZE amp VALS Block size MEASUREMENT SIZE 4096 350 OUTPUT Hp5373a MEAS ARM AUTO AUTOMATIC ARMING 360 OUTPUT Hp5373a INP MOD COM COMMON INPUT MODE 370 OUTPUT Hp5373a REST 1 START MEASUREMENT 380 ASSIGN 8Buff TO BUFFER Data_buff 390 DISP Waiting for completion of measurement 400 ENTER Hp5373a USING 8A Header Read Header 410 Tot byte count VAL Header 3 Total number of bytes to be transferred 420 lis represented by the last 6 digits of 430 440 TRANSFER Hp5373a Buff COUNT Tot byte count WAIT 450 OUTPUT 8Hp5373a Loc 1 PUT IN LOCAL 460 OUTPUT 8Hp5373a INT OUTP ASCII 1 RETURN TO ASCII OUTPUT MODE 470 DISP 480 SUBEND 1 Transfer data 490 1 500 1 510 SUB Convert bin72 INTEGER Block size Buff BUFFER REAL Time interval Time stamp 520 convert bin72 1Converts binary 5373A data to Time interval and Time arrays 530 COM Constants Format bytes Two expl6 Two exp32 540 INTEGER I Format words 550 REAL Start time Stop time Time ovfl Offset 560 Format words Format bytes DI
163. G PBLock MEAS PBLock MEAS PCOMpute PROC PDEViation PLOCation System PLOT System PMODe MEAS PMODe MEAS POD System PRESet System PRETrigger MEAS PRETrigger MEAS PRINt System PROTect IST REG PROTect IST REG PSOurce INT PSOurce INT PUNits MEAS PXSLope MEAS PXSLope MEAS RAVariance PROC SOUR REGister IST REGister IST REMote System RESTart System RLEVel INP SOUR RLEVel INP SOUR RMSQuare PROC SOUR RMSquare PROC SOUR SAMPle MEAS SCALe PROC SOUR SCALe PROC SOUR SCRoll NUM SDEViation PROC SOUR SELect GRAP SELect GRAP SETup System SETup System SGRaph GRAP SGRaph GRAP SLOPe INP SOUR SLOPe MEAS SAMP SLOPe MEAS STAR SLOPe INP SOUR SLOPe MEAS SAMP COMMAND WHERE USED COMMAND WHERE USED SLOPe MEAS STAR XMSCale GRAP HIST SMARker GRAP XMSCale GRAP TVAR SMARker GRAP XMSCale GRAP ETIM SMODe System XMSCale GRAP HIST SMODe System XMSCale GRAP TVAR SOURce INP XVALue GRAP SOURce MEAS SOURce PROC YARHold GRAP HIST SOURce INP YARHold GRAP TVAR SOURce MEAS YMAXimum GRAP HIST SREFerence PROC SOUR YMAXimum GRAP TVAR SREFerence PROC SOUR YMAXimum GRAP HIST SSCRoll GRAP YMAXimum GRAP MEM 5512 MEAS YMAXimum GRAP MGR SSIZe MEAS YMAXimum GRAP TVAR STARt MEAS YMINimum GRAP TVAR STATistics PROC SOUR YMINimum GRAP MEM STATistics PROC SOUR YMINimum GRAP MGR STOP DIAG YMINimum GRAP TVAR SUBS System YMRHold GRAP HIST YMRHold GRAP TVAR TEST DIAG YMSCale GRAP HIST
164. GRAP MEAN PROC SOUR CHANnel MEAS SAMP MEMory GRAP CHANnel MEAS STAR HBINwidth MEAS MENu System CLISt System HBINwidth MEAS MENu System CLEar System HBLock MEAS MGRaph GRAP CONTinue DIAG HBLock MEAS MINimum PROC SOUR COPY GRAP HCENter MEAS MLEFt GRAP CPERiod GRAP HCENter MEAS MMAXimum GRAP CPERiod GRAP HCONtinue GRAP MMINimum GRAP CREFerence PROC SOUR HFORmat INT MMODe System CSLope PROC HFORmat INT MMODe System CSLope PROC HiSTogram GRAP MMOVe GRAP CSTart PROC PROC SOUR MNEXt GRAP CSTart PROC HLIMit PROC SOUR MNEXt GRAP HMAXimum GRAP MNUMber GRAP DATe System HMEan GRAP MODe INP DATe System HMINimum GRAP MODe INP DCHannel MEAS SAMP HOVer System MORient GRAP DCHannet MEAS STAR HPAuse GRAP MORient MEAS SAMP HSDev GRAP MRATe GRAP DCHannel MEAS STAR HSPan MEAS MRIGht GRAP DELay MEAS SAMP HSPan MEAS MSEGment MEAS DELay MEAS STAR HSTart MEAS MSIZe MEAS DELay MEAS SAMP HSTart MEAS MSIZe MEAS DELay MEAS STAR HUNDer System MTSTatus INT DETect MEAS HWIThin MEAS MTSTatus INT DETect MEAS HWIThin System MTValue INT HP 5373A Programming Manual Table 5 1 Master List of Commands Continued COMMAND WHERE USED MTValue INT MUP GRAP NORMalize PROC SOUR NORMalize PROC SOUR ODATa System OFFSet PROC SOUR OFFSet PROC SOUR OHIStogram System OUTLine GRAP OUTLine GRAP OUTPut INT OUTPut INT PAMount MEAS PAMount MEAS PAUSe DIA
165. GRAP MEM XMAX retums the string value 746 4782 us 5 66 XMIN Set X axis Minimum command query XMRH X axis Marker Range Hold command Command Reference Shortform XMIN X axis MINimum value Longform XMINIMUM Use the XMINimum command to set the X axis minimum value The XMINimum query returns the current X axis minimum value Range 0 to 1E 8 seconds Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP TVAR XMIN 0 0 Sets minimum X axis value to zero seconds OUTPUT 703 GRAP TVAR XMIN Queries for the current setting NOTE The XMIN query outputs different formats depending on whether the graph addressed is main graph MGR or memory graph MEM The main graph query returns data in numeric format while the memory graph query returns data in string format For example If the XMIN for MGR and MEM are both 746 4782 us GRAP MGR XMIN returns the numeric value 746 4782E 06 GRAP MEM XMIN returns the string value 746 4782 Shortform XMRH X axis MaRker Hold Longform XMRHOLD The XMRHold command presets XMINimum and XMAXimum to the vertical marker values Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP TVAR XMRH Copies marker values to Manual Scaling parameters 5 67 HP 5373A Programming Manual XMSC X axis Manual Scale command query YARH Y axis Auto Range Hold 5 68 command YMAX Set Y axis Maximum command query Shortform XMSC X axis Manual SCale Longform XMSCALE Use the XMSCa
166. L Carrier SLope Longform CSLOPE Use the CSLope command to specify the Carrier Frequency Slope value for the Linear Carrier mode CARRier parameter is set to LINear The CSLope query returns the current Linear mode Carrier Frequency Slope value 5 119 HP 5373A Programming Manual CST Linear Carrier Starting Frequency command query PCOM Phase Computation 5 120 command query Range Hz usec 1E 12 to 1E 9 Examples OUTPUT 703 PROC CSL 3 14E 6 Sets the Linear Carrier Frequency Slope to 3 14 MHz usec OUTPUT 703 PROC CSL Queries for the current Linear mode Carrier Frequency Slope value Shortform CST Carrier STart Longform CSTART Use the CSTart command to specify the Carrier Frequency Starting value for Linear Carrier Frequency mode CARRier parameter is set to LINear The CSTart query returns the current Linear mode Carrier Frequency Starting value Range Hz 1E 12 to 1E 9 Examples OUTPUT 703 PROC CST 3 14E 6 Sets the Linear mode Carrier Frequency Starting value to 3 14 MHz OUTPUT 703 PROC CFR Queries for the current Linear mode Carrier Frequency Starting value Shortform PCOM Phase COMpute Longform PCOMPUTE Use the PCOMpute command to select the Phase Computation mode MODulo phase computation provides phase measurement results which have been reduced to a result lt 360 CUMulative phase computation allows for phase measurement result
167. MANUAL mm a 4 mmm RB GE Ite 1E ooo Eyes MCE opne U HEWLETT PACKARD Certification and Warranty CERTIFICATION Hewlett Packard Company certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Hewlett Packard further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology formerly National Bureau of Standards to the extent allowed by that organization s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members WARRANTY Hewlett Packard instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment During the warranty period Hewlett Packard Company will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a service facility designated by HP Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to HP and HP shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to HP from another country HP warrants that its software and firmware designated by HP for use with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument HP does not warrant that the o
168. MAX Move Marker to Maximum Value command 5 59 MMIN Move Marker to Minimum Value command 5 59 Copy Inactive Marker to Active command 5 60 MNEX Set Marker Next Mode command query 5 60 MNUM Get Measurement Number query only 5 60 MOR Marker Orientation command query 5 61 MRAT Get Modulation Rate query 5 61 MRIG Move Marker Right command 5 61 MUP Move Marker Up command 5 62 OUTL Outline Mode 5 62 PDEV Peak Deviation query only 5 63 SEL Select Graph Menu Level command query 5 63 SGR Show Graph command query 5 64 SMAR Select Active Marker command query 5 64 SSCR Screen Scroll command 5 64 TVAR command 5 65 EVT1 Event Count on First Channel query only 5 65 EVT2 Event Count on Second Channel query only 5 65 XARH X axis Auto Range Hold command 5 66 XMAX Set X axis Maximum command query 5 66 XMIN Set X axis Minimum command query 5 67 X axis Marker Range Hold command 5 67 XMSC X axis Manual Scale command query 5 68 YARH Y axis Auto Range Hold command 5 68 YMAX Set Y axis Maximum c
169. Manual Start Stop Table This table enables you to determine which channel A B or C is the start channel and which is the stop channel for any measurement Use this table along with the OFFSET FLOWCHART to determine the offset value to be added to your time data MEASUREMENT Duty Cycle Non Continuous or Externally Gated PRF Frequency PRI or Period see note below Pulse Width Pulse Offtime PRF Frequency PRI or Period START STOP SAMPLE SAMPLE CHANNEL SELECTION CHANNEL CHANNEL A A B COMMON RISING FALLING EDGE EDGE A A A B B B C C C A B A C B C A amp B A B B A A B A B B A A B A amp C A C C A A C C A A C A C B amp C B C C B B C B C C B B C A A B COMMON RISING FALLING EDGE EDGE A A B COMMON FALLING RISING EDGE EDGE Phase A REL B REL A Rise Time A Fall Time A Time Interval Time Interval Note non continuous PRF Frequency PRI and Period measurements refer to PRF Frequency PRI and Period measurements which use the following arming modes Time Sampling Edge Time Edge Event Time Time Event Event 3 154 B COMMON 80 POINT B COMMON 20 POINT Binary Output OFFSET FLOW CHART NOTE FOR EXTERNALLY GATED TOTALIZE MEASUREMENTS THE OFFSET VALUE IS ALWAYS 600 ps CHANNEL FIXED DELAY A CHANNEL 9 900 ps FIXED DELAY B CHANNEL 10 100 ps EIXED DELAY EXT ARM 1 SEPARATE DELAY X1 A
170. Momentary status messages definition Momentary warning messages definition MSEG query only MEASurement MSIZe command query MEASurement MTSTatus command query interface MTValue command query interface Multi command message Number of measurements per block 5 89 5 99 numeric DISP command query EXP command query SCR command NUMeric subsystem description 5 37 Numeric format NUMeric Menu display ODATa query System OHIS query System Operating modes HP IB OUTPut format command query interface 5 138 Output rates measurement 2 28 Index 4 P PAM command query MEASurement 5 92 Parallel Poll RR eee oe haw eens 2 6 Parallel polling 2 3 Parameter Strings Parameter format PAUSe test command diagnostic PBLOCK query only MEASurement PERiod FUNCHON i e err REV REIN Phase Deviation Carrier Frequency PLOCation System PLOCation query System PLOT command System PMODE command query MEASurement 5 94 POD query System 5 20 Polling 1 2 3 2 6 Polling serial POW FUNCtion PRE Trigger Menu display equivalent commands PR
171. N Queries for the minimum value in the last set of measurements Shortform RAV Root Allan Variance Longform RAVARIANCE The RAVariance query returns the value of the Root Allan Variance the square root of the Allan Variance for the last set of measurements This value will not be calculated if the Inhibit function is enabled Example OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR B RAV Queries for the Root Allan Variance value Shortforms 5 Root Mean Square RMSQ Root Mean SQuare Longform RMSQUARE The RMSquare or RMSQquare query returns the value of the Root Mean Square for the last set of measurements Example OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR B RMS Queries for the Root Mean Square value Shortform SDEV Standard DEViation Longform SDEVIATION 5 129 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 130 VAR Variance query only The SDEViation query returns the value of the Standard Deviation for the last set of measurements Example OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR A SDEV Queries for the Standard Deviation value Shortform VAR VARiance Longform VARIANCE The VARiance query returns the Variance value for the last set of measurements Example OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR B VAR Queries for the variance value Instrument State Command Reference INSTRUMENT The ISTate subsystem commands control storage and STATE SUBSYSTEM write protection of stored instrument configuration data
172. NH Queries for the current Inhibit status ILEV Inhibit LEVel ILEVEL The ILEVel command sets the Inhibit level value to transistor transistor logic TTL ground GND GROund or emitter coupled logic ECL Respective values are TTL Ground ECL 1 4 v 0v 13v The ILEVel query returns the current Inhibit Level value Parameters Examples TTL GND GROund ECL OUTPUT 703 MEAS ILEV TTL Sets Inhibit parameter to TTL logic levels OUTPUT 703 MEAS ILEV Queries for the currently set Inhibit level ISEN Inhibit Sense command query MSEG Memory Segmentation query only MSIZ Measurement Size command query Command Reference Shortform ISEN Inhibit SENse Longform ISENSE The ISENse command works in conjunction with the ILEVel value Use the ISENse command to cause the inhibit feature to respond above or below the value specified in ILEVel The ISENse query returns the current Inhibit Sense seting Parameters BELow Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS ISEN ABOV Sets Inhibit to occur above the value set using ILEVel OUTPUT 703 MEAS ISEN Queries for the currently set Inhibit Sense Shortform MSEG Memory SEGmentation Longform MSEGMENT The MSEGment query identifies if the memory segmentation feature is used for the current instrument setup If in use the query returns a 1 otherwise the query returns a 0 Segmentation is a condition that exi
173. NTINUOUS HISTOGRAM TIME TIME INTERVAL AUTOMATIC EDGE HOLDOFF TIME HOLDOFF EVENT HOLDOFF INTERVAL SAMPLING PARITY SAMPLING REPET EDGE SAMPLING REPET EDGE PARITY SAMPLING RANDOM SAMPLING EDGE NTERVAL EDGE PARITY EDGE RANDOM EDGE EVENT EVENT EVENT 2E 9 measurement blocks NOTE Maxima on this page are for the configuration 1 block of N measurements PAM Shortform Pre trigger AMount Pre trigger Amount Longform command query The PAMount command sets the pre trigger amount Amount is expressed in percent of block size or as an absolute number For example 50 percent means that half of the measurement block will be acquired prior to the Pre trigger event Or if expressed as samples the HP 5373A will acquire this number of samples prior to the Pre trigger event The PAMount value is not used for hardware Histogram measurement functions HTT HCT HPMT With these functions acquisition ends upon occurrence of the Pre trigger event 5 92 PBL Pre trigger Blocks command query PRET Pre trigger Control command query Command Reference The PAMount query returns the current Pre trigger amount Parameters n n nSAMPle Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS PAM 60 Sets Pre trigger amount to 60 percent OUTPUT 703 MEAS PAM Queries for the currently
174. ON PHASE DEVIATION TIME DEVIATION FREQUENCY DEVIATION EVENT HOLDOFF AUTOMATIC AUTOMATIC 5A 10 2A 10B 2 10C 10B 108 2 2 HOLDOFF EDGE HOLDOFF 5A 10A B 108 108 28 TIME HOLDOFF 8 6 3 INTERVAL SAMPLING 10 108 108 TIME SAMPLING CYCLE SAMPLING EDGE SAMPLING PARITY SAMPLING 10B REPET EOGE SAMPLING REPET EDGE PARITY SAMPLING RANDOM SAMPLING EDGE INTERVAL EDGE EDGE EDGE CYCLE EDGE EVENT EDGE PARITY EDGE RANDOM TIMEANTERVAL TIME TIME EVENTANTERVAL EXTERNALLY GATED 10 5 10 28 108 HOLDOFF SAMPLING xe fee s Li JI I4 LJ 5 108 48 14 15 MANUAL 14 15 1 DUAL Simultaneous Dual channel 2 results Frequency and Period options are A amp B A amp C B amp C Totalize option is A amp B 2 RATIO Frequency and Period ratio options are A B A C B A B C C A C B Totalize ratio options are A B B A 3 SUM Frequency and Period sum options are A B A C B C Totalize sum option is A B 4 DIFFERENCE Frequency and Period difference options are A C B A B C C A Totalize difference options are 3 28 ARMING CATEGORIES Category Continuous Arming Modes Automatic Ho
175. Overvoltage Status and Error Messages Type Static Error Associated With HP IB This message occurs when an attempt is made to send HP IB commands to the HP 5373A while it is in Talk Only mode The instrument cannot accept commands via HP IB while in this mode To allow the HP 5373A to accept commands return to Talk Listen mode Type Momentary Associated With HP IB Warning This message occurs when a front panel key is pressed while the HP 5373A is in Remote mode While in Remote all front panel keys except LOCAL are disabled Type Momentary Associated With HP IB Warning This message occurs when the LOCAL key is pressed while the HP 5373A is in Remote and in Local Lockout mode In Local Lockout mode the LOCAL key is disabled Type Static Failure Associated With Hardware Error This message occurs when the oscillator is out of lock Any measurements made while this message is on the screen may not be accurate Type Static Failure Associated With Hardware Error This message occurs when an overvoltage condition is present on both Input Channels A and B To correct this error change the signal Trigger Level Bias or Attenuation on the Input menu Type Static Failure Associated With Hardware Error This message occurs when an overvoltage condition is present on Input Channel A To correct this error change the signal Bias or Attenuation on the Input menu HP 5373A Programming Manual Error 110 Ch O
176. P 5373A s Error Queue The Error Queue contains a maximum of 16 error numbers represented by integer values which identify operator or hardware errors If more than 16 errors have been queued but not queried then the 16th one is replaced with Error 350 which is the HP standard error number indicating that too many errors have occurred Successively sending the query ERR returns error numbers in the order that they occurred until the queue is empty Additional queries return an error of 0 until another error condition is generated Only messages of the type Momentary Warning Static Error and Static Failure have error numbers that are entered into the Error Queue STATUS AND ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONS Abort only allowed in Single Acquiring measurement data Alternate Timebase selected Press RESTART Status and Error Messages The following list describes the HP 5373A system wide status and error messages in alphabetical order HP standard numbers which are consistently defined for all HP instruments are listed under Error and are preceded with a minus sign for example Error 120 Numeric argument error All of the other error messages with positive numbers are unique to the HP 5373A Messages with numbers are used to indicate actual events which have occurred which should be logged in the Error Queue Messages without error numbers are intended for status information only Note that th
177. Path_1 Header Setup_string 15 Header and Setup string LIN SETUP FILE Je e e eoe e e e ce e ee e oe e e e e e e e e e e e e e KKK e ne KEKE e e e e e KEE KEKE KE KKK KERRIER e e e e e e e e n x Retrieve setup Retrieves the front panel setup information from SETUP FILE and uses the SET command to program 1 the 5373A s original front panel setup kc oe ke ole ke e e e e e e ee ee e e de e de e ole ole e oc kc e e oe e e le ke e e e e ole le ole e e e ke le e e e e e e e ede de e e e e de e e e e e kc e de x Retrieve setup 1 OUTPUT Hp5373a LOCAL 1 5373A FOR LOCAL OPERATION PRINT MANUALLY CHANGE THE HP 5373A S FRONT PANEL SETTINGS PRINT THEN PRESS CONTINUE AND CHECK FOR THE ORIGINAL FRONT PRINT PANEL SETUP PAUSE 1 1 CLEAR SCREEN ALLOCATE Retrieved_headr 5 NEW STRING VARIABLE FOR HEADER INFORMATION 1 ALLOCATE Retrieved setup String length CREATE NEW STRING VARIABE FOR ISETUP INFORMATION ENTER Path l l Retrieved headr Retrieved setup READ SETUP INFORMATION 1FROM SETUP FILE 1 OUTPUT 5373 SET COMMAND IS USED ISEND SETUP INFORMATION TO THE 1HP 5373A 1 OUTPUT Hp5373a USING K Retrieved headr Retrieved setup 1SEND setup information back to the HP 5373A 1 ASSIGN amp Path 1 TO ICLOSE I O PATH E 12 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 PURGE SETUP FILE PURGE SETUP FILE 1S
178. Pod as the HP 5373A CHANNEL A Input 2 Connect the 10 MHz Timebase output from the rear of the HP 5373A to the Channel A input 3 Load and RUN the program 4 Asthe program runs the HP 5373A will make a block of measurements and check the measurements against the test limits If the Timebase output is left connected the measurements will always pass The computer CRT will indicate the progress of the measurements 5 Watch the Gate LED on the HP 5373A When the Gate LED is on the HP 5373A is making measurements When the Gate LED is on disconnect and then quickly re connect the BNC cable This action simulates a change in frequency that is out of limits 6 computer CRT shows the results from the SRQ The structure of the program is straightforward The first part sets up the HP 5373A to make a frequency measurement using Interval sampling The measurement is designed to last one second which makes it easy to disconnect the BNC while the Gate LED is on A loop is set up to make measurements continuously as long as the measurements are within the Low limit and High limit If a measurement falls out of limit an SRQ is generated causing a branch to the label Srq Program Examples The SRQ is then processed It is cleared by a Serial Poll The Status Byte is then examined to determine what caused the SRQ From there the Hardware Status Register is queried to determine what bit was set Finally the program reports on
179. Programming Manual seconds after a measurement starts For this setup about 750 measurements are taken The subprogram Transfer_data sets up the HP 5373A to make the measurement It also defines a key label that allows the user to abort a measurement at any time by pressing the soft key on the computer display Lines 900 950 determine how many bytes the HP 5373A transfers and initiates the transfer Example Program Program name ABORT Requires BASIC 5 0 or later lFor earlier versions of BASIC the SUB Sort data must be changed to not use the MAT command Use FOR NEXT loop to get the data into Freq and Seconds Expanded data is turned on for this example This means the HP 5373A will send over Frequency AND Time information Data pts is set up with 12 dimensions to handle the data The SUB Sort data takes the data from the buffer and puts it in Freq and Seconds 1 1 COM Measurements INTEGER Block size Num meas REAL Samp time Time out COM Instruments Hp5373a Counter DIM Data pts 1 1000 1 2 Freq 1 1000 Seconds 1 1000 CLEAR SCREEN GRAPHICS OFF Block 512 1000 11000 measurements Samp time 004 Sample interval in seconds Time out 3 0 1Time out in seconds 3 seconds will abort measurement 1 1 This demo can stop in one of 3 different ways 1 The measurement can be completed normally That is a total of 1 Block_size measurements made 12 The measurement can end because it takes longer than
180. RAP subsystem For these commands and OFF must be used Using 1 or 0 will cause an error 5 41 HP 5373A Programming Manual separator gt OFF ETIMe Sublevel gt separator HiSTogram TVARiation 1 GDISplay separator GRID HCONtinue HiSTogrom Sublevel gt HMAXimun HMEon HMINimum sal HSDev gt HPAuse RRGRIBX3 Figure 5 4 GRAPhic Subsystem Syntax Diagram 1 of 4 5 42 CONTINUED Command Reference Comes MCENter MDMode MDMode 1 separator MARKer MODulation STATistics N MDOWn seporotor number org MEMory MGRaph MLEFt XMINimum YMAXimum YMINimum XMAXimum XMiNimum YMAXimum YMINimum i ii seporator number org MMAXimum gt MNEXt MNEXt MNUMber 1 7 MORient hi separator i Figure 5 4 GRAPhic Subsystem Syntax Diagram 2 of 4 RRGRAZXS 5 43 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 44 CONTINUED GRAPhic ros MRATe MRIGht seporotor MUP separator OUTLine j sePorotor numberzarg j gt
181. RN 890 SUBEND Convert bin 71 900 DEF FNGet 4byte val INTEGER Indexl Index2 Buff BUFFER 910 Get 4byte val Converts two BASIC INTEGER types into an unsigned 32 bit nu mber 920 COM Constants Format bytes Two expl6 Two exp32 930 RETURN Buff Indexl Index2 Buff Indexl Index2 lt 0 Two_exp16 Buff Inde x1 Index2 1 lt 0 Two_exp16 Buff Index1 Index2 1 940 950 This function converts the 32 bit unsigned binary Time data into 16 960 Ibit signed binary data in order to simplify basic processing To 970 convert from unsigned to signed binary the Function checks to see 980 lif either the upper or the lower 16 bits of the Time data is a 990 1negative number if the most significant bit is a 1 If either of 1000 Ithe 16 bit numbers are negative 2716 is added to it in order to 1010 it to its positive signed binary equivalent The upper 16 bit 1020 1number is then multiplied by 2 16 and added to the lower 16 bit 1030 1number The function can be rewritten as follows 1040 1 1050 1060 Return Buff Indexl Index2 2 16 2 32 if the msb of Buff Indexl Index2 is a 1 0 otherwise 1070 1 Buff Indexl Index2 1 1 1 1080 1090 1100 1110 FNEND 1 Get 4byte val 1120 1 1130 1 2 16 if the msb of Buff Indexl Index2 1 is a 1 0 otherwise E 16 1140 SUB Plot data Time interval Time stamp 1150 Plot data Plots Time Interval vs Time 1160 1170 1180 1190 1
182. RRSOUZNA Figure 5 14 SOURce Sublevel Syntax Diagram 1 of 2 Command Reference INTINUED SOURce separator A M STATisitics f separator STATisitics AVARiance MAXimum 1 MiNimum gt RAVariance RMSquare RMSQuore SDEViation gt VARiance R SQUYNS Figure 5 14 SOURce Sublevel Syntax Diagram 2 of 2 5 117 HP 5373A Programming Manual CARR Set Carrier Control command query 5 118 Shortform CARR CARRier Longform CARRIER The CARRier command specifies how the Carrier Frequency is determined for a Phase Deviation Time Deviation or Frequency Deviation measurement The Carrier Frequency can m calculated automatically from a pulse input When this method is chosen any measurement that includes off time data is not used in the calculation m calculated automatically from a CW input m Specified as a constant frequency entered manually Manual Carrier Range is 1E 12 to 10E 9 Hz The HP IB command is CFR described below m Specified as a frequency that changes at a constant rate determined by manually entered slope and start values Slope Range is 1E 12 to 10E 9 Hz msec Starting Point Range is 1E 12 to 10E 9 Hz The HP IB commands for Slope and Starting Point are CSL and CST and are described below NOTE In the Pulse mode the on time and off ti
183. Register 2 27 Reading the Service Request Enable Register 2 27 Writing to the Service Request Enable Register 2 27 Clearing the Service Request Enable 2 27 Receiving the Abort Message 2 27 ASCII and Floating Point 2 28 Measurement Messages and Data Types 2 28 Choosing an Appropriate Format 2 28 Measurement Output Rates 2 28 Aborting a Measurement 2 31 Binary Output Format 2 31 How to Use ASCII and Floating Point Formats 2 31 ASCII Measurement Result 2 31 ASCI Result Format 2 32 Measurement Message 2 33 Single Message Unit 2 33 ASCII Measurement Result Format Examples 2 33 Numeric Examples 2 33 Alphanumeric Examples 2 34 Statistics Examples 2 36 Limit Testing Statistics Examples 2 37 Floating Point Measurement Result Format 2 37 Floating Poin
184. S Queries for the histogram result Shortform PLOCation Pre trigger LOCation Longform PLOCATION Use the PLOCation query to identify the index position of the Pre trigger if one exists The interpretation is that the index returned is the first sample following the detection of the Pre trigger If the measurement cannot produce a Pre trigger for example termination occurs by measurement count a zero is returned If a Pre trigger occurred but the 5373A could not identify the position a value of 1 is returned Example OUTPUT 703 PLOC Queries for the index position of the pre trigger Shortform PLOT PLOT screen Longform PLOT The PLOT command copies the currently displayed graph to any attached HP plotter that supports HP GL Hewlett Packard Graphics Language This command is available only for Graphics screens and is equivalent to pressing the PLOT GRAPH SHIFT PRINT front panel keys The CANCel hardcopy command can be used to abort the current plot output 5 19 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 20 POD Pods Installed query only PRES Preset Instrument command To use the PLOT command select DISPlay data as the print source refer to the PSOurce command description Example The following example demonstrates a method for using the PLOT command 10 SEND 7 MTA LISTEN 3 DATA PLOT CHR 13 CHR 10 20 SEND 7 UNL 30 SEND 7 LISTEN 1 40 SEND 7 TALK 3 50 WRITEIO 7 23 11 60
185. SE TS1 clear IF 51 2 i 2 THEN 1751 set check first read and second read IF event 2 i 2 lt event 2 i 1 THEN next sample lt than current FOR j 2 i 2 TO 4 N ifor all following samples event j event j 2 32 add overflow value to all samples NEXT j ENDIF ELSE TS1 clear check first read and first read IF event 2 i l lt event 2 i 1 THEN next sample lt than current FOR j 2 i 1 TO 4 N ifor all following samples 3 148 Binary Output event j event j 2732 iadd overflow value to all samples NEXT j ENDIF ENDIF NEXT i The algorithm for the time data is N the number of desired results There are 4N samples for this format NOTE Only use the second attempt at data capture FOR i 1 TO 2 N 1 IF time 2 i 2 time 2 i THEN tis next sample less than current sample FOR j itl TO 2 N for all following samples add overflow value to all second read samples time 2 j time 2 j 2 32 NEXT j ENDIF NEXT i 3 149 HP 5373A Programming Manual 3 150 Binary Output TECHNICAL NOTE 4 How To Determine Offset Values and Start Stop Channels For certain measurements an offset value must be added to the Time Data in order to correct for differences in electrical path length between measurement channels The offset value required depends on the HP 5373A measurement setup This Technical Note describes how to calculate offset values The following Formats require offset va
186. SR query You can use the hardware status register to effectively control the interactions between the instrument and the controller if a predetermined condition is met for instance to report a measurement block that contains an out of limit test condition An example program in Appendix F demonstrates how to use the HSR in a PRF or frequency measurement involving multiple blocks The technique employs low and high limit tests If either test fails the HP 5373A enables the SRQ This action triggers a query of the HSR Based on the result of that query a screen message gets displayed Refer to the commented program listing for more details The same techniques apply to using the Event Status Register For a description of this register read on The Hardware Status Enable Register is a 16 bit register that allows one or more events in the Hardware Status Register to be reflected in the Hardware Status Bit HSB message Each bit of the Enable register is ANDed with its corresponding bit in the Hardware Status Register the resulting bits are ORed to determine the summary HSB message The HSB message appears at bit 0 of the Status Byte Register If HSB is set to 1 and bit 0 of the Service Request Enable Register is set to 1 an SRQ is generated 2 21 HP 5373A Programming Manual 2 22 Reading the Hardware Status Enable Register Writing to the Hardware Status Enable Register Clearing the Hardware Status Enable Register
187. SSOCIATED WITH TIME 0 710 Ts block arm FNGet 4byte val 0 5 Buff E 19 HP 5373A Programming Manual 720 730 740 750 760 ffset 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 offse 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 G 930 940 xl In 950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 1120 1130 1140 1150 1160 1170 1180 1190 1200 1210 1220 1230 1240 E 20 Ts offset Ts block arm 2 E 9 Buff 0 7 MOD 32 1 E 10 Event0 FNGet_4byte_val 1 1 Buff Time0 FNGet_4byte_val 1 5 Buff TimeO Ts block arm THEN Time_ovfl Time_ovfl Two_exp32 ROLLOVER CHECK Ts block arm TimeO0 Time ovfl 2 E 9 Buff 1 7 MOD 32 1 E 10 Ts offset o Time0 offset Time0 2 E 9 Buff 1 7 MOD 32 1 E 10 Time stamp 0 0 FOR 1 2 TO Block 2 1 Eventl FNGet 4byte val I l Buff Timel FNGet 4byte val I 5 Buff IF Eventl Event0 THEN Eventl Event1 Two_exp32 1 ROLLOVER CHECK IF 1 lt 0 THEN Time ovfl Time ovfl4Two exp32 1 Time_stamp I 1 Timel Time_ovfl 2 E 9 Buff I 7 MOD 32 1 E 10 TimeO t Freq I 1l Eventl Event0 Time stamp I 1 Time stamp I 2 EventO Eventl Time0 Timel NEXT I SUBEND DEF FNGet 4byte val INTEGER Indexl Index2 Buff BUFFER et 4byte val COM Constants Format bytes Two 16 exp32 RETURN Buff Indexl Index2 Buff Indexl Index2 0 Two expl6 Buff Inde dex2 1 lt 0 Two_exp16 Buff Index1 Index2 1 Analysis of the above funct
188. STATUS BYTE 1 t 1 ONLY THE GRAPHICS DISPLAY CAN BE PLOTTED SO THE FOLLOWING 1 LINE FORCES THE DISPLAY TO THIS MODE OUTPUT Hp5373a MENU GRAPHICS H 1 ke ie de e e ke e e ee e e ke ke e e de ee e ce e ede ce e kc e ce e e ke eee e eee e e e ec ke e ce ce e e e e e ke ke e ee ke e ke e e e 1 THE FOLLOWING TELLS THE HP 5373A TO DO A PLOTTER DUMP AND DOES THE 1 NECESSARY HP IB ADDRESSING SEND Hpib UNL MTA LISTEN Hp5373a DATA PLOT CHR 10 CHR 10 LINEFEED SEND Hpib UNL TALK Hp5373a LISTEN Plotter DATA coke e ke e ke ke ce e e e e e ce ee ecc ke e he e de e e KKK e e dee ee ee e de e ke e KK de e ke ee e e e kc e e e de je e e e dece ke e e e e ke 1 1 1 WAIT FOR ANOTHER SRQ WHEN THE PLOT IS DONE ON INTR Hpib GOTO Plot done ENABLE INTR Hpib 2 Wait2 GOTO Wait2 1 Plot_done OUTPUT Hp5373a HSR 1 CLEAR OUT HSR TO CLEAN UP ENTER Hp5373a Hsr Temp SPOLL 0Hp5373a 1 CLEAR STATUS BYTE TO CLEAN UP 1 LOCAL Hp5373a RETURN HP 5373A TO FRONT PANEL USE 1 END Program Examples Teach Learn following program demonstrates how to use the SET Programming query and the SET command to save and recall front panel Example setups a technique known as the Teach Learn feature As the name implies Teach Learn is a two step process First the Teach Learn program stores a desired front panel setup ina string variable Later you select a stored string variable the learned s
189. TIL THE INDI CATED CONDITIONS ARE FULLY UNDER Indicates earth ground terminal STOOD AND MET Indicates terminal is connected to chassis when such connection is not apparent CAUTION Alternating current Direct current This denotes a hazard It calls attention to an operating procedure practice or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Safety Information WARNING Any interruption of the protective grounding conductor inside or outside the instrument or disconnecting the protective earth terminal will cause a potential Shock hazard that could result in personal injury Grounding one conductor of a two conductor outlet is not sufficient protection Whenever it is likely that the protection has been impaired the instrument must be made inoperative and be secured against any unintended operation If this instrument is to be energized via an autotransformer for voltage reduc tion make sure the common terminal is connected to the earthed pole terminal neutral of the power source Instructions for adjustments while covers are removed and for servicing are for use by service trained personnel only To avoid dangerous electric shock do not perform such adjustments or servicing unless qualified to do so For continued protection ag
190. TOD System Clock Time of Day command query WINT Warmup Interval query only WTS Wait to Send command query Command Reference Shortform TOD Time Of Day Longform TODAY The TODay command sets the system time of day The format is TOD hh mm ss where hh is the hour number 0 through 23 mm is the minutes number 0 through 59 and ss is the seconds number 0 through 59 The TODay query returns the current system time in the format hh mm ss Examples OUTPUT 703 TOD 11 20 15 Sets the HP 5373A system clock to 11 20 AM plus 15 seconds OUTPUT 703 TOD Queries for the current setting of the system clock Shortform WINT has Warmup INTerval elapsed Longform WINTERVAL The WINTerval query returns the state of the warmup interval A zero indicates the warmup interval has not elapsed a one indicates the warmup interval has elapsed Example OUTPUT 703 WINT Queries for the state of the warmup interval Shortform WTS Wait To Send Longform WTSEND The WTSend command controls the placement of measurement results into the output buffer When the Wait To Send mode is off and more than one block of measurements is requested only the last block of measurement data is placed in the output buffer When Wait To Send mode is on each block of measurement data is placed in the output buffer the next block is not started until the last block has been sent over the bus In Repetit
191. TTN 0 ps E iF BLOCK HOLDOFF EDGE 15 ON CHANNEL 0 ps i COMMON 0 ps SEPARATE 0 ps COMMON 800 ps X25 400 ps X1 ATTN 0 ps 200 ps IF MEASUREMENT 15 SET TO START ON CHANNEL A 600 ps IF MEASUREMENT IS SET TO STOP ON CHANNEL A 0 ps IF BLOCK HOLDOFF EDGE 5 ON CHANNEL CHB X25 ATTN 400 ps CHA X1 ATTN e D CHA X25 ATTN 400 ps i 200 ps IF MEASUREMENT IS SET TO START ON CHANNEL 600 ps IF MEASUREMENT 15 SET TO STOP ON CHANNEL B 0 ps IF BLOCK HOLDOFF EDGE IS ON EXT ARM 200 ps IF MEASUREMENT IS SET TO START ON EXT ARM FIXED DELAY C CHANNEL 600 ps IF MEASUREMENT IS SET TO STOP ON EXT ARM 0 ps IF MEASUREMENT IS SET TO START ON CHANNEL C 600 ps IF MEASUREMENT 1 SET 7 000 ps TO STOP ON CHANNEL C 0 ps 3 155 5373A Programming Manual 3 156 INTRODUCTION CONVENTIONS COMMAND STRUCTURE AND ELEMENTS 4 PROGRAMMING RULES AND GUIDANCE Programming rules pertain to the command structure syntax mnemonics program flow and other high level concepts that apply to writing code that the HP 5373A can recognize and execute This chapter describes such rules and gives guidance to help you write programs Some HP IB command names are different from the corresponding front panel function names In
192. TTenuation BIAS CATTen HYSTeresis LEVel Relative LEVel SLOPe and TRIGger Shortform ATT ATTenuation Longform ATTENUATION The ATTenuation command sets the attenuation value for input channels A or B Channel A or B can be individually set to one of two values X1 for 0 dB attenuation or X2 for 8 dB attenuation At 8 dB attenuation an input signal can have an amplitude 2 5 times the normal operating range Note that attenuation may not be selectable depending on the currently installed input pod The ATTenuation query returns the value of the current attenuation setting Parameters X2 Examples OUTPUT 703 INP SOUR A ATT X2 Sets Channel A input attenuation to 8 dB OUTPUT 703 INP SOUR A ATT Queries for the current attenuation setting of Channel A BIAS Termination Bias command query HYST Input Hysteresis command query Command Reference Shortform BIAS termination BIAS Longform BIAS The BIAS command sets the termination bias voltage for the 50Q impedance provided by the standard HP 54002A input pod Either ECL ECL or ground GROund or GND may be selected Selecting ECL sets the bias voltage to 2 V to preserve fidelity of ECL input signals Selecting GROund or GND sets the bias voltage to 0 V The BIAS command has no effect for any input channel in which the HP 5373A does not detect an HP 54002A 50Q Input Pod The BIAS command effect when an HP 54002A pod is dete
193. Te command query System System commands descriptions 5 5 SYSTem Menu display RT irene wes Display Meas Mode Response Timeout Response Timeout value Result Format System Clock date System Clock time T TALK os erate ola wa Ne Talk Only Talker Terminators TEST command query diagnostic 5 141 TEST Menu display 5 17 Time Deviation Carrier Frequency field e irate ani ies Test numbers diagnostic TEK LED TODay command query System 5 27 TRIGger command query input 5 112 TVR command query MEASurement 5 102 U command query diagnostic 5 141 Wait to send WTSend command query System ccs serae eee had ie QR 5 27 Warning messages Error 100 No Listeners on bus C 6 Error 101 Talker no listeners C 6 Error 103 Key ignored in Remote C 7 Error 104 Key ignored LLO C 7 Error 130 Only graphs can be plotted 8 Error 131 Plot meas data conflict C8 Error 140 Register protected C 8 Index Error 141 Register not saved yet Error 142 Register out of range HP 537
194. The measurement block size is set by the BLOCk command up to a maximum of 2E 9 blocks The product of the measurement size and the number of blocks can never exceed 1 15 Range Refer to Table 5 7 Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS SSIZ 100 Sets the sample size within each measurement block to 100 OUTPUT 703 MEAS SSIZ Queries for the currently selected sample measurement size Shortform STAR STARt arm sublevel Longform START The STARt command selects the arming mode sublevel for selecting block holdoff conditions for continuous gating measurements or start arming conditions for non continuous gating measurements After STARt is selected four subcommands CHANnel Delay CHannel DELay value and SLOPe can be used to configure various block holdoff or start arming conditions Example OUTPUT 703 MEAS STAR Selects the STARt arm sublevel for setting up block holdoff or start arm conditions The Start Arm Sublevel command has four subcommands CHANnel Delay CHannel DELay value and SLOPe These subcommands are described below 5 99 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 100 CHAN Channel command query DCH Delay Channel command query Shortform CHAN CHANnel Longform CHANNEL The CHANnel command for the start arm sublevel selects the input channel to be the source of the block holdoff or start arming signal CHANnel query returns the currently selected arming source for block
195. The returned value is the maximum positive peak minus maximum negative peak Modulation parameters are calculated when the Marker Display Mode has been set to Modulation Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP PDEV Queries for current Peak Deviation value Shortform SEL SELect graph menu Longform SELECT Use the SELect command to select the graph menu level Five options are available MAIN MARKer ZOOM SCALe DISPlay The SELect query requests current the menu level displayed Parameters MAIN MARKer ZOOM SCALe DISPlay Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP SELZZOOM Selects ZOOM level softkeys OUTPUT 703 GRAP SEL Queries for current Graph menu softkey level 5 63 HP 5373A Programming Manual SGR Show Graph command query SMAR Select Active Marker 5 64 command query SSCR Screen Scroll command Shortform SGR Show GRaph Longform SGRAPH The SGRaph command selects from three types of displays Main graph only m Memory graph only m Main and Memory simultaneously The SGRaph query returns the current graph display selection Parameters MAIN MEM BOTH Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAE SGR MAIN Selects display of Main graph OUTPUT 703 GRAE SGR Queries for current graph display selection Shortform SMAR Select active MARker Longform SMARKER The SMARker command selects the active marker There are two choices BLACk a WHITe The SMAR quer
196. Time Interval results are generated by calculating elapsed time between start and stop time stamps Time Interval corrected stop time stamp start time stamp Expanded Data for Time Interval A gt or Time Interval gt A is Missed Start Channel Events and Missed Stop Channel Events Missed Start Channel Events are defined as start channel trigger events which are are counted between start samples but which are not time stamped The formula is Missed Start Channel Events start event stampj 1 start event stamp 1 Missed Stop Channel Events are defined as stop channel trigger events which are counted between stop samples but which are not time stamped The formula is Missed Stop Channel Events stop event stamp stop event stampj 1 eae es 4 t2 8 5 ts 1 4 95 DUTY CYCLE Figure 10B D Duty Cycle Example Signal Showing Time and Event Stamp Measurement Points t The formula for calculating Duty Cycle is given below In Figure 10B D t and e refer to time stamps and event stamps respectively Time and event stamps must have been corrected for offset and counter rollover as discussed above before performing calculations 3 94 Binary Output gt Duty Cycle tzl T TER AE 100 21 1 21 1 Figure 10 Rise Time Example Signal Showing Time and Event Stamp Measurement Points The formula for calculating Rise
197. Time Overflow Correction value to that datum and all subsequent data then continue the scan An example is provided in Technical Note 3 Time Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Incorporating Interpolator Data The algorithm for producing time stamps from binary time data and binary interpolator data is time stamp time datum 2 ns interpolator datum x 0 1 ns Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between Block Arming Channel and Signal Channel There are several possible signal paths running from input connectors on the HP 5373A front panel to measurement hardware inside the instrument Signal routing depends on the selection of several parameters including Common Input Mode and Attenuation To adjust for this variation subtract a correction value called an offset from the time stamp associated with the first sample in each block Subsequent time stamps require no correction Use Technical Note 4 to determine the correct value of offset for your application For the first sample in each block corrected time stamp time stamp offset 3 54 Generating Final Function Results from Time Stamps and Event Stamps NOTE The Block Start Status Bit is bit 6 of the interpolator status field The Block Start Status bit is 1 for the first sample in a block See Interpolator Status Field Data in the Special Topics section of this chapter for more information CONTINUOUS TIME INTERVAL R
198. Time Stamps and Event Stamps 3 131 Technical Note 1 3 133 Event Overflow Correction Values 3 133 Time Overflow Correction Values 3 133 Technical 2 3 135 Maximum and Maximum 3 135 Technical 3 3 137 Rollover Processing Routines 3 137 Counter Rollover Processing 3 137 Formats 1A 2A aided e esa ek ete 3 137 Formats 1B 2 3 3 139 Format EET ERU INA e EE 3 140 Format2B dene Ex e 3 140 Format Jasso dE RUE re taa Ro REC 3 140 UOCE RO SR E 3 140 Format 4B for Time Interval Measurements 3 141 Format GA sex ke vua E ERE A TERR 3 143 Format esas arx ECCE I RR OUR A ORC 3 143 Format ess e o n 3 143 Format B Seana ek E ee 3 145 Format 10 3 145 Format 10B 3 145 Format 3 145 Formats 11 12 and 13 3 146 Formats 14 and 15 3 148 Tec
199. V 2 1 FORMAT IN 16 BIT WORDS 570 Offset 4 E 10 This offset corrects for differences in the electronic 580 paths lengths between measurement channels 590 Time ovfl 0 600 IF VAL SYSTEM VERSION CLOCK THEN ON CYCLE 1 GOSUB Disp update Do this only if CLOCK binary is loaded 610 GOSUB Disp update 620 1 REDIMENSION ARRAYS TO ALLOW FOR CONVENIENT INDEXING E 15 HP 5373A Programming Manual 630 1 640 Buff 1 Block size 2 1 Format words Time interval 1 Block size Ti me stamp 1 Block size 2 650 1 Store Start and Stop time stamps in the Time stamp array Odd indices 660 1 correspond to Start times while even indices correspond to Stop times 670 Time0 FNGet_4byte_val 1 1 Buff 680 Time0 offset Time0 2 E 9 Buff 1 3 MOD 32 1 10 690 Time stamp 1 0 700 FOR I 2 TO Block size 2 710 Timel FNGet 4byte val I l Buff 720 IF Timel Time0 THEN Time ovfl Time ovfl4Two exp32 730 Time stamp I Timel4Time ovfl 2 E S Buff I 3 MOD 32 1 E 10 TimeO ffset 740 Time0 Timel 750 NEXT I 760 770 OFF CYCLE 780 1Calculate Time Interval measurements 790 DISP Calculating Time Interval Measurements 800 0 810 FOR 1 TO Block_size 2 STEP 2 820 1 830 Time interval J Time stamp N l Offset Time stamp N 840 ITime interval Stop time Channel Offset Start time 850 NEXT N 860 SUBEXIT 870 Disp update DISP Converting binary data DIV 2 of Block size compl eted 880 RETU
200. X axis Marker Range Hold XMRHOLD Use the XMRHold command to copy marker values to Manual Scaling parameters Example OUTPUT 703 GRAE ETIM XMRH marker values to Manual Scaling parameters 5 49 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 50 XMSC X axis Manual Scale command query GDIS Graphic Display command query GRID Grid command query Shortform XMSC X axis Manual Scaling Longform XMSCALE Use the XMSCale command to set the X axis Manual Scaling on or off The XMSCale query returns the current Manual Scaling status Parameter ON OFF Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP ETIM XMSC ON Sets X axis Manual Scaling on OUTPUT 703 GRAP ETIM XMSC Queries for the current Manual Scaling status Shortform GDIS Graphic DISplay Longform GDISPLAY Use the GDISplay command to choose the displayed graph Parameters HISTogram TVARiation ETIMe Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP HIST Selects Histogram as the displayed graph OUTPUT 703 GRAP GDIS Queries for the currently displayed graph Shortform GRID Longform GRID Use the GRID command to turn the Grid display on or off The GRID query returns the currently selected Grid display mode Parameters ON OFF Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAPE GRID ON Turn the Grid display on OUTPUT 703 GRAE GRID Queries for the current status of grid display HCON Histogram Continue command HIST Histogram
201. Y XMRHold 5 gt YARHoid gt MAXimum seporator number org gt YMAXimum gt YMRHold YMSCole separator YMSCale RASTA Figure 5 6 GRAPhic Subsystem HISTogram Sublevel Syntax Diagram XMINimum number_arg 1 OFF i YMAXimum YMINimum gt separator number_org YMINimum YMRHold 4 A YMSCole_ separator YMSCale Md Figure 5 7 GRAPhic Subsystem TVARiation Sublevel Syntax Diagram 5 46 CDAT Connect data on off command query COPY Copy Graph to Memory command Command Reference Shortform CDAT turn Connect DATa on or off Longform CDATA The CDATa command enables or disables data connection on the Time Variation graph When Connect Data is on successive measurement data points within a block are connected The CDATa query returns the currently selected Connect Data Mode Parameters ON OFF Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP CDAT ON Turns the Connect Data feature on OUTPUT 703 GRAP CDAT Queries for current Connect Data status Shortform COPY main graph to memory Longform COPY The COPY command copies the currently displayed Main graph to memory Any applied zooming and scrolling attributes are stored Later you can re
202. Y 3 0 us 400 OUTPUT Hp5373a MEAS SAMP DEL 1 6 1 1 us SAMPLING 410 OUTPUT Hp5373a REST 1 START MEASUREMENT 420 ASSIGN Buff TO BUFFER Data buff 430 DISP Waiting for completion of measurement 440 ENTER Hp5373a USING 8A Header Read Header 450 Tot byte count VAL Header 3 Total number of bytes to be transferred 460 lis represented by the last 6 digits of 470 1Header 480 TRANSFER Hp5373a TO Buff COUNT Tot byte count WAIT 490 OUTPUT Hp5373a 1 IN LOCAL 500 OUTPUT Hp5373a INT OUTP ASCII 1 RETURN TO ASCII OUTPUT MODE 510 DISP 520 SUBEND Transfer data 530 1 540 1 550 SUB Convert bin72 INTEGER Block size Buff BUFFER REAL Ts block arm Time _Stamp Freq 560 Convert bin72 1 Converts binary HP 5373A data to Frequency and Time arrays 570 COM Constants Format bytes Two expl6 Two exp32 580 INTEGER I Format words 590 REAL Time0 Timel EventO Eventl Time ovfl Time0 offset Offset 600 Format words Format bytes DIV 2 FORMAT IN 16 BIT WORDS 610 Offset 6 00E 10 This offset corrects for the difference in 620 electronic path lengths between the block 630 1 arming channel and the measurement channel 640 Time ovfl 0 650 660 REDIMENSION ARRAYS TO ALLOW FOR CONVENIENT INDEXING 670 Buff 0 Block size l l Format words Time stamp 0 Block size Freq 1 Block size 680 l 690 GET THE TIME STAMP OF THE BLOCK ARM AND THE FIRST EVENT AND TIME 700 VALUES THESE ARE A
203. ainst fire replace the line fuse s only with 250V fuse s of the same current rating and type for example normal blow time delay Do not use repaired fuses or short circuited fuseholders When measuring power line signals be extremely careful and always use a step down isolation transformer whose output voltage is compatible with the input measurement capabilities of this product This product s front and rear panels are typically at earth ground so NEVER TRY TO MEASURE AC POWER LINE SIGNALS WITHOUT AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION Chapter 2 HP IB GENERAL INFORMATION Table of Contents Introduction De Ee EY YE RE EN 1 1 Who Should Read This Manual 1 1 First Time Users 1 1 Experienced 1 2 How To Use This Manual 1 2 Related Documentation Overview Writing Programs 7 0 Introduction rrr 2 1 HP IB 2 2 Party Line Structure Explained 2 2 Interface System Major Interface HP 5373A Interface Capabilities Fr
204. al 2 36 Dual Result with Gate Time Data res A gt lt gt res B gate A gt lt gt gate B lt gt res A gt res B gate gt gate B NL END Dual Result with Limit Testing and Gate Time Data res A gt limit A res B limit B gate A gate B res A gt limit A res B limit B lt gt gate A gt gate B NL END Statistics Examples When Statistics mode is enabled and the HP 5373A is displaying the STATISTICS Numeric screen the statistical data is sent instead of the measurement results data Note that when the HP 5373A is displaying the SPLIT Numeric screen which displays results plus four of the statistical values Maximum Mean Minimum and Standard Deviation all eight statistical values are still returned over the bus after the applicable measurement results as shown above have been sent Single Result Statistics mean A gt std dev A gt max A gt min A variance A root variance A gt rms A lt allan variance A lt NL gt END Dual Result Statistics mean A gt sid dev A max A min A gt variance A root variance A gt rms A gt allan variance A gt mean B lt gt sid dev B lt gt max B lt gt min B lt gt
205. al corrected stop time stamp start time stamp Expanded Data for Time Interval measurements is Missed Events Missed Events are trigger events which are counted between measurements but which are not time stamped they are events missed between current stop and next start The formula is Missed Events start event stamp 1 stop event stamp 1 3 83 gt spenon HP 5373A Programming Manual 3 84 Binary Output Format 10A ARMING MODES MEASUREMENT CHANNEL S Automatic Edge Holdoff Interval Sampling Random Sampling Edge Interval Edge Random Repetitive Edge Sampling Time Interval How Signals are Converted to Binary Data Example Time Interval A gt B Automatic MEASUREMENTS BLOCK ARMED Chan Chan B Start Stop Start Stop 7 C OOO oTi ooto ed BINARY DATA Figure 10A A Time Interval Measurement on Channel gt With Automatic Arming Mode Showing Corresponding Binary Output Producing Results Time Interval results are generated by calculating the elapsed time between the start and stop samples EXPANDED DATA Expanded Data for Time Interval A gt and Time Interval gt A measurements is Missed Start Channel Events and Missed Stop Channel Events 3 85 HP 5373A Programming Manual Missed Start Ch
206. al Topics gives more in depth information on certain points only covered briefly elsewhere to make the material easier to understand on initial reading Where appropriate references to Special Topics are made from both the general information and Binary Format sections of this chapter The Measurement Inhibit feature allows the user to selectively suppress data collection by the HP 5373A When Inhibit is asserted during measurements measurement activity stops and restarts only when Inhibit is de asserted Arming Inhibit does not interfere with arming or capture of block arming data Blocks and samples are armed normally when Inhibit is active Time data generated when a block is armed will still be collected even if a block is armed while Inhibit is asserted Measurement data on the other hand will not be taken when Inhibit is asserted Pre trigger Inhibit does not stop detection of a Pre trigger edge However if the Pre trigger edge is to be followed by measurements no measurements will be made until Inhibit is de asserted Inhibit will prevent detection of Pre trigger if the HP 5373 is set to Pre trigger on a specified Time Interval Inhibit prevents the 5373A from monitoring the data stream for the Pre trigger criteria The Pre trigger function will return to normal when Inhibit is de asserted Measurements Requiring More Than One Sample Assertion of the Inhibit function will not cause incomplete two sample measurements
207. al information This appendix contains a complete list of all messages in alphabetical order The messages have a priority order from the lowest to the highest priority they are Static Status Messages Momentary Status Messages a Momentary Warning Messages Static Error Messages m Static Failure Messages These messages are acknowledged in different ways depending on whether the instrument can continue operating and making measurements Some messages are only warnings and normal operation can continue without user response Others are intended to notify the user that operation has been suspended until the error condition is acknowledged and or corrected Displayed messages are replaced with ones of higher priority For example a Static Error Message will overwrite a Momentary Warning Message If another message occurs with the same priority as the current message overwriting occurs only if both are Status or if both are Momentary messages Otherwise the second message will be ignored These are information messages to inform you of the condition of the instrument Static Status Messages are cleared when the condition in the instrument changes or when the RESTART key is pressed HP 5373A Programming Manual MOMENTARY STATUS MESSAGES MOMENTARY WARNING MESSAGES STATIC ERROR MESSAGES STATIC FAILURE MESSAGES ERROR QUEUE QUERY COMMAND These are information messages to alert you to a particular conditi
208. amped The formula is Missed Events events elapsed on the stop channel between successive stops 1 Measurement results for Duty Cycle Rise Time Fall Time Pulse Width Pulse Offtime and Phase are captured when the data generated by these measurements is combined with the appropriate algorithms For each measurement a diagram and an algorithm is given in the section of this format 10B entitled Generating Final Function Results 3 90 Binary Output Binary Data Output Ea Ea Ez x 2 bs Normat Mode NES Fast Mode Bils 39 Figure 10B B Format 10B Binary Output Format 10B binary output is shown in Figure 10B B above Each measurement consists of two samples start and stop Measurements in this format require you to determine which input channel generates the start data and which channel generates the stop data See Technical Note 4 for information on how to determine the correct start and stop channels Note that the binary output stream will always deliver the start channel datum first followed by the stop channel datum even if the start sample was collected after the stop sample Each pair of samples each measurement generates the set of binary data described below UNUSED FIELD START CHANNEL EVENT binary event count on the start channel For example Channel events for Time Interval A measurement TIME start sample time of occurrence INT interpolator data provided to incr
209. ampling mode Refer to the Operating Manual for an explanation of the limits When FAST is selected the amount of data output when in BINary output mode is reduced Using binary output is explained in Chapter 3 Binary Output in the Special Topics section The benefit of using FAST is that data transfer times are reduced compared with NORMal Select BINary output mode using the OUTPut command 5 17 HP 5373A Programming Manual ODATa Output Measurement 5 18 Data Results query only The MMODe query returns the current Measurement mode NOTE The Totalize function always uses NORMal sampling mode However if the MMODe state is FAST when Totalize is selected the MMODe state is not forced to NORMal This way you do not have to remember to re program the MMODe state when the function is later changed to something other than Totalize If MMODe is queried MMODe when the function is Totalize the response is UNAV unavailable This response is an indication that the actual state of MMODe is not meaningful for the Totalize function Parameters FAST NORMal Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS MMOD FAST Sets the measurement mode to FAST OUTPUT 703 MEAS MMOD Queries for the currently selected measurement mode Shortform ODATa Output measurement DATa result Longform ODATa The ODATa query requests measurement data output The type of data you receive is dependent upon the selected measure
210. ance the statistical values available low values A low values B the number of values which fell below the low limit pass values A pass values B the number of values which fell between the low and high limits or if the limits are reversed the number of values outside the low and high limits high values A high values B the number of values which fell above the high limit inside values A inside vaues B the number of values which fell inside the reversed limits HP IB General Information lt NA values A NA values B gt the number of values for which limit testing was not applicable These included time stamps inter block data data extended by Inhibit and invalid data Single Result with Limit Testing lt header gt lt res A gt lt limit A gt res A limit A gt END Single Result with Gate Time Data header res A gate A gt res A gt gate gt END Single Result with Limit Testing and Gate Time Data lt header gt lt res A gt limit A gate A gt res A limit A gate A gt END Dual Result with Limit Testing header res A limit A res B limit B res A limit A res B limit B gt END Dual Result with Gate Time Data header res A res B gate A gate B res gt res B gate A gate B END Dual Result with Limit Testing and Gate Time Data header res A lim
211. annel Events are defined as start channel trigger events which are counted between start samples but which are not time stamped See Glossary for more details The Formula is Missed Events events on the start channel between successive starts 1 Missed Stop Channel Events are defined as stop channel trigger events which are counted between stop samples but which are not time stamped See Glossary for more details The formula is Missed Events events on the stop channel between successive stops 1 Binary Data Output Er EO E Normat Bits 45 Eg Fast Mode Bits 16 16 x 16 el Figure 10A B Format 10A Binary Output Format 10A binary output is shown in Figure 10A B Each measurement consists of two samples start and stop Input channels associated with start and stop data must be identified See Technical Note 4 for information on how to determine the correct start and stop channels Each pair of samples each measurement generates the binary data defined below UNUSED FIELD START CHANNEL EVENT binary event count on the start channel For example Channel B events for Time Interval B gt A measurement TIME start sample time of occurrence INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit STOP CHANNEL EVENT binary event count on the stop channel For example Channel A events for Time Interval gt A measurement UNUS
212. appropriate Time Overflow Correction to the start datum Make the same correction to all subsequent data both start and stop Following the corrections continue subtracting start data from stop data to detect further rollovers If a subtraction produces a number smaller than Maximum leave the start datum uncorrected and add the appropriate Time Overflow Correction to the stop datum Make the same correction to all subsequent data both start and stop Following the corrections resume the scan at the next start datum Time Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Values for Maximum and Maximum are given in Technical Note 2 Correcting for Rollovers Between Measurements Once the first scan is complete a second scanning routine detects and corrects for counter rollovers which occur between measurements start stop pairs The first scan leaves the time data in this condition the smallest time value in each pair should be greater than the largest time value in the immediately preceding pair unless a counter rollover has occurred between pairs The second scan identifies the smaller time value in each pair called true start then identifies the larger time value in the preceding pair that pair s true stop If true stop is greater than true start a counter rollover has occurred between pairs The appropriate Time Overflow Correction should be added to all data subsequent to true stop Following the corrections r
213. are Status Register OUTPUT 703 HSE Queries for the contents of the Hardware Status Enable register Shortform HSR Hardware Status Register Longform HSR The HSR query returns the contents of the Hardware Status Register The value returned is an integer NR1 format that is the decimal equivalent of the binary weighted values of the register bits For example a value of 80 indicates that bit 4 Time Base Error and bit 6 Power On Failure are set to 1 Upon reading the Hardware Status Register all bits in the register are cleared set to 0 Example OUTPUT 703 HSR Queries for the contents of the Hardware Status Register and clears the register IDN Instrument Identification query only OPC Operation Complete command query OPT Installed Options query only Command Reference Shortform IDN instrument IDeNtification Longform DN The IDN query returns a string containing the model number and firmware revision code in the form Hewlett Packard 5373A 0 xxxx where xxxx is the datecode of the installed firmware revision Example OUTPUT 703 IDN Queries for the instrument model number and firmware revision code Shortform OPC OPeration Complete Longform OPC The OPC command causes the instrument to generate the Operation Complete message OPC bit 0 in the Event Status Register when all pending selected device operations have been finished
214. art sample with the stop sample which immediately preceded it Time counters are not reset therefore time data will be continuous except for counter rollovers Channel C Correction When making measurements on Channel C the event counter sees only every fourth input event To correct for this multiply event data by four This must be done after correcting for counter rollovers 3 69 AP zoom e gt HP 5373A Programming Manual PRODUCING VALID TIME STAMPS Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers 9 Binary time data increases monotonically unless counter rollover has occurred An overflow processing routine must scan the time data for any datum smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Time SA Overflow Correction value to that datum and all subsequent data then continue with the scan An example routine is given in Technical Note 3 Time Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Incorporating Interpolator Data The algorithm for producing time stamps from binary time data and binary interpolator data is time stamp time datum x 2 ns interpolator datum x 0 1 ns Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between the Start and Stop Channels There are several possible signal paths running from signal input connectors on the HP 5373A front panel to measurement hardware inside the instrument Signal routing
215. as follows RMT LSN 2 6 Lights to indicate the instrument is under remote control Lights to indicate the instrument is addressed to listen receive commands or is an active listener HP IB ADDRESS SELECTION HP IB General Information TLK Lights to indicate the instrument is addressed to talk send data or is an active talker SRQ Lights to indicate the instrument is requesting service from the interface controller To use the HP 5373A in an HP IB system you must set the desired HP IB address The address is used by the controller to identify the HP 5373A The range of permitted addresses is 0 to 30 inclusive The address is saved when the HP 5373A is off or unplugged If the saved address cannot be recalled due to memory or battery failure a default address of 3 is used Set the HP 5373A HP IB address using front panel controls Figure 2 1 Here is the procedure 1 Press front panel SYSTEM key not shown in figure The System menu screen appears 2 Check that Talk Listen appears in Adressing Mode field If not press Talk Listen softkey so that Talk Listen is displayed 3 Press down arrow key not illustrated to move the menu cursor to Device Address field 4 Use Increment Value and Decrement Value softkeys to select the address 2 7 HP 5373A Programming Manual Figure 2 1 System Menu Setting HP IB Address Time Deu A Listen
216. as occurred An overflow processing routine must scan the time data seeking any any datum smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Time Overflow Correction value to that datum and to all subsequent data then continue with the scan An example routine is given in Technical Note 3 Time Overflow Correction values are given given in Technical Note 1 Incorporating Interpolator Data The algorithm for producing time stamps from binary time data and binary interpolator data is time stamp time datum x 2 ns interpolator datum 0 1 ns Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between Start and Stop Channels There are several possible signal paths running from signal input connectors on the HP 5373A front panel to measurement hardware inside the instrument Signal routing depends on the selection of several parameters including Common Input Mode and Attenuation To adjust for this variation add a correction value called an offset to each stop channel time stamp Start channel time stamps require no correction Use Technical Note 4 to determine the correct value of offset for your application For the stop channel time stamp corrected stop time stamp stop time stamp offset Generating Final Function Results From Time Stamps Time Interval results are generated by calculating elapsed time between the start time stamp and stop time stamp Time Interv
217. as the second channel in the source equation for instance B is the second channel in the source equation A gt B Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP ETIM EVT2 Queries for the current event count of the second channel Shortform XARH X axis Auto Range Hold Longform XARHOLD Use the XARHold command to copy the current X axis values to the Manual Scaling parameters XMAX Set X axis Maximum command query XMIN Set X axis Minimum command query XMRH X axis Marker Range Hold command Example Shortform Longform Command Reference OUTPUT 703 GRAP ETIM XARH Copies current X axis values to the Manual Scaling parameters XMAX X axis MAXimum value XMAXIMUM Use the XMAXimum command to set the X axis maximum value The XMAXimum query returns the X axis maximum value Range Examples Shortform Longform 0 to 1E 8 seconds OUTPUT 703 2 0 Sets the X axis maximum value to 2 0 seconds OUTPUT 703 GRAP ETIM XMAX Queries for the current X axis maximum value XMIN X axis MINimum value XMINIMUM Use the XMINimum command to set the X axis minimum value The XMINimum query returns the X axis minimum value Range Examples Shortform Longform 0 to 1E 8 seconds OUTPUT 703 GRAP ETIM XMIN 0 Sets the minimum X axis value to 0 0 seconds OUTPUT 703 GRAP ETIM XMIN Queries for the current X axis minimum value XMRH
218. as_b I 790 PRINT TAB 7 CHANNELS A AND GATE TIMES Gate a I Gate b I 800 810 820 1 830 End of program 840 END E 27 HP 5373A Programming Manual FLOATING POINT NOTE DATA OUTPUT EXAMPLES Install an HP 54002A 50Q Input Pod as the HP 5373A CHANNEL A Input This program demonstrates the same three result formats as the ASCII program but the measurement type is time interval instead of frequency The three result formats are m Measurement results for Channel A to Channel B measurement W Measurement results limit test and statistics for a Channel A to Channel B measurement m Measurement results and event data for a Channel A to Channel B measurement The arrays for holding the data from the HP 5373A are dimensioned at the beginning of the program Example Program IThis program demonstrates several format combinations for FLOATING POINT 1data output on the HP 5373A data taken in this program uses Time Interval measurements and needs input sources for both Channels A and B 1 program covers 3 examples 1 1 Measurement results only 1 2 Measurement and limit test results with statistical results 3 Measurement and gate data results for both channels OPTION BASE 1 IDIMENSION ARRAYS WHICH WILL BE READING DATA FROM THE HP 5373A DIM Meas a 1000 IMEASUREMENT DATA DIM Meas b 1000 DIM Event a 1000 IGATE DATA DIM Event b 1000 DIM Limit a 1000
219. ast Mode Bils 16 16 16 MEDO2 NOM Figure 2A B Format 2A Binary Output Format 2A binary output is shown in Figure 2A B above Each sample generates the binary data defined below EVENT binary event count TIME time of occurrence for each sample INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit 3 40 Binary Output Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps G08 008 OO8 Figure 2A C Format 2A Binary Output The binary data stream shown above was derived from the signal shown in Figure 2A A To produce valid event stamps your program must 1 Correct the binary event data for counter rollovers 2 If the measurement was made on Channel C multiply the event stamp data by four To produce valid time stamps your program must 1 Correct the binary time data for counter rollovers 2 Incorporate interpolator data PRODUCING VALID EVENT STAMPS Correcting Event Data for Counter Rollovers Successive event counts increase monotonically unless a counter overflow has occurred An overflow processing routine must scan the event data for any datum which is smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Event Overflow Correction value to that datum and all subsequent data then continue with the scan An example is given in Technical Note 3 Event Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1
220. ata Output ET ART Eg Ea TE FAATAA 32 16 9 Normal Mode Bits Fast Mode Bils Figure 10 Format 10C Binary Output Format 10C binary output is shown in Figure 10C B above Each measurement consists of two samples start and stop Input channels associated with start and stop data must be identified See Technical Note 4 for information on how to determine the correct start and stop channels Each pair of samples generates the binary data defined below UNUSED FIELD START CHANNEL EVENT binary event count on the start channel Example Channel B events for Frequency B and C measurement TIME start sample time of occurrence INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit 3 100 Binary Output STOP CHANNEL EVENT binary event count on the stop channel Example Channel C events for Frequency B and C measurement UNUSED FIELD TIME stop sample time of occurrence INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps pT Je Figure 10 Format 10C Binary Output The binary data stream shown above was derived from the signals shown in Figure 10C A To produce valid event stamps your program must 1 Correct the binary start channel data for event counter rollovers 2 Correct the binary stop channel data for e
221. ata pts Freq Seconds 1770 COM Measurements INTEGER Block size Num meas REAL Samp time Time out 1780 MAT Freq Data pts 1 1Get Freq data from Buff 1790 MAT Seconds Data pts 2 Get Seconds data from Buff 1800 Freq 1 Num meas Seconds 1 Num meas 1810 SUBEND Sort data The subprogram Sort data sorts the data from the buffer into two arrays Freq and Seconds This makes it easier to examine and plot the data BASIC 5 0 is required for this subprogram If you have an earlier version of HP BASIC use a FOR NEXT loop to separate the data The subprogram Plot it creates and labels a graph and then plots all the available points E 5 HP 5373A Programming Manual STATUS BYTE HP 5373A Status Register Programming Example The program listed on the following pages demonstrates how to use the Hardware Status Register to effectively control the interactions between the HP 5373A and a computer Although only the Hardware Status Register is shown the same techniques apply to the Event Status Register The HP 5373A has a Limit Testing feature that indicates when a measurement falls outside of user defined test limits The Hardware Status Register can be used to enable SRQ and alert the computer that a measurement is out of limits Refer to chapter 2 for a description of the Hardware and Event Status registers To use this program do the following 1 Install an an HP 54002A 50 Input
222. ath data The basic time stamp is computed by correcting the time data for any counter rollovers multiplying the corrected time data by 2 ns then subtracting the interpolator data Interpolator data gives the time stamp a resolution of 200 ps Final corrections are made to a time stamp if required for differences in internal signal path length The process for computing time stamps is described in detail in the Binary Formats section of this chapter As a verb time stamp means that a given arming signal followed by an event or an arming signal alone has caused corresponding time and interpolator data to be generated For example when we say an event has been time stamped it means that the time of occurrence of that event has been captured with both time and interpolator data This feature which makes Block Averaging possible enables the Binary Output to produce time and interpolator data corresponding to the precise time at which a block was armed This feature is automatically enabled under several arming conditions when making PRF Frequency PRI Period Continuous Time Interval Phase Deviation Time Deviation and Frequency Deviation measurements See Block Averaging in Function Menu chapter of the HP 5373A Operating manual for more details A trigger event occurs when an input signal meets the slope and voltage criteria set on the Input menu Trigger events are accumulated in the event counter 3 25 HP 5373A Programm
223. ator data 3 Correct for differences in electrical path length between the block arming channel and the signal channel 3 53 zm Oom HP 5373A Programming Manual PRODUCING VALID EVENT STAMPS Correcting Event Data for Counter Rollovers With the exception of the first sample in each block successive valid event counts increase rnonotonically An overflow processing routine must scan the event data for any datum which is both valid not associated with the first sample in the block and is smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Event Overflow Correction value to that datum and to all subsequent data then continue with the scan An example is given in Technical Note 3 Event Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Channel C Correction When making measurements on Channel C the event counter sees only one out of every four input events To correct for this multiply event data by four This must be done after correcting for counter rollovers PRODUCING VALID TIME STAMPS Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers Binary time data increases monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred The first sample in each block is not an exception to this rule An overflow processing routine must scan the time data for any datum smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate
224. atus LLIM Lower Limit command query MATH Math Modifiers command query Command Reference Shortform LLIM Lower LIMit Longform LLIMIT The LLIMit command sets the lower limit for limit testing of the processed results LLIMit values are set for each channel separately Positive Range 1E 34 lt n lt 1E 34 0 Negative Range 1E 34 lt n lt 1 34 Resolution 1E 34 The LLIMit query returns the value of the current Lower Limit The value is returned in exponential form NR3 format Examples OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR A LLIM 1E 9 Sets the Lower Limit value to 1 10 9 for limit testing of Channel A results OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR B LLIM Queries for the current Lower Limit value for Channel B Shortform MATH MATH modifiers Longform MATH The MATH command turns on math options for modifying the measurement results The HP 5373A normally calculates measurement results in fundamental units of Seconds Hertz Volts percent and degrees Selecting MATH provides the option of using offset normalize and scaling functions to modify the results To enable the Math modifiers send ON to disable them send OFF Math modifiers are enabled and disabled separately for each channel Math modifier values are also set separately for each channel The three functions Offset Normalize and Scale are applied together with the reference set by the SREFerence command as follows Math resu
225. axis values to the Manual Scaling parameters Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP HIST YARH Copy Y axis values to Manual Scaling parameters Shortform YMAX Y axis MAXimum value Longform YMAXIMUM Use the YMAXimum command to set the Histogram Y axis maximum value The YMAXimum query returns the current Y axis maximum value Range 5 to 1E 12 Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP HIST YMA X 1000 Sets Y axis maximum value to 1000 OUTPUT 703 GRAPE HIST YMA X Queries for the current Y axis maximum value Shortform YMRH Y axis Marker Range Hold Longform YMRHOLD Use the YMRHold command to copy marker values to Manual Scaling parameters Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP HIST YMRH Copy markers Shortform YMSC Y axis Manual SCaling Longform YMSCALE Use YMSCale to turn the Y axis Manual Scaling on or off The YMSCale query returns the current Y axis Manual Scaling status Parameters ON OFF 5 53 HP 5373A Programming Manual HMAX Histogram Maximum Value query only HME Histogram Mean Value query only HMIN Histogram Minimum Value query only HPA Histogram Pause command 5 54 Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP HIST YMSC ON Sets Y axis Manual Scaling on OUTPUT 703 GRAP HIST YMSC Queries for the current Y axis Manual Scaling status Shortform HMAX Histogram MAXimum value Longform HMAXIMUM Use HMAXimum to query the current setting of the Histogram maximu
226. ay be connected in virtually any configuration desired There must of course be a path from the controller to every device operating on the bus 5373A Programming Manual CAUTION CONTROLLER AVOID stacking more than three or four cables on any one connector Multiple connectors produce leverage that can damage a connector mounting Using a screwdriver can damage the threads inside the head of the lockscrew Instead of using a screwdriver finger tighten connector lockscrews so they cannot come loose during operation PRINTER OR PLOTTER OPTIONAL HP5373A TSRP X3M Model Number Cable Length 10833A 1 metre 3 3 ft 10833B 2 metres 6 6 ft 10833C 4 metres 132 ft 10833D 0 5 metres 1 6 ft Figure A 1 Interconnection Data 1 of 2 HP IB Interconnection LINE 0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0106 DIO7 DIO8 EOI REN DAV NRFD NDAC IFC SRQ 11 ATN 12 SHIELD CHASSIS GROUND 18 P O TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 6 19 P O TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 7 THESE PINS 20 P O TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 8 ARE 21 P O TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 9 INTERNALLY 22 P O TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 10 GROUNDED 23 P O TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 11 24 ISOLATED DIGITAL GROUND CAUTION SHORT MOUNT ING The 5373A contains metric threaded cable mounting studs LOCKSCREW D STUD as opposed to Englis
227. ber 16 bit number in Fast mode Event data must be corrected for counter rollovers by the user A computed value based on event data To compute an event stamp event data is first checked for counter rollover and a correction applied if counter rollover is detected The corrected event data is called an event stamp Expanded Data has two meanings First it is an operating mode for the HP 5373A Expanded Data mode tells the Binary output to include all available data from a measurement in its output For example when the HP 5373A makes a Time Interval measurement and it is NOT in the Expanded Data mode only the time data required to compute Time Interval results is available at the binary output and the data is output at a much higher rate When making the same measurement in Expanded Data mode the binary output also includes event data Event data is used to compute the Expanded Data Missed Events This leads to the second meaning of Expanded Data the set of extra results which can be calculated in the Expanded Data mode In the example Expanded Data for Time Interval measurements is Missed Events Missed Events can be computed from the extra event data which is available in the Expanded Data mode The format description for your measurement will tell you the contents of the Expanded Data mode output and the required algorithm for computing the Expanded Data results When enabled the Inhibit function allows you to start or s
228. c Bi Front Panel Subsystem Commands menu names ARSUBSNS Figure 4 4 Top Level Command Syntax Diagram 4 17 5373A Programming Manual Message Delimiters separators PROCESSING CONSIDERATIONS 4 18 PROGRAMMING TIPS Respective syntax diagrams appear at the beginning of each subsystem group A syntax diagram includes the subcommands and parameters for each command Some syntax diagrams require more than one page If so continuation pages are provided as needed Sublevels are diagrammed separately if there are more than a few sublevel commands The use of delimiters in a program message is governed by the following rules Separate multiple arguments for a program command using commas lt gt or spaces lt SP gt m Delimit program commands with a semicolon lt gt Use a new line NL carriage return line feed lt CR LF gt or EOI End Or Identify signal as the EOS message Terminate each program message either by a lt NL gt lt CR LF gt or by asserting the EOI signal with the last byte in the message One or more carriage returns lt CR gt immediately preceding a new line lt NL gt character are ignored by the instrument A good way to understand how to appropriately use separators is to study example programs Appendix E in this manual lists several example programs written in HP BASIC Program commands that comprise a data message string are not executed until the entire s
229. cable format contains information on how to calculate Missed Events Usually an event datum with its corresponding time datum Samples are the building blocks from which measurement data PRF Frequency PRI Period Time Interval etc is constructed In certain cases samples will not have an associated event datum This occurs in some Time Interval measurements or when a block is armed All exceptions are covered in the Binary Formats section of this chapter The sample which results from a trigger event caused by an input start signal after the HP 5373A is armed The sample which results from a trigger event caused by an input stop signal after the HP 5373A is armed Time Data Time Stamp Time Stamp the Block Arm Trigger Event Binary Output Data generated from the time counters in the HP 5373A The time counters continuously accumulate counts from the 500 MHz system clock The accumulated time count for each timed event is sent to the HP IB output as time data an unsigned 32 bit binary number 16 bit number in Fast mode Time data has a resolution of 2 ns The expression time stamp can be used as a noun or a verb As noun a time stamp is the precise time of occurrence of each event Each time stamp represents an elapsed time see definition of time data above When using the binary output time stamps are computed external to the HP 5373A The computation uses time data interpolator data and internal signal p
230. ciated With Numeric Entry Status This message occurs when the ENTER key is pressed without having specified a numeric value containing any digits Type Momentary Associated With Numeric Entry Status This message occurs in numeric entry when pressing any non numeric key before pressing ENTER or LAST VALUE Non numeric keys are keys other than 0 to 9 decimal point EXP or BACKSPACE Type Momentary Associated With Print Plot Status Graph keys This message occurs when an attempt is made to print a screen or plot a graph without first setting the HP 5373A to Talk Only mode on the System menu screen Type Momentary Associated With Numeric Entry Status This mesage occurs when an attempt is made to change an enterable parameter to a negative value and that parameter is only allowed to be positive Examples are Measurement Size or Arming on event or time values Type Momentary Associated With Numeric Entry Status This message occurs when the LAST VALUE key is pressed The parameter that was being entered is restored to its previous value Type Momentary Associated With Parameter Conflict Status This message occurs when a parameter value is entered which cnflicts with the limitations of Fast Measurement mode However the parameter value may be within the valid range for Normal Measurement mode Measurement mode is selectable on the System menu Plot Print aborted Pre trigger precedes data Resp
231. cifies the number of measurements The maximum number of Frequency measurements using Time Interval arming is 8000 l Two expl6 2 16 1 SET UP CONSTANTS Two exp32 2 32 Format bytes 14 This measurement uses Format 3 The output is therefore represented as E 18 Program Examples 180 1 EVENTS 4 BYTES NONUSABLE 4 BYTES TIME 4 BYTES INTERP 2 BYTES 190 1 200 Transfer data Block size Buff 210 Convert bin72 Block size Buff Ts block arm Time stamp Freq 220 Disp data Block size Ts block arm Time stamp Freq 230 END 240 SUB Transfer data INTEGER Block size Data buff BUFFER 250 Transfer data Sets up and transfers a block of data from the HP 5373 260 DISP Setting up measurement 270 Format bytes 14 1Because this measurement uses Format 3 14 bytes 280 lare tranferred for each set of Time Event and 290 1IInterpolator data 300 ASSIGN Hp5373a TO 703 1HP 5373A s ADDRESS 310 OUTPUT 8Hp5373a PRES 1 PRESET 320 OUTPUT Hp5373a MEN INF 1 STATE MENU 330 OUTPUT 8Hp5373a SMODE SING 1 SINGLE MEASUREMENT MODE 340 OUTPUT 8Hp5373a INT OUTP BIN BINARY OUTPUT 350 OUTPUT 8Hp5373a MEAS FUNC FREQ MEASURE FREQUENCY 360 OUTPUT Hp5373a MSIZE amp VAL Block size I MEASUREMENT SIZE 10 370 OUTPUT Hp5373a MEAS ARM TINT 1 TIME INTERVAL ARMING 380 OUTPUT Hp5373a MEAS STAR SLOP NEG CHAN A DEL 3E 6 390 1 BLOCK HOLDOFF AFTER NEGATIVE EDGE OF CHANNEL A THEN DELA
232. command OUTPUT 703 4 Shortform REST RESTart measurement Longform RESTART The RESTart command performs the same function as the front panel RESTART key When received this command restarts the measurement process and clears cumulative results and error messages the error queue is cleared The RESTart command will not clear the key queue and will have no effect on a previously entered data value Example OUTPUT 703 REST Tells the HP 5373A to restart a measurement 5 23 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 24 SET Instrument Setup command query Shortform SET instrument SETup Longform SETUP The SETup command and SETup query are used to send and receive a learn string from the instrument The SETup query returns a learn string containing the instrument setup in block data format to the controller the returned sequence of bytes must be saved in an array The returned string uses the same format as required by the SETup command thus no modifications need be made to the string between the time it is received after the SETup query and the time it is sent back to the instrument using the SETup command Sending the learn string to the instrument with the SETup command is similar to recalling an instrument setup using the RCL command Note that the SETup and SETup commands should only be used by experienced programmers The SAV and RCL commands are easier to use for saving and recalling instrument
233. command query Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP HIST XARH Copies current X axis values to the Manual Scaling parameters Shortform XMIN X axis MINimum value Longform XMINIMUM Use the XMINimum command to set the Histogram X axis minimum value The XMINimum query returns the current X axis minimum value Positive Range 1E 12 to 1E 24 and 0 Negative Range E24 to 1E 12 Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP HIST XMIN 1E46 Sets the X axis minimum value to 1E 6 OUTPUT 703 GRAP HIST XMIN Queries for the current X axis minimum value Shortform XMRH X axis Marker Range Hold Longform XMRHOLD The XMRHold command presets XMINimum and XMAXimum to the vertical marker values Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP HIST XMRH Copies marker values to Manual Scaling parameters Shortform XMSC X axis Manual SCale Longform XMSCALE Use the XMSCale command to turn X axis Manual Scaling on or off The XMSCale query requests the current X axis Manual Scaling status Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP HIST XMSC ON Sets Manual Scaling on OUTPUT 703 GRAP HIST XMSC Queries for the current X axis Manual Scaling status YARH Y axis Auto Range Hold command YMAX Y axis Maximum Value command query YMRH Y axis Marker Range Hold command YMSC Y axis Manual Scaling command query Command Reference Shortform Longform YARH Y axis Auto Range Hold YARHOLD Use YARHold to copy the current Y
234. commands Provides access to selected diagnostic tests Five subsystems have commands that in turn have sublevel commands GRAPhic INPut ISTate MEASurement FUNCTION PRE TRIGGER PROCess MATH Sublevel commands relate to respective subsystem functions The subsystem sublevel commands can have modifiers in the same way that system level commands can take arguments HP 5373A Programming Manual NAVIGATING THE HIERARCHY The Active Subsystem or Sublevel Scheme What Happens When You Issue a System 4 10 Command For example the Time Variation sublevel has an XMAXimum sublevel command that controls the graph X axis An example command string to set this value looks like this OUTPUT 703 TVAR XMAX 2 0 To select a subsystem command you first issue a subsystem selector which is simply the functional name of the subsystem group for instance MEASurement Then you can issue an applicable subsystem command You can also choose a subsystem sublevel command in the same program line For example OUTPUT 703 MEAS FUNC FREQ SOUR A Once a given subsystem or sublevel is selected that level remains active until your program designates another subsystem or sublevel This active subsystem scheme makes an efficient command structure because you can continue to issue commands in an active subsystem or sublevel without reiterating a subsystem or sublevel call A drawback is that some name duplication
235. configuration for your measurements The selections allowed depend on the type of measurement For example The A B combination only applies to Frequency Period and Totalize measurements Refer to Appendix D Arming Modes for a table that lists all the possible combinations of measurements and input configurations The SOURce query returns the currently selected measurement source channel NOTE A B is equivalent to A amp B A B is equivalent to A rel B B A is equivalent to B rel A A gt B is equivalent to A B gt is equivalent to Parameters Possible input channel combinations are given in the arming mode table in appendix D Arming Modes Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS SOUR A gt B Selects Channel A B input configuration for making a Time Interval or plus or minus Time Interval measurement SSIZ Sample Size command query STAR Start Arm Sublevel command Command Reference OUTPUT 703 MEAS SOUR Queries for the currently selected measurement source channel Shortform SSIZ Sample SIZe Longform SSIZE The SSIZe command performs the same function as the MSIZe command In other words the SSIZe command sets the number of measurements taken within each measurement block The maximum sample size is dependent on the selected function the selected measurement source or sources as the case may be and the arming mode Refer to Table 5 7 and Appendix D Arming Modes
236. corresponds to the type of data displayed on the screen The parameters are BOLD LIMit NUMeric OFF SPLit STATistics Selects a bold font for displaying measurement results in larger easier to read characters Displays results for limit testing measurements Displays measurement results Turns off the numeric result display and goes to the DISPLAY BLANK screen Send a MENU command such as MENU NUM to re display the screen Displays numeric results and statistical results Maximum Mean Minimum and Standard Deviation only on the screen simultaneously Displays all eight statistical results on the screen Allan Variance Maximum Mean Minimum Root Allan Variance Root Mean Square Standard Deviation and Variance The DISPlay query returns the currently selected display type Parameter Examples 1BOLD OFF LIMit NUMeric SPLit STATistics OUTPUT 703 NUM DISP BOLD Tells the HP 5373A to display measurement results in large character format OUTPUT 703 NUM DISP Queries for the currently selected display type EXP Expand data command query SCR Scroll Results command Command Reference Shortform EXP EXPand data Longform EXPAND The EXPand command causes the HP 5373A to display expanded results data on the screen for each measurement taken The expanded data is either Gate Time or Missed Events depending on the type of measurement being performe
237. cted is described in the paragraph above When an HP 53702A Envelope Detector Pod is detected the HP 5373A automatically sets the bias level to AC When any input pod other than those described above is installed the HP 5373A sets the bias level to OV or GND The BIAS query returns the value of the current termination voltage ECL for 2 V GRO for 0 V or AC when the HP 53702 pod is detected Parameters ECL GND GROund AC NOTE AC is listed here only because it is a possible response for the BIAS query It is not recognized when entered as a parameter value for the BIAS command Examples OUTPUT 703 INP SOUR A BIAS ECL Sets termination voltage to 2 V OUTPUT 703 INP SOUR A BIAS Queries the HP 5373A for the current termination voltage of Channel A Shortform HYST input HYSTeresis Longform HYSTERESIS The HYSTeresis command sets the input hysteresis for Channels A or B to the MAXimum or MINimum hysteresis value 5 109 5373A Programming Manual 5 110 LEV Trigger Level command query The HYSTeresis query returns the value of the input hysteresis setting Parameters Examples Shortform Longform MINimum MAXimum OUTPUT 703 INP SOUR A HYST MIN Sets the input channel A hysteresis to the minimum level OUTPUT 703 INP SOUR A HYST Queries for the current channel A input hysteresis setting LEV trigger LEVel LEVEL The
238. cts display mode for multiple pass i Measurements Connect on or off View channel for dual channel measurements PRF Frequency PRI Period Totalize A and B B and C or A and C MDOWn number MMAXimum MMINimum MMOVe MDMode lt MARKer or DELTa or STATistics or MODulation MNEXt DATA or PiXel gt SSCRoll LEFT or RIGHt gt ZOOM IN or OUT or FULL OUTLine ON or OFF GRID ON or OFF YSCale LOG or LINear gt UPDate lt WHiLe or AFTer gt CDATa ON or OFF VCHannel A or B or C Programming Rules and Guidance GRAPHIC GRAPhic continued GRAP Histogram graph HIST X axis Manual scaling status Y axis Manual scaling status X axis Auto Range Hold X axis Marker Range Hold Y axis Auto Range Hold Y axis Marker Range Hold X Minimum value Bin Width value Y Maximum value Time Variation graph TVAR X axis Manual scaling status Y exis Manual scaling status X axis Auto Range Hold X axis Marker Range Hold Y axis Auto Range Hold Y axis Marker Range Hold X Minimum value X Maximum value Y Minimum value Y Maximum value Event Timing graph Time X Axis X axis Manual scaling status X axis Auto Range Hold X axis Marker Range Hold X Minimum value X Maximum velue GRAP HIST XMSCale lt ON or OFF gt YMSCale lt ON
239. curs before the instrument has collected enough samples to fill the capture window then all samples collected are delivered as binary data The number collected will be less than enough to generate a full block of results m With Pre trigger ON the user may select between single block of N measurements or a multiple block of N measurements The important distinctions between these two modes are discussed below 3 19 HP 5373A Programming Manual 3 20 SINGLE BLOCK PRE TRIGGERED ACQUISITION MULTIPLE BLOCK PRE TRIGGERED ACQUISITIONS If single block is selected the instrument satisfies the holdoff condition once The corresponding binary output data takes one of two forms 1 The sample which initiated the block of measurements is the first sample in the binary output data If your arming choice produces a timestamp for the block arming edge it will be important to identify this first sample See Key Facts paragraph which follows for more information CAPTURE WINDOW 1 BLOCK OF MEASUREMENTS PRE TRIGGER EVENT HOLDOFF ARMING The sample which initiated the block of measurements is no longer in the capture window The first sample in the binary output data is valid data AFTER the block initiation sample See figure below CAPTURE WINDOW 1 BLOCK OF MEASUREMENTS PRE TRIGGER EVENT HOLDOFF ARMING If Multiple blocks are selected the instrument repeatedly executes the 1 block cycle shown below until t
240. d The EXPand query returns the status of the expanded data format Examples OUTPUT 703 NUM EXP ON Tells the HP 5373A to display gate time or missed events data for each measurement OUTPUT 7037 NUM EXP Queries for status of the expanded data format Shortform SCR SCRoll results Longform SCROLL The SCRoll command scrolls the results on the measurement result screen up or down one measurement at a time Specifying DOWN scrolls the results toward previous measurements while specifying UP scrolls toward later measurements Example OUTPUT 703 NUM SCR DOWN Scrolls the HP 5373A numeric result screen toward previous measurements 5 39 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 40 aa Oe et GRAPHIC SUBSYSTEM COMMANDS Command Reference The GRAPhic subsystem commands control display of measurement results Choose from Event Time ETIM Histogram HIST m Time Variation TVAR Multisheet Figure 5 4 illustrates the graphics subsystem syntax including minor sublevels MEMory and MGRaph Major sublevels that are collapsed in the top level appear on separate syntax diagrams for the following Event Time Figure 5 5 Histogram Figure 5 6 Time Variation Figure 5 7 NOTE For most commands 1 and 0 will be accepted interchangeably for ON and OFF However this is not true for commands of the G
241. d disables the statistical functions of the HP 5373A When enabled all statistical measurements are calculated even if they are not observed on the currently displayed screen The results displayed depend on the currently selected menu screen Any of the eight statistical values may be queried independently of the currently displayed menu screen The values calculated are Mean value Minimum value Maximum value Variance Standard Deviation RMS Root Mean Square Allan Variance Root Allan Variance The Allan Variance and Root Allan Variance are not calculated if the Inhibit function is enabled Statistics mode is enabled separately for each channel The STATistics query returns the current status of Statistics mode Parameters ON OFF Example OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR B STAT ON Enables the Statistics mode OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR B STAT Queries for the Current Channel B Statistics status 5 127 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 128 AVAR Allan Variance query only MAX Maximum query only NOTE For ease of reference all PROCess MATH subsystem query only commands relating to STATistics are grouped together below instead of in the previous alphabetical listing There are eight queries relating to Statistics Allan VARiance MAXimum MEAN MiNimum Root Allan Variance Root Mean SQuare Standard DEViation and VARiance For details of the Statistical formulas used see
242. d information about measured parameters such as PRF Frequency PRI Period Events and so forth Information contained within these messages is represented by one of three data types numeric block m character In general the HP 5373A sends measurement results in numeric or block formats Status information is sent in character format The 5373A offers three measurement result formats ASCII binary or floating point The data format you choose depends upon your particular requirements Output rates and ease of use are two factors to consider Your options are Use processed data ASCII and floating point format from the HP 5373A m Transfer raw time and events data to a controller via the HP IB and perform your own calculations binary Table 2 7 compares measurement output rates for the three data formats For example the Normal Binary output rate for the Continuous Time Interval mode is shown in the table to be 19 500 measurements per second This should be interpreted as over 19 1000 measurement blocks can be transferred in one second to the controller HP IB General Information The values in Table 2 7 are typical values Performance is also affected by other instrumentation on the bus the performance of the external controller and the particular measurement software The following conditions apply The HP 5373 is set to the PRESET condition and then the appropriate measurement function is selected
243. d recalling instrument setup information The REGister query returns the number of the currently specified register Parameters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Examples OUTPUT 703 IST REG 1 Specifies the register to protect OUTPUT 703 IST REG Queries for the currently specified register The Register command has the following sublevel Shortform PROT PROTect register Longform PROTECT The PROTect command selects the protection status for the register specified by the REGister command A protected register cannot be erased with the ERASe command or written to with the SAV command If a protected register is specified Command Reference with the ERASe commands a Register protected error occurs Registers 1 through 9 can be specified for protection Register O is always protected if specified a Register out of range error occurs The PROTect query returns the protection status of the currently specified register Parameters ON OFF Examples OUTPUT 703 IST REG 3 PROT ON Turns on protection for register 3 OUTPUT 703 IST REG 3 PROT Queries for the protection status of Register 3 5 133 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 134 Interface System Command Reference INTERFACE INTerface SYSTEM subsystem controls the output data SYSTEM format the print source for printing or plotting measurement SUBSYSTEM and the setting of measuremen
244. display a stored graph using the SGRaph command You can re display a single stored graph or if you operate in dual display mode you can choose to display both main and memory graphs Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP COPY Copies the current Main display graph to memory 5 47 HP 5373A Programming Manual ETIMe Event Time command 1 Event Count on First Channel query only EVT2 Event Count on Second Channel query only XARH X axis Auto Range Hold 5 48 command Shortform Event TIMe Longform ETIME The ETIMe command selects the Event Time graph sublevel Additional sublevel commands control Event Time graph features An Event Time graph plots measurement start and stop occurrences versus time This graph is only available for Time Interval measurements Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP ETIM XMSC ON Sets Event Time as graph sublevel and sets the X axis Manual Scale mode on Shortform EVenT 1 Longform EVT1 query returns the current event count on the first channel The first channel is defined as the first channel in the source equation for instance A is the first channel in the source equation A gt Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP ETIM EVT1 Queries for the current event count of the first channel Shortform EVT2 EVenT 22 Longform EVT2 The EVT2 query returns the current event count on the second channel The second channel is defined
245. e Continuous Time Interval results are generated by calculating elapsed time between contiguous samples 3 35 E 5373A Programming Manual Binary Data Output A Normat Mode Bits 32 16 Fast Mode Bits 16 16 Figure 1B B Format 1B Binary Output Format 1B binary output is shown in Figure 1B B above Each sample generates the binary data defined below TIME time of occurrence for each sample INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid Status Bits Block Start Inhibit Converting Binary Data to Time Stamps Og Figure 1 Format 1B Binary Output The binary data stream shown above was derived from the signal shown in Figure 1B A To produce valid time stamps your program must 1 Correct the binary time data for counter rollovers 2 Incorporate interpolator data 3 Correct for differences in electrical path length between block arming channel and signal channel PRODUCING VALID TIME STAMPS Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers Binary time data increases monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred The first sample in each block is not an exception to this rule An overflow processing routine must scan the time data for any datum smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Time Overflow Correction value to that datum and all subsequent data then cont
246. e Interval Detect feature Use this command to enable or disable time interval detection In addition to enabling time interval detection this command selects a desired detector configuration The TI Detect feature is not available for all functions and armings When the TI detect feature is unavailable due to a function or arming conflict the DETect state is not forced off This way the intended state does not have to be reprogrammed when the conflict is resolved If DETect is performed when TI Detect is not allowed the response is ABOVe means the detector responds to measurements above a set threshold BELow means the detector responds to measurements below a set threshold INSide means that the detector responds to measurements above one threshold and below another DLOW Detector Lower Threshold command query Command Reference OUTSide means the detector responds to measurements below the lower threshold or above the upper threshold Parameters Example Shortform Longform OFF ABOVe BELow INSide OUTSide OUTPUT 703 MEAS DET OFF Sets the TI Detect mode to off OUTPUT 703 MEAS DET Queries for the current TI Detect mode DLOW Detector LOWer threshold DLOWER The DLOWer command sets the lower detector threshold value This threshold defines the lower boundary condition for the DET INSide and OUTSide cases Range Examples Refer to Tabl
247. e Momentary Associated With Numeric Entry Status This message occurs for one of two reasons an attempt was made to enter an integer parameter using exponent format but the menu field is too small to adequately handle that format not enough space to specify digits plus the E 00 notation or the EXP key was pressed without having entered any digits in the current numeric entry sequence Type Momentary Associated With Numeric Entry Status This message occurs if there is not enough space left in the numeric entry field to show E 00 when the EXP key is pressed In this case the exponent entry mode is valid for the parameter in question but there is not enough space left in the field because too many digits have already been entered HP 5373A Programming Manual Gate open Graphics not allowed for this meas HP 5373A Graphics command no longer used Inhibit usage may distort results Input line truncated C 10 to first 80 chars There must be at least four character spaces available to show E xx in the field The BACKSPACE key may be used to clear enough character spaces to allow exponent entry Type Static Status Associated With Manual Totalize Measurement This message appears while the manually controlled gate is open during a Manually armed Totalize measurement When the gate is closed to complete the measurement the message is erased and the measurement result is displayed Ty
248. e 5 5 below for DMIDdle DUPPer DLOWer OUTPUT 703 MEAS DLOW 4 Sets lower detect threshold to 4 seconds OUTPUT 703 MEAS DLOW Queries for the currently selected lower detector threshold setting Table 5 5 Range Table For DMIDdle DUPPer and DLOWer Commands Other functions DMID DLOW HPMT PMT supporting TI Detect DUPP Measurement Mode Measurement Mode Normal Fast Minimum m sec 0 sec Maximum DMID Shortform DMID Detector MIDdle threshold Detector Middle lLongform DMIDDLE Threshold 3 command query The DMIDdle command sets the middle detector threshold value This threshold defines the boundary condition for DET ABOVe or DET BELow 5 81 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 82 DUPP Detector Upper Threshold command query FUNC Function command query Range Refer to Table 5 5 for DMIDdle DUPPer DLOWer Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS DMID 0 Sets middle detector threshold value to zero seconds OUTPUT 703 MEAS DMID Queries for the currently selected middle detector threshold setting Shortform DUPP Detector UPPer threshold Longform DUPPER The DUPPer command sets the upper detector threshold value This threshold defines the upper boundary condition for the DET INSide and DET OUTSide cases Range Refer to Table 5 5 for DMIDdle DUPPer DLOWer Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS DUPP 4 Sets u
249. e Frequency OUTPUT 8Hp5373a MSIZE amp VAL Block size OUTPUT Hp5373a ARM ISAM 1 Interval Sampling OUTPUT 8Hp5373a SAMP DEL amp VAL Samp time Set sample interval OUTPUT Hp5373a NUM EXP ON 1 Send over gate time with frequency OUTPUT Hp5373a RESTART 1 Start measurement 1 1 1 ON KEY 8 LABEL ABORT 15 GOTO Timed_out User initiated abort DISP Waiting for completion of measurement ON INTR 7 GOTO Get data iset up interrupt to enable transfer of data ENABLE INTR 7 2 ON DELAY Time out GOTO Timed out 1Timeout if data goes away LOOP 1Loop here until measurement is END LOOP tcompleted or aborted 1 1 Timed_out Timeout or user aborted measurement Branch here if measurement is aborted land then continue with the transfer process OUTPUT 5373 ABORT iAbort the HP 5373A measurement 1 1 Get_data 1 Start the transfer process here 1 Branch here if measurement completes normally OFF INTR 7 1Disable interrupt OFF DELAY Disable delay interrupt 1 LOOP EXIT IF BIT SPOLL 8Hp5373a 4 Wait here until HP 5373A processes data END LOOP 1 ENTER 8Hp5373a USING 8A Header Get information about measurement HP 5373A Programming Manual Number bytes VAL Header 3 1Number of bytes to be transferred Used by Buff Num meas Number bytes 16 INumber of measurements Used by Data pts REDIM Data pts 1 Num meas 1 2 1Size Data according to Num meas ENTER Counter Data pts 1Enter Data
250. e Status 2 21 HP IB GENERAL HSR Program Example 2 21 INFormatION Hardware Status Enable Register 2 21 Continued Reading the Hardware Status Enable 2 22 Writing to the Hardware Status Enable Register 2 22 Clearing the Hardware Status Enable Register 2 22 Event Status Register Reading the Event Status Register Clearing the Event Status Register 2 23 Event Status Enable Register 2 24 Reading the Event Status Enable 2 24 Writing to the Event Status Enable Register 2 24 Clearing the Event Status Enable Register 2 24 Status Byte Register 2 24 Summary 2 25 Master Status Summary MSS 2 25 Event Status Bit ESB Summary Message 2 25 Message Available Message 2 26 Measurement Complete MCB 2 26 Hardware Status Bit HSB Summary Message 2 26 Reading the Status Byte 2 26 Clearing the Status Byte Register 2 27 Service Request Enable
251. e a measurement Shortform TST self TeST Longform TST The TST query initiates a series of self tests that exercise various parts of the HP 5373A Issuing this command is equivalent to selecting the Self Test option in the Diagnostic Test screen All tests occur automatically and do not affect data stored in RAM The TST query returns only numbers 0 for pass or a test number for fail It does not return ASCII messages as TEST does Example OUTPUT 703 TST Initiates the self test routine and returns the pass fail result 5 35 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 36 Numeric Command Reference NUMERIC NUMeric subsystem controls the format for displaying SUBSYSTEM measurement result data Functions in this subsystem equivalent to those available via the NUMERIC menu screen COMMANDS The syntax diagram for the NUMeric subsystem commands are shown in Figure 5 3 sep orator mes gt DISPioy separator STATistics 4 N F P e Figure 5 3 NUMeric Subsystem Syntax Diagram 5 37 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 38 DISP Display Type command query Shortform Longform DISP DISPlay type DISPLAY The DISPlay command selects the type of numeric display for screening the results of a measurement This command also determines the type of data that is returned over the bus which
252. e and interpolator data is time stamp time datum 2 ns interpolator datum 0 1 ns 3 117 gt E HP 5373A Programming Manual Generating Final Function Results From Time Stamps and Event Stamps F 9 Totalize results generated by calculating elapsed events between valid event stamps M Totalize result event stamp 1 event stamp Expanded Data for Totalize measurements is Measurement Gate Time Gate Times are generated by calculating the elapsed time between valid time stamps Gate Time time stamp 4 time stamp 3 118 Binary Output Format 13 MEASUREMENT EXPANDED CHANNEL S DATA ARMING MODES Dual ON OFF Interval Sampling Ratio Edge Sampling Totalize Sum and Edge Interval Difference Edge Edge of A and B How Signals are Converted to Binary Data Example Totalize A and B Interval Sampling BLOCK CHANNEL A MEASUREMENT ARMED CHANNEL MEASUREMENT 1 i i INTERVAL 4 First Data Capture 4 First Data Capture 4 Data Capture JAGE 1 ISecond Data Capture goog BINARY DATA Figure 13 A Totalize Measurement on Channel A and B with Interval Sampling Arming Mode Showing Corresponding Binary Output Producing Results Totalize results are generated by calculating elapsed events between contiguous valid samples As
253. e and statistics mode The SREFerence value can be thought of as a negative number added to the measured result giving a delta value between the measurement and Reference value If Statistics are enabled the Reference value is set to the mean of the last sample set If Statistics are disabled the reference value is set to the first valid sample in the last measurement pass For segmented measurements the last measurement pass refers to the first block for unsegmented measurements this is the last block If SREFerence is selected with Math and Statistics already enabled the statistical mean used as the Reference value is the mean of the measurement results before any math processing There is no numeric entry for this command If a Reference value other than the last sample or mean is required the OFFSet command can be used Reference values are set separately for each channel If the SREFerence command is sent for a channel which is not currently being measured the reference will be set to zero The SREFerence query returns the current value for the specified channel CREFerence clears the reference channel Examples OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR A SREF Sets Reference value for Channel A OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR A SREF Queries for the current Reference value of Channel A STAT Statistics command query Command Reference Shortform STAT STATistics Longform STATISTICS The STATistics command enables an
254. e as 1 except Measurement channel Block size Totalize Same as 1 except Arming Rise Time with HP 53702A pod installed Block size Slope A B 1 A gt B 1 000 000 Interval Sampling 100 Negative Input Mode Measurement channel Arming Channel A Auto trig Channel Auto trig 8 Fall Time with HP 53702A pod installed Block size Slope A B Input Mode Measurement channel Arming Channel A Auto trig lvl Channel B Auto trig lvl 9 Pulse Width with HP 53702A pod installed Duty Cycle with HP 53702A pod installed Block size Slope A Slope B Input Mode Measurement channel Arming Channel A Auto trig Channel B Auto trig 10 Pulse Offtime Same as 7 except Slope A Slope B 11 Phase Block size Slope A Slope B Input Mode Measurement channel Arming Start channel Start channel slope Channel A Auto trig lvl Channel B Auto trig lvi Default Measurement Setups Common A Automatic 80 20 100 Positive Common A Automatic 20 80 100 Negative Positive Common A Automatic 50 50 Positive Negative 100 Negative Positive Separate A relative to B Edge Holdoff A Positive 50 50 B 3 HP 5373A Programming Manual B 4 APPENDIX C STATUS AND ERROR MESSAGES INTRODUCTION STATIC STATUS MESSAGES Five types of messages appear on the CRT Status Line of the HP 5373A to indicate errors failures and gener
255. e e e e e e de oe e e che e ke e e ce e e de e e e e ke de de oe e e de e le ce e le de e he de k ede e ee e e eee e e e ee e e e e de e ke ce e e e e e Setup query 1 1 OUTPUT 6Hp5373a SET 1 SET QUERY RETURNS A STRING 1CONTAINING THE 5373A S FRONT 1PANEL SETUP INFORMATION 1 ENTER Hp5373a USING 5A Header 1 THE Header STRING WHICH 1IS THE FIRST 5 ALPHA CHARACTER lOF THE SETUP STRING 1 String length VAL Header 3 IDIMENSION String length TO BE ILENGTH OF SETUP STRING 11 5373A Programming Manual ALLOCATE Setup string String length DIMENSION Setup string 1String length 1 ENTER Hp5373a USING K Setup string TRANSFER SETUP STRING 1 HP 5373A USING 1SO THAT TRANSFER DOES NOT 1 ON RANDOM LINE FEED Joke e e e ke e e e e de e le e e e e de e coke e de de e e e e e ee e e e e oe e e e e e e e oe he e he e ede ee e e oe e e e e e e e e e e e de e e e de 1Store setup Creates a binary file called SETUP FILE on the selected disk drive and stores Header and Setup_string in the file Jk ke see e e eee e e e e e ce E SS SSE RSE SEES ESS SESS ES SESS SEAS SE SSE SESS e ce e SST ke ke ST ke ce ec Store setup 1 1 CREATE SETUP_FILE 1 String_length 5 4 4 ICREATE A FILE WITH 1 RECORD THAT IS LONG IENOUGH TO HOLD Header 1AND Setup string 1 ASSIGN 8Path 1 TO SETUP FILE 1 AN I O PATH TO SETUP FILE 1 OUTPUT
256. e it then RUN this program Hpib 7 SELECT CODE OF HP IB INTERFACE Printer 1 HP IB ADDRESS OF PRINTER Hp5373a 3 ADDRESS OF HP5373A Plotter 5 HP IB ADDRESS OF PLOTTER ASSIGN Hp5373a TO Hpib 100 Hp5373a 1 1 CLEAR Hpib OUTPUT 8Hp5373a SMOD SING SET THE SAMPLING MODE TO SINGLE MAKE SURE NO MEASUREMENT IS MADE BETWEEN PRINTING AND PLOTTING OUTPUT 8Hp5373a HSR CLEAR THE HARDWARE STATUS REGISTER ENTER 8Hp5373a Hsr Temp SPOLL 8Hp5373a MAKE SURE THE STATUS BYTE IS CLEARED OUTPUT 8Hp5373a HSE 512 SRE 1 SET UP FOR SRQ ON HARD COPY COMPLETE OUTPUT 8Hp5373a INTE PSOUR DISP SET PRINTER DUMP MODE TO DISPLAY 1 1 koc e kc ce ke ke kc e e KK je e e e jc e e e e ke ee e e ke e e e dee e ee e ee e e ke e she e e e e ke e e e ke e ke e e e kk ek eee e e dee 1 THE FOLLOWING TELLS THE HP 5373A TO DO A PRINTER DUMP AND DOES THE 1 NECESSARY HP IB ADDRESSING SEND Hpib UNL MTA LISTEN Hp5373a DATA PRINT CHR 10 CHR 10 LINEFEED SEND Hpib UNL TALK Hp5373a LISTEN Printer DATA e e ck e e e e de e e e je ole e e e kc e de le e e ee le ke e e e e dee e e de ee e eec dece e e dede e e e dee e e de dee ee eee 1 WAIT FOR AN SRQ WHICH HAPPENS WHEN THE HP 5373A IS FINISHED PRINTING ON INTR Hpib GOTO Plot ENABLE INTR Hpib 2 Waitl GOTO Waitl 1 1 Plot OUTPUT 6Hp5373a HSR AGAIN CLEAR OUT HSR HP 5373A Programming Manual E 10 ENTER Hp5373a Hsr Temp SPOLL Hp5373a 1 AGAIN CLEAR THE
257. ease time resolution Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit STOP CHANNEL EVENT binary event count on the stop channel For example Channel A events for Time Interval B gt A measurement UNUSED FIELD TIME stop sample time of occurrence INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps BC CJ 0809 Figure 10B C Format 10B Binary Output 3 91 E Q Eh Ioh HP 5373A Programming Manual The binary data stream was derived from the signals shown in Figure 10B A To produce valid event stamps your program must F 1 Correct the start channel binary event data for counter rollovers M A 2 Correct the stop channel binary event data for counter rollovers T produce valid time stamps your program must 1 Correct the binary time data for counter rollovers 2 Incorporate interpolator data 3 Correct for differences in electrical path length between start channel and stop channel PRODUCING VALID EVENT STAMPS Correcting Start Channel Data for Counter Rollovers Start channel event counts increase monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred Note that start channel event counts are provided with every other sample Monotonic increase should be expected for data 1 e3 e5 etc See Figure 10B A An overflow processing routine must scan the start data
258. ecified subsystem commands not allowed for the current measurement setup or commands containing syntax errors Type Static Error Associated With Standard HP Error This message occurs when an attempt has been made to enter a Stop arming value less than the corresponding Start arming value in TIME TIME or EVENT EVENT Arming modes Examples are entering a Start time greater than a Stop time or entering a Start event count greater than a Stop event count Type Static Error Associated With Standard HP Error This message occurs when output data is requested from the HP 5373A while it is in the Binary output mode The HP 5373A cannot be queried or send formatted numeric data via HP IB while in Binary output mode To process queries switch to ASCII or Floating Point output modes Type Momentary Associated With Warning This message occurs when there are no listeners present on the bus and an attempt has been made to have the HP 5373A send output This is specific to the Talk Listen mode of operation Type Momentary Associated With HP IB Warning This message occurs when the HP 5373A is addressed to talk but there are no listeners present on the bus This is specific to the Talk only mode of operation Error 102 Bus conflict Talk only Error 103 Key ignored in Remote Error 104 Key ignored in LLO Error 107 Timebase unlocked Press RESTART Error 108 Ch A and B Overvoltage Error 109 Ch A
259. ed Longform command mnemonics are generally formed according to the following rules If a function description is one word the longform is the entire word For example DISPLAY for the Display function RESTART for the Restart function If a function description is more than one word the longform is the first letter of each word except for the last word which is simply appended without modification For example MSIZE for Measurement Size CTINTERVAL for Continuous Time Interval Exceptions to the rules above are AMPModulation for Amplitude Modulation OFFTime for Pulse Offtime POW for Envelope Power PRF for Pulse Repetition Frequency PRI for Pulse Repetition Interval A shortform mnemonic always has three or four characters and is the minimum command designation accepted by the HP 5373A Shortform commands are derived by truncating the longform command according to the following rules If the longform is four characters no truncation is necessary unless the last character is a vowel In this case the fourth character is dropped for example DATE abbreviates to DAT and is written in the documentation as DATe If the longform has more than four characters and if the fourth character is a vowel then truncate the longform to three characters Otherwise truncate to four characters For example HISTOGRAM truncates to HIST HISTogram CHANNEL truncates to CHAN CHANnel ERROR truncates to ERR ERRor
260. ediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Time Overflow Correction value to that datum and to all subsequent time data then continue the scan An example is given in Technical Note 3 Time Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 3 125 zuOom a HP 5373A Programming Manual Incorporating Interpolator Data The algorithm for producing time stamps from binary time data and binary interpolator data M is R M time stamp time datum x 2 ns interpolator datum x 0 1 ns A Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length ILE Between the Start and Stop Channels There are several possible signal paths running from input connectors on the HP 5373A front panel to measurement hardware inside the instrument Signal routing depends on the selection of several parameters including Common Input Mode and Attenuation To adjust for this variation add a correction value called an offset to each stop channel time stamp Start channel time stamps require no correction Use Technical Note 4 to determine the correct value of offset for your application corrected stop time stamp stop time stamp offset Generating Final Function Results From Time Stamps and Event Stamps Totalize results are generated by calculating elapsed events between valid start event stamps and valid stop event stamps Totalize result stop event stamp start event stamp Expa
261. efficiently as possible The process outlined below will help you quickly obtain the information you need The first step is to familiarize yourself with the general characteristics of the binary output format the data structure an overview of how to process the data specific terms used etc We recommend the following steps Writing the Program Binary Output Read the following material in this chapter Header Information tells how to recognize the beginning of new data and how to determine the number of bytes in each binary data transmission w Measurement Data and Data Fields how the various data fields are organized m How to Process Binary Data general description of the steps required to turn binary data into measurement results Glossary terms you will see often in this text Special Topics details you will need to know Example Programs Appendix E contains two example programs These programs written in HP BASIC contain examples of all the processes required to turn binary output data into measurement data You may want to set up the measurement in the HP 5373A using the HP IB interface See Chapters 4 and 5 of this manual for HP IB information A data capture and reduction program can be written with the following information First determine the exact output format for your data and how to process it to obtain measurement results Next determine how your program will interrogate the HP 5373A and st
262. el A specified in Step 4 The measurement result will be the frequency of 10 events measured on Channel B HP 5373A Programming Manual Table D 2 Arming Mode Programming Commands Arming Sublevel Delay Arming Mode Command SLOPe CHANnel DELay CHannel 1 Automatic _ me AUT 2 Edge Holdoff STAR POS NEG A B X EDH 3 Time Holdoff STAR POS NEG B X 2 ns THOL 4 Event Holdoff STAR POS NEG A B X 1 event A B EVH 5 Interval Sampling SAMP 10 us ISAM 6 Time Sampling SAMP 1 s TSAM 7 Cycle Sampling SAMP 16 cycles A B O CSAM 8 Edge Sampling SAMP POS NEG A B X ESAM 9 Parity Sampling p PSAM 10 Repetitive Edge STAR POS NEG A B X REDG 11 Repetitive Edge STAR POS NEG A B X Parity RPAR 12 Random Sampling RSAM 13 Edge Interval POS NEG X EDIN 10 us 14 Edge Time POS NEG B X EDT e 1 5 15 Edge Edge POS X EDED POS NEG A B X 16 Externally Gated POS NEG A B X 17 Edge Cycle POS NEG EDCY 18 Edge Event POS NEG A B X EDEV O or OSC is an abbreviation for the internal timebase oscillator The internal ti
263. el Events are trigger events which are counted between stop channel samples but which are not time stamped The formula is Missed Stop Channel Events stop event stamp 1 stop event stamp 1 3 80 Binary Output Format 8 EXPANDED MEASUREMENT CHANNEL S DATA ARMING MODES Time Interval ON Time Holdoff Event Holdoff How Signals Are Converted to Binary Data Example Time Interval B Time Holdoff REF EDGE Chan EXT ARM TIME HOLDOFF Start Stop ot Oo C Jf JOO Iil BINARY DATA weno Figure 8 A Time Interval Measurement on Channel B With Time Holdoff Arming Mode Showing Corresponding Binary Output Producing Results Time Interval results are generated by calculating elapsed time between start and stop samples EXPANDED DATA Expanded Data for Time Interval measurements is Missed Events Missed Events are defined as trigger events which are counted between measurements but which are not time stamped See Glossary in this chapter for more details Binary Data Output START START f START STOP sie stor EVENTS J NUSED rime TME gt 32 32 32 32 32 16 16 16 16 Normat Mode Bits 32 16 Fast Mode Bits 16 16 16 16 16 momom Figure 8 B Format 8 Binary Output 3 81 HP 5373A Programming Manual Format 8 binary output is shown in Figure 8 B above Each measurement consists of two samples start and stop Each sample generates
264. elta X values Shortform YSC Y axis SCale Longform YSCALE The YSCale command sets the Y axis scaling mode for Histograms The scale choices are LOG or LINear The YSCale query returns the current Y axis scaling mode Parameters LOG LINear Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP LOG Sets Y axis scale to logarithmic scale OUTPUT 703 GRAP YSC Queries for the current Y axis scaling mode 5 71 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 72 YVAL Get Y axis Value query only ZOOM Zoom a Graph command Shortform YVAL Y axis VALue Longform YVALUE The YVALue query returns the current Y value for Marker or Delta Marker Display Mode values Example OUTPUT 703 GRAD YV AL Queries for the current Marker or Delta Y values Shortform ZOOM ZOOM Longform ZOOM This control zooms magnifies any graph Three views are possible in out and full ZOOM IN gives you increased resolution ZOOM OUT gives you more of the big picture ZOOM FULL returns the graph to full scale original acquisition picture Parameters IN OUT FULL Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP ZOOM FULL Sets display for full scale Measurement Function Pre trieger MEASUREMENT SUBSYSTEM COMMANDS Command Reference The MEASurement subsystem controls the HP 5373A measurement modes arming modes measurement size and measurement holdoff start and sampling stop conditions The commands in this subsystem are equ
265. en PRETrigger returns the current value Parameters ON OFF OCONd Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS PRET ON Enables the pre trigger feature OUTPUT 703 MEAS PRET Queries for the current Pre trigger state Shortform PMOD Pre trigger MODe Longform PMODE The PMODe command sets the pre trigger mode Time TIMe or TINTinterval means the pre trigger occurs when the time interval detector specification is met EXTernal X means the pre trigger occurs when an external arm trigger occurs The PMODe query returns the current pre trigger mode Parameters TINTinterval EXTernal X Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS PMOD EXT Sets pre trigger mode to occur on the external arm signal OUTPUT 703 MEAS PMOD Queries for the currently set pre trigger mode Shortform PUN Pre trigger Longform PUNITS The PUNits query returns either PCT or SAMP indicating the units of the PAMount value Example OUTPUT 703 MEAS PUN Queries for the pre trigger units type PXSL Pre trigger External Arm Slope command query SAMP Sample Arm Sublevel command CHAN Arming Channel command query Command Reference Shortform PXSL Pre trigger eXternal arm SLope Longform PXSLOPE The PXSLope command controls the external arm slope that defines the pre trigger event This command is of importance only when the pre trigger source is the external arm input as opposed to the ti
266. ent count Correcting Event Data for Counter Rollovers Valid event counts increase monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred An overflow processing routine must scan the set of valid event data seeking any event datum which is smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such an event datum the routine must add the appropriate Event Overflow Correction value to that datum and all subsequent data then continue the scan An example is given in Technical Note 3 Event Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 PRODUCING VALID TIME STAMPS Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers Binary time data increases monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred An overflow processing routine must scan the time data for any datum smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such datum the routine must add the appropriate Time Overflow Correction value to that datum and to all subsequent time data then continue the scan An example is given in Technical Note 3 Time Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Incorporating Interpolator Data The algorithm for producing time stamps from binary time data and binary interpolator data is time stamp time datum X 2 ns interpolator datum x 0 1 ns 3 113 zmon m HP 5373A Programming Manual Generating Final Function Results from Time Stamps and Event Stamps Totalize results are generated by calculating ela
267. ent count If TS2 0 use e the instrument s first attempt at valid event data capture This is the valid binary event count If TS2 1 use e the instrument s second attempt at valid event data capture Subtract 1 from the integer represented by e The subtraction results in the valid binary event count Correcting Event Data for Counter Rollovers Valid event counts increase monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred An overflow processing routine must scan the event data for any datum which is smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Event Overflow Correction value to that datum and all subsequent data then continue the scan An example is given given in Technical Note 3 Event Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 PRODUCING VALID TIME STAMPS Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers Binary time data increases monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred An overflow processing routine must scan the time data for any datum which is smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Time Overflow Correction value to that datum and all subsequent time data then continue the scan An example is given in Technical Note 3 Time Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Incorporating Interpolator Data The algorithm for producing time stamps from binary tim
268. ent formats The specific output format depends on the measurement function used PRF or Frequency Time Interval etc the specified arming mode and whether or not you have requested extra data in addition to the measurement data Expanded Data ON OFF All of the output data formats are described in the Binary Format section at the end of this chapter To find the format for your measurement use Table 3 1 Format Guide in the Binary Format section This table lists all measurement and arming mode combinations supported on the binary output and indicates the output data format for each The 20 binary output format descriptions immediately follow the table Each individual format section describes the specific data format and gives detailed instructions for reducing the binary output data to measurement results Appendix E Example Programs contains programs for receiving and processing binary data These programs written in HP BASIC show the details of setting up arrays manipulating the binary data computing time and event stamps and producing measurement results To write your data capture and reduction program you should be familiar with the manual method for making measurements on the HP 5373A then read the procedures which follow HP 5373A Programming Manual HOW TO PRODUCE MEASUREMENT RESULTS General Information 3 6 HOW TO WRITE YOUR PROGRAM Getting Started In order to obtain measurement results
269. epend on the method used When serial polled bit 6 is the RQS message indicating whether the HP 5373A is actively requesting service by asserting the SRQ interface signal The 5 message will be set low False following a serial poll m When queried with the STB query command the MSS message is sent as bit 6 in place of the ROS message In either case reading the Status Byte Register does not alter the summary messages in the register Clearing the Status Byte Register SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE REGISTER Reading the Service Request Enable Register Writing to the Service Request Enable Register Clearing the Service Request Enable Register RECEIVING THE ABORT MESSAGE HP IB General Information The Status Byte Register can be cleared indirectly by sending the CLS command Since the CLS command clears all event registers their corresponding summary messages will also be cleared The output buffer measurement complete and the MAV summary message are exceptions they are not cleared by CLS The Service Request Enable Register is an 8 bit register that enables corresponding summary messages in the Status Byte Register When enabled a summary message will generate a Request Service message The Service Request Enable Register is read with the SRE query The SRE query returns an integer value representing the sum of the binary weighted values of the bits of the register For example a returned value
270. er The returned value is a decimal number representing the binary weighted value of the register bits Refer to chapter 2 for information about using the Status Byte and Service Request Enable registers Range 0 to 255 Examples OUTPUT 703 SRE 16 Sets bit 4 of the Service Request Enable register to 1 thus enabling bit 4 Message Available of the Status Byte register OUTPUT 703 SRE Queries the HP 5373A for the contents of the Service Request Enable register Shortform STB read STatus Byte Longform STB The STB query is used to read the Status Byte register and the Master Summary Status MSS bit The returned value is an integer representing the binary weighted values of the register bits For example a returned value of 32 indicates that bit 5 Event Status Bit of the Status Byte register is set to 1 Sending the STB query does not alter the contents of the register Example OUTPUT 703 STB Queries for the contents of the Status Byte register Shortform TRG TRiGger Longform TRG The command is used to trigger a measurement This command with one exception has the same effect as the GET Group Execute Trigger command The exception is for Manual Arm Totalize measurements where the command performs the same function as the front panel MANUAL ARM key TST Self Test query only Command Reference Example OUTPUT 703 TRG Tells the HP 5373A to tak
271. er to output data bytes The MAV message will be set low when the output buffer is empty The MAV message appears in bit 4 of the Status Byte Register This message can be used to synchronize data transfers with the controller After sending a query to the HP 5373A the controller can enable the MAV bit by setting the Service Request Enable Register to generate a request for service when data becomes available During this time the HP IB interface is available for other use since it is not used by the HP 5373A This bit will go high when a measurement has completed It will be set low when the current measurement is cleared or when a new measurement is started This bit can be used to synchronize data transfers to a computer When high the HSB summary message indicates that one or more enabled events in the Hardware Status Register occurred since this register was last read or cleared The HSB message appears in bit 0 of the Status Byte Register The bits of the Hardware Status Register are ANDed with the corresponding bits of the Hardware Status Enable Register and the resulting values are ORed to determine the HSB message The Status Byte Register may be read by a serial poll or with the STB query Both methods will return an integer value representing the sum of the binary weighted values of the bits of the register as described for the Hardware Status and Event Status Registers The values returned for bit 6 however will d
272. ere are also some localized messages in the Graphics screens which are not covered here in detail Those messages are intended to give the user feedback on the current Graph status but are not generally considered errors of global concern and do not generate error number entries in the Error Queue Examples are the number of measurements between the markers the status indication while the graph display is being recalculated due to a GRAPhic command or an indication that some action has completed such as a Graph copy to memory These messages are considered to be self explanatory and therefore are not listed here Type Momentary Associated With Measurement Status This message occurs when the ABORT HP IB command is received or the Abort MANUAL ARM key is pressed while the HP 5373A is in the Repetitive Sample mode The Abort command is valid only when the 5373 is in Single Sample mode so no action takes place Type Static Status Associated With System Operation This message occurs while the HP 5373A is acquiring measurement data It is erased when the acquisition process is complete Type Static Failure Associated With Rear Panel External Reference Input Error Number 105 The HP 5373A will display this message and stop the measurement process when an external timebase reference is connected to or disconnected from the rear panel EXTERNAL 3 HP 5373A Programming Manual Arming has changed
273. es manage the bus The following terms and concepts apply to HP IB operations Address Each device on the interface is assigned an address The address specifies which device receives or sends information Byte A byte is a unit of information consisting of eight binary digits bits Device Any instrument or unit that is HP IB compatible is defined as a device Device Independent Command A command predefined by the interface standard to have a specified bit pattern and resulting action Device Dependent Command A command that is specific to a particular instrument or family of instruments which is not predefined by the interface standard Device dependent commands are usually sent as ASCII strings of characters Major Interface Functions HP IB General Information Polling Polling is a process typically used by a controller to locate a device that requires service from the controller There are two types of polling Serial Poll and Parallel Poll Serial Poll When the controller executes a serial poll the addressed device sends one byte of operational information called a status byte If more than one device on the interface is capable of requesting service each device on the interface must be polled individually until the device that requested service is located Parallel Poll Parallel poll is a controller initiated operation to obtain information from several devices simultaneously The HP 5373A does not have pa
274. es other than BASIC however you must infer the applicable commands and techniques for such other languages by first understanding the BASIC commands and techniques described here If you are experienced in programming other HP IB devices you will know many concepts and procedures discussed in this manual In this event you may find Chapter 5 Command Reference most helpful Because the manual is written for a diverse audience different users are expected to approach the material from their unique perspectives and informational needs Here is a chapter by chapter abstract to help you decide where to go for information m Chapter 1 Before You Start to Program provides an overview of topics covered in the manual and describes their relationships This is suggested reading for all users m Chapter 2 describes the HP IB in a general way and explains HP 5373A interface capabilities Remote operating characteristics are elaborated The status reporting scheme including hardware status and event status is described Also covered are ASCII and Floating Point output formats m Chapter 3 describes how to get measurement results from the instrument using the Binary data output m Chapter 4 relates programming rules and gives you guidance needed to program the instrument Topics such as command structure command mnemonics syntax formatting rules and command processing order are described Here you will also find tips to help speed up
275. es the time data in this condition the smallest time value in each pair should be greater than the largest time value in the immediately preceding pair unless a counter rollover has occurred between pairs The second scan identifies the smaller time value in each pair called true start then identifies the larger time value in the preceding pair that pair s true stop If true stop is greater than true start a counter rollover has occurred between pairs The appropriate Time Overflow Correction should be added to all data subsequent to true stop Following the corrections resume the scan at the next pair An example routine is given in Technical Note 3 Time Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Incorporating Interpolator Data The algorithm for producing time stamps from binary time data and binary interpolator data is time stamp time datum 2 ns interpolator datum 0 1 ns Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between the Start and Stop Channels There are several possible signal paths running from signal input connectors on the HP 5373A front panel to measurement hardware inside the instrument Signal routing depends on the selection of several parameters including Common Input Mode and Attenuation To adjust for this variation add a correction value called offset to each stop channel time stamp Start channel time stamps require no correction Use Technical Note 4 to determine the
276. esume the scan at the next pair An example routine is given in Technical Note 3 Time Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Incorporating Interpolator Data The algorithm for producing time stamps from binary time data and binary interpolator data is time stamp time datum 2 ns interpolator datum 0 1 ns Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between the Start and Stop Channels There are several possible signal paths running from signal input correctors on the HP 5373A front panel to measurement hardware inside the instrument Signal routing depends on the selection of several parameters including Common Input Mode and Attenuation To adjust for this variation add a correction value called an offset to each stop channel time stamp Start channel time time stamps require no correction Use Technical Note 4 to determine the correct value of offset for your application For the stop channel time stamp corrected stop time stamp stop time stamp offset 3 109 HP 5373A Programming Manual PRODUCING VALID EVENT STAMPS An overflow detection routine must scan the start stop pairs of event data For each pair the event data should increase from the first datum collected to the second datum collected unless a counter rollover occurred For example when the start sample is known to precede the stop sample the start event count will be smaller than the stop event count unless a
277. et correction if required Compute Event Stamps Compute Measurement Results NOTE In some formats the offset correction is subtracted from rather than added to the time stamp data Check your specific format for proper handling of offset data Event stamps are derived from the event count data by correcting for counter rollovers With this correction the event data can be used to compute measurement results Each format section describes the process for converting event count data to event stamps Measurement results are computed directly from the time and event stamps Each format contains the formulas required to make your measurement computations The most widely used formulas are reproduced below for reference event stamp event stamp fr ERE r trequency time stamp time stamp Time Interval stop time stamp start time stamp Totalize result stop event stamp start event stamp 3 13 HP 5373A Programming Manual 3 14 Special Topics SPECIAL TOPICS Introduction Measurement Inhibit EFFECTS OF INHIBIT ON OTHER INSTRUMENT FUNCTIONS Binary Output The purpose of this section is twofold First it provides additional information on features of the HP 5373A which are not covered in the general or Binary Format sections of this chapter The purpose here is to give you additional insight into the capabilities of the HP 5373A Secondly Speci
278. ettings to retrieve the corresponding front panel setup You can create an unlimited number of such variables to manage diverse measurement regimes Example Program 1 IThis program demonstrates the use of the SET command and the SET Iquery The program is broken down into three sections Setup query I Store setup and Retrieve setup Setup query reads front panel setup information to Header and Setup string Store setup creates 1a binary file called SETUP FILE on the selected disk drive land stores Header and Setup string in the file I Retrieve setup retrieves the front panel setup information from 1 FILE and uses the SET command to program the HP 5373A s front panel setup CLEAR SCREEN ITHIS IS AN HP BASIC 5 0 COMMAND ONLY GCLEAR ICLEARS GRAPHICS ON CRT ASSIGN Hp5373a TO 703 1 551 5 Hp5373a INSTRUMENT S 1lADDRESS 1 DIM 5 IDIMENSIONS Header TO 5 OUTPUT Hp5373a PRES IPRESETS INSTRUMENT OUTPUT Hp5373a LOCAL 1 5373A FOR LOCAL OPERATION PRINT MANUALLY SET THE HP 5373A TO THE DESIRED SETTINGS AND PRINT PRESS CONTINUE TO STORE THE HP 5373A FRONT PANEL SETUP PAUSE CLEAR SCREEN ee ee ee ee de e e ee e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e de fe fe de e le de e le de je ke e e e e fe de e e e e e e ee e e e ee e e e e e e e e e de e 1 Setup query Reads the HP 5373A s front panel setup information into 1 Header and Setup string ke e e k
279. event stamp start event stamp corrected stop time stamp 4 corrected stop time stamp St iod opichannel ERI or Periodi stop event stamp stop event stamp If two channel measurements are chosen A B B A etc the results computed above must be combined algebraically measurement by measurement to obtain results For example Frequency A Channel A Frequency Channel Frequency Expanded Data for Frequency PRI and Period measurements is Measurement Gate Time Gate Time is generated by calculating the elapsed time between appropriate time stamps Start channel gate times are generated by using the odd numbered time stamps Stop channel gate times are generated by using the even numbered time stamps The formula is Gate Time time stamp time stamp 3 103 2 Ioh 9 HP 5373A Programming Manual 3 104 Binary Output Format 10D EXPANDED MEASUREMENT CHANNEL S DATA ARMING MODES PRF Frequency Time Time PRI Period Event Event How Signals are Converted to Binary Data There are two possible binary output configurations for this measurement By allowing both the full capabilities of these complex arming modes are supported In these arming modes the start sample can either precede or follow the stop sample If the start sample precedes the stop sample the binary data is delivered as shown in Figure
280. exact format for 3 9 5373A Programming Manual Data Fields EVENT DATA TIME DATA INTERPOLATOR STATUS FIELD DATA 3 10 your data can be found in the Binary Formats section of this chapter To find your format determine your Expanded Data status m Measurement function PRF Frequency PRI Period etc m Measurement channel Channel A A B etc m Arming mode Automatic Edge Event etc Next look in the Format Guide Table 3 1 using these parameters to find your format number When you turn to that format number you will find the exact output data format produced by your measurement You will also find detailed information on how to reduce that data to measurement results The following paragraphs contain general information on the various output data fields The binary output data stream contains three types of data fields These are event data time data and interpolator status data These terms are defined in the Glossary for this chapter and discussed in some detail below Event data is a four byte 32 bit unsigned binary number which is transmitted most significant byte first Event data comes from the event counter in the HP 5373A and represents the cumulative number of times the signal being measured has met the input trigger and arming requirements Event data increases as the number of trigger events accumulate in the event counter In most cases the event data rolls over or goes from maxi
281. f switching the instrument from Remote to Local and clearing the Local Lockout Example OUTPUT 703 LOCAL Switches the HP 5373A from Remote to Local and clears the Local Lockout condition NOTE This command should be used in conjunction with the REMOTE command OUTPUT 703 REM Command Reference MEN Select Menu command query MMOD Measurement Format command query Shortform Longform MEN select MENu MENU Use the MENu command to select one of 11 different menus for display on the screen The MENu command parameters and their corresponding screen menus are Parameter Screen Menu Displayed PRETrigger Pre trigger FUNCtion Function GRAPhics Graphics HELP Help INFo Status INPut Input Instrument STate Instrument State MATH Math NUMeric Numeric SYSTem System TEST Diagnostics The MEN query returns the name of the currently displayed menu screen If Display Blank is the current screen MEN will return error also Error 150 will be reported Examples OUTPUT 703 Displays the Graphics screen OUTPUT 703 Queries for the currently displayed menu screen Shortform MMOD Measurement MODe Longform MMODe The MMODe command sets the sample mode to either FAST or NORMal FAST sample mode provides a higher maximum measurement rate but has more restrictive numeric limits for some parameters compared to NORMal s
282. fference is they lack longform command mnemonics The IEEE common commands are defined by IEEE 488 standards and function identically in all instruments that conform to the standard That is the commands are device independent Instrument specific commands are all those commands that do not have an asterisk in the command mnemonic They consist of commands command queries and query only types Here are the subsystem command groups Terms enclosed in parentheses are the corresponding menu names for those subsystems Most subsystem and menu names are alike Sublevel Commands NUMeric NUMERIC GRAPhic GRAPHIC MEASurement FUNCTION PRE TRIGGER INPut INPUT PROCess MATH ISTate INSTR STATE INTerface SYSTEM DIAGnostic TEST Programming Rules and Guidance Controls display of numeric results with options for scrolling and large character fonts Turns data into a graphic display Histogram Time Variation or Event Timing graph Controls measurement arming and gating modes Also controls Pre trigger functions Controls input signal conditioning parameters trigger levels and slope Controls measurement post processing options such as math statistical functions and limit testing Displays status information about each Save Recall register Controls the configuration of the HP IB interface Do not confuse this set of commands with the general purpose high level system
283. for counter rollovers To produce valid time stamps your program must 1 Correct the binary time data for counter rollovers 2 Incorporate interpolator data 3 Correct for differences in electrical path length between the start channel and the stop channel PRODUCING VALID EVENT STAMPS Correcting Event Data for Counter Rollovers In this format the event counters are reset before each start sample A routine which checks for event counter rollover need only check the start and stop event data of a given measurement If the stop datum is smaller than the start datum a counter rollover has occurred and the appropriate overflow correction must be added to the stop datum After the correction has been made the routine should continue checking the data at the next start datum Event Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Time counters on the other hand are not reset so time data will be continuous between counter rollovers PRODUCING VALID TIME STAMPS Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers Since the Time Interval function will allow the stop sample to be collected before the start sample time data does not always increase monotonically When start and stop are reversed stop before start the stop time count is correctly smaller than the start time count Overflow processing routines must distinguish between start stop reversals and counter rollovers Overflow processing routines correct the data only when a c
284. from the binary data output you must write a program to organize and process the data Writing this program requires that you have a good working knowledge of programming and programming techniques To properly process the data the program you write must do the following things Set up an array or several arrays to store the data Collect the data from the HP 5373A HP IB port and store it m Convert the 32 bit 4 byte binary data to a form which is easy to manipulate in your programming language m Scan the data to detect counter rollovers and apply corrections Compute event stamps see Glossary by correcting event count data Event stamps represent the cumulative number of input events in a measurement Compute time stamps see Glossary from time count and interpolator data In some measurements a correction for internal signal path length is also applied Compute measurement results from time and event stamps To write the program you should be familiar with the process for manually making measurements on the HP 5373A Work with the Getting Started Manual initially then use the Operating Manual as needed to set up and make your measurements In operation the HP 5373A can be set up via the HP IB then switched to the binary output mode with the appropriate code INT OUTP BIN If you do this manually use the RESULTS FORMAT field in the System menu This chapter is organized to help you write your program as
285. g edge of the selected input signal for use as an event for triggering measurements This trigger slope selection is independent of the arming and gating slope selections The SLOPe query returns the current slope setting for the selected channel Parameters POSitive NEGative Examples OUTPUT 703 INP SOUR A SLOP POS Selects the rising edge of the Channel A input signal for triggering measurements OUTPUT 703 INP SOUR B SLOP Queries for the currently selected slope for Channel B Shortform TRIG TRIGger Longform TRIGGER The TRIGger command selects the form of triggering for the selected input channel In Manual mode the LEVel command can be used to set the trigger level voltage in Repetitive Auto or Single Auto mode the trigger level is set automatically based on the relative level in percent specified using the RLEVel command In Single Auto SAUTo mode triggering occurs only once when initially selected in Repetitive Auto RAUTo mode triggering occurs immediately before each measurement Command Reference Note that Repetitive Auto triggering slows down the overall measurement rate because time measurements cannot be made during the Peak Amplitude measurement phase of Auto triggering TRIGger query returns the current trigger level mode Parameters MANual RAUTo SAUTo Examples OUTPUT 703 INP SOUR A Sets the Channel A input trigger mode to manual
286. h threads Metric threaded HP 10833A B C 13900380 0350 0948 0380 0064 or D HP IB cable lockscrews must be used to secure the cable to gt the instrument identification of the two types of mounting studs and lockscrews is made by their color English threaded fasteners are colored silver and metric threaded fasteners are colored black DO NOT mate silver and black fasteners to each other or the threads of either or both will be destroyed Logic Levels The Hewlett Packard Interface Bus logic levels are TTL compatible i e the true 1 state is 0 0V dc to 0 4V dc and the false 0 state is 2 5V de to 5 0V dc Mating Connector 1251 0293 Amphenol 57 30240 Mating Cables Avaliable HP 10631A 1 metre 3 3 ft 10631B 2 metres 6 6 ft HP 10631C 4 metres 13 2 ft HP 10631D 1 2 metre 1 6 ft Cabling Restrictions 1 A Hewlett Packard Interface Bus System may contain no more than 2 metres 6 6 ft of connecting cable per instrument 2 The maximum accumulative length of connecting cable for any Hewlett Packard Interface Bus System is 20 0 metres 65 6 ft 3 The maximum number of instruments in one system is fifteen Figure A 1 Hewlett Packard Interface Bus Connection 2 of 2 HP 5373A Programming Manual CONNECTING TO A PRINTER OR PLOTTER You can connect the HP 5373A to a printer or a plotter either with or without a controller If you connect a controller you can operate the printer or plot
287. hat datum and all subsequent data then continue with the scan An example routine is given in Technical Note 3 Time Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Binary Output Incorporating Interpolator Data The algorithm for producing time stamps from binary time data and binary interpolator data is time stamp time datum x 2 ns interpolator datum 0 1 ns Generating Final Function Results from Time Stamps Continuous Time Interval results are generated by calculating elapsed time between contiguous time stamps For each contiguous pair Continuous Time Interval time stamp time stamp 3 33 gt 0 E gt a PIDOT gt a HP 5373A Programming Manual 3 34 Binary Output FORMAT 1B EXPANDED CHANNEL S DATA MEASUREMENT ARMING MODES Edge Holdoff Time Holdoff Event Holdoff Edge Interval Continuous Time Interval How Signals Are Converted to Binary Data Example Continuous Time Interval B Edge Holdoff Producing Results TIME STAMP OF BLOCK ARMING EDGE P ad ASUREMENT Ty ARMED CE gt MM BINARY DATA Figure 1 Continuous Time Interval Measurement on Channel with Edge Holdoff Arming Mode Showing Corresponding Binary Data Output In this format the first sample in each block is unique it captures time of occurrence for the block arming edg
288. he HBINwidth value between allowed settings the next larger allowed setting is set Table 5 6 Range Limits for Histogram Functions HCT HTIM HPMT NORM 32bit FAST 16 bit NORM 32 bit FAST 16 bit HBIN min 200 ps 200 ps 200 ps 200 ps HBIN max 1 6777216 ms 64 ns 1 6777216 ms 64 ns HCEN min 200 ns 200 ns 3 9999998 s 64 8 usec HCEN max 17 9999998 s 130 8 usec 3 9999998 s 64 8 usec HSP min 400 ns 400 ns 400 ns 400 ns HSP max 3 3554432 s 128 usec 3 3554432 s 128 usec HST min 05 Os 4 05 65 0 HST max 7 9999996 s 130 6 usec 3 9999996 5 64 6 usec 5 84 HBL Histogram Block command query Command Reference Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS HBIN 200E 12 Sets the hardware histogram bin width to 200 pS OUTPUT 703 MEAS HBIN Queries for the currently selected histogram bin width setting NOTE Histogram commands can interact The commands HBINwid HCENter HSPan and HSTart each control a parameter that is relevant when the function is HCTinterval HPMTime or These parameters are inter dependent A detailed description of this inter dependence is provided in the operating manual Shortform HBL Histogram BLock Longform HBLOCK Use the HBLock command to establish what will happen between blocks during a multiple block hardware histogram acquisition If BBIN Big BIN is selected the re
289. he Pre trigger is detected 1 Satisfy block holdoff condition 2 Enable the hardware which detects the Pre trigger 3 Collect the N measurements in the block 4 Disable the hardware which detects the Pre trigger Note that a Pre trigger edge which occurs between blocks cannot be detected When the Pre trigger event is detected the instrument positions the capture window about the Pre trigger as previously described For the Multiple block acquisition the Binary Output capture window is likely to contain the sample which initiated a block but the position of this sample within the capture window depends on the input data There are three possibilities described below You must write code which detects a block initiation sample in any of the positions described below See Key Facts paragraph below for more details 1 The sample which initiated a block of measurements is the first sample in the Binary Output Data CAPTURE WINDOW PREVIOUS BLOCK 1 BLOCK OF MEASUREMENTS ARMING ARMING 2 The sample which initiates a block of measurements is embedded in the Binary Output Data is not the first sample PREVIOUS BLOCK CAPTURE WINDOW ARMING ARMING ARMING 3 The sample which initiates a block of measurements is the last sample in the Binary Output Data PREVIOUS BLOCK CAPTURE WINDOW ARMING ARMING HOLDOFF ARMING PROCESSING PRE TRIGGER Key Facts BINARY OUTPUT DATA From the above y
290. he binary time data Data in even indices 2 i is the start data Data in the odd indices 2 i 1 is the stop data FOR i 1 TO N tis there an overflow after start and prior to stop IF time 2 i time 2 i 1 lt 2731 1 THEN time 2 i time 2 i 2732 correct the stop FOR j 2 1 1 TO 2 N all subsequent data time j time j 2 32 NEXT j ELSE IF time 2 i time 2 i 1 gt 2 31 1 THEN time 2 i 1 time 2 i 1 2 32 Icorrect the start FOR j 2 i 1 TO 2 N 1correct all subsequent data time j time j 2 32 NEXT j ENDIF ENDIF NEXT i lis there an overflow between start stop pairs FOR 1 1 TO N 1 113 stop less than start IF time 2 i time 2 i 1 THEN use time 2 i 1 IF time 2 i42 lt time 2 i 1 THEN 1 use time 2 i 2 compare smallest sample of second pair with greatest of first second pair stop with first pair start IF time 2 i 2 lt time 2 i 1 THEN lif less than add overflow to all FOR j 2 i 1 TO 2 N tthe following samples time j time j 2 32 NEXT j ENDIF ELSE stop gt or to start use time 2 i 1l compare smallest sample of second pair with greatest of first second pair start with first pair start IF time 2 it l lt time 2 i 1 THEN if less than add overflow value 3 142 Binary Output FOR j 2 i 1 TO 2 N ito all following samples time j time j 2732 NEXT j ENDIF ENDIF ELSE Istop or to the start use time 2
291. he time count data is processed for overflow in the same way as event data then multiplied by 2 ns to convert it to time data 3 Interpolator data is also converted to time data then subtracted from the time count data Time and interpolator data combined in this manner are called time stamps Time stamps because of the interpolator have a resolution of 200 ps 3 3 HP 5373A Programming Manual Binary Output Constraints or Frequency as well as all other measurement results are computed from the time and event stamps To compute or Frequency the process is 1 Subtract adjacent event stamps to get elapsed events 2 Subtract adjacent time stamps to get elapsed time 3 Compute PRF or Frequency by dividing elapsed events by elapsed time The formula is _ elapsed events PRF or Frequency elapsed time To review our simple example an event count occurred at each end of an input cycle The time counter logged the precise time of occurrence of each event Subtracting adjacent event stamps gives in our simple example one cycle Subtracting the corresponding time stamps gives the time for one cycle the PRI or Period Performing the division events time gives PRF or frequency Conversely dividing time by events gives PRI or Period If the input PRF or frequency is greater than 10 MHz not all cycles will be timed but all will be counted in the event counter Since all events are counted accuracy of
292. hnical ae AN nse RRs OE ER 3 151 How To Determine Offset Values and Start Stop Channels 3 151 Offset Determination for Formats 4A 4B 5A 5B 6 8 10A 10B 10 14 15 Offset Determination for Formats 1B 3 2B a Start Stop HP 5373A Programming Manual Chapter 4 Introduction 2 1 1 4 41 PROGRAMMING RULES 4 1 AND GUIDANCE Command Structure and Elements E 41 Command Hierarchy 4 3 Matching Front Panel Features to HP IB Commands 4 3 Commands and Queries Duplication of Command Names System Commands IEEE Common Commands HP 5373A Subsystem Commands Sublevel Commands Navigating the Hierarchy The Active Subsystem or Sublevel Scheme 4 10 What Happens When You Issue a System Command 4 10 Differences Between HP IB and Front panel Control 4 11 Command Mnemonics 411 Choosing Either Shortform or Longform How Longform Commands Are De
293. id binary event count Identifying the Datum Which Represents the Valid Channel B Event Count The Totalize Status 2 Bit TS2 is bit 14 of the interpolator status field see Interpolator Status Field under Special Topics at the front of this chapter During two channel Totalize measurements TS2 identifies the datum which represents the valid Channel B event count If TS2 0 use E the instrument s first attempt at valid Channel B event data capture This is the valid event count If TS2 1 use E the instrument s second attempt at valid Channel event capture Subtract 1 from the integer represented by E The subtraction results in a valid binary event count 3 129 gt E e HP 5373A Programming Manual Correcting Event Data for Counter Rollovers Each sample should now include both a valid Channel A event datum and a valid Channel B 5 event datum The Channel A event data should be processed independent of the Channel event data Consider each channel s event data as an independent data stream Each set of data can now be processed for counter rollover T 15 Valid event counts increase monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred An overflow processing routine must scan the event data for any datum which is smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Event Overflow Correction value to that datum and all event
294. ields are contained within a measurement message they are explicitly delimited by the ASCII semicolon lt gt Within each message unit are the data elements When several data elements comprise a message unit each data element is delimited by the ASCII comma lt gt To terminate the complete message the lt NL gt END sequence is sent at the end of the final message unit A single message unit is terminated by the concurrent transmission of the EOI signal with the ASCII new line lt NL gt character represented in the format examples in this manual by NL END The following ASCII output format examples are divided into categories In the first group specific numeric values are shown to illustrate formatting of results In the second group alphanumeric descriptions such as lt resultA gt are used to simplify the examples In the third group statistics examples of raw statistics data are given followed by examples relating to limit testing NOTE The value 1 0E 38 is transmitted instead of a calculated result if the calculated result is invalid For example if a Totalize A B result has 0 for the Channel B denominator 1 0E 38 is transmitted Numeric Examples Single Result SPs 1 23456789E 08 lt NL gt END PRF A 123 456789 MHz lt SPs gt 5 371E 03 lt Nl gt END Period 8 5 371E 03 lt SPs gt 1 0 09 lt NL gt END Time interval A gt 1 ns lt SPs gt 0 0 00 lt NL gt END Time Interva
295. ime stamp time stamp PRI or Period 1 event stamp 1 event stamp Expanded Data for PRF Frequency PRI and Period measurements is Measurement Gate Time Gate Time is generated by calculating the elapsed time between samples Measurement Gate Time time stampj 1 time stamp 3 56 Binary Output FORMAT 4A NDED MEASUREMENT CHANNEL S EU Time Interval ARMING MODES Automatic Edge Holdoff Time Holdoff Event Holdoff Interval Sampling Repetitive Edge Sampling Random Sampling Edge Interval Edge Random 8 How Signals Converted to Binary Data Example Time Interval A gt B Automatic KE Chan A Chan B Start Stop aE mm BINARY DATA WES KO Figure 4A A Time Interonl Measurement on Channel A B with Automatic Arming Mode Showing Corresponding Binary Data Output Producing Results Time Interval results are generated by calculating elapsed time between start and stop samples NOTE With Expanded Data OFF the counts of elapsed trigger events on Channel A and Channel B are unavailable 3 57 HP 5373A Programming Manual Binary Data Output F EJ 63 M Normat Mode Bits A Fast Mode Bits 16 4 Figure 4A B Format 4A Binary Output Format 4A binary output is shown in Figure 4A B above Each measurement consists of two samples start and stop Input channels associated with
296. imum to query the X axis maximum value for Main Graph OUTPUT 703 GRAP MGR XMAX Queries for current X axis maximum value Examples 5 57 HP 5373A Programming Manual XMIN X Axis Minimum query only YMAX Y Axis Maximum query only YMIN Y Axis Minimum query only MLEF Move Marker Left command Shortform XMIN X axis MINimum value Longform XMINIMUM Use XMINimum to query the X axis minimum value for the Main Graph Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP MGR XMIN Queries for current X axis minimum value Shortform YMAX Y axis MAXimum value Longform YMAXIMUM Use YMAXimum to query the Y axis maximum value for the Main Graph Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP MGR YMAX Queries for current Y axis maximum value Shortform YMIN Y axis MINimum value Longform YMINIMUM Use YMINimum to query the Y axis minimum value for the Main Graph Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP MGR YMIN Queries for current Y axis minimum value Shortform MLEF move Marker LEFt Longform MLEFT Use MLEFt to move the graphics display marker left This simulates using the front panel knob The complementary command is MRIGht Range 1 to 124 Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP MLEF 80 Moves the marker left 80 display points For Histograms this is 80 bins for Time Variation or Event Time this is 80 display columns Command Reference NOTE If MNEXT PIXEL is set before the MLEF command is iss
297. in the Special Topics section for more information CONTINUOUS TIME INTERVAL RESULTS Continuous Time Interval results are generated by calculating the elapsed time between contiguous time stamps The elapsed time between the first and second time stamp in each block represents elapsed time between the block arming edge and the first signal edge Because of this the elapsed time between the first and second sample is not part of the Continuous Time Interval measurement data See the paragraphs entitled Time Stamps Associated With Block Arming Edge in the Special Topics section of this chapter for more information 3 37 mre 2 00 E w HP 5373A Programming Manual For the first sample in each block Block arming data first measurement channel time stamp block arming time stamp For subsequent samples Continuous Time Interval time stamp 1 time stamp 3 38 Binary Output EXPANDED MEASUREMENT CHANNEL S DATA ARMING MODES PRF Frequency PRI Period A B C ON OFF Automatic Interval Sampling Cycle Sampling Edge Sampling Continuous Time Interval A B ON Automatic Interval Sampling Repetitive Edge Sampling Phase Deviation A B ON OFF Automatic Interval Sampling Time Deviation A B ON OFF Automatic Interval Sampling Frequency Deviation A B ON OFF Automatic Interval Sampling How Signals Are Converted to Binary Data Example Frequency A Edge Sampli
298. inary output data transmission contains two types of information see Figure 3 3 Header information in ASCII code Binary coded measurement data If the measurement set up the HP 53734 calls for 1 block of 1000 measurements then the data transmission will contain the data required to generate 1000 measurement results Since the binary output is the HP IB port the data comes out in 8 bit bytes The first byte is the most significant byte HEADER INFORMATION MEASUREMENT DATA Binary Output 00 Figure 3 3 Binary Output Data The header is an 8 byte field which contains a measurement start identifier ASCII and 6 and a six digit number which tells how many bytes of data are in the measurement field Figure 3 4 below shows the contents of the header All header data is in ASCII code All subsequent measurement data is in binary code EXAMPLE One block of 500 PRF or frequency measurements 500 PRF or frequency measurements contain 501 samples Each sample contains the following event data 4 bytes time data 4 bytes interpolator data 2 bytes Total 10 bytes 501 samples x10 bytes sample 5010 bytes of data The header format will be 46005010 LEPIDE LIUM Mg RUPTA uum Figure 3 4 Header Format ASCII code The format of the measurement data varies with the measurement function input channel arming mode and whether Expanded Data is ON or OFF The
299. ing Manual 3 26 Binary Formats HOW TO USE TABLE 3 1 FORMAT GUIDE Binary Output Table 3 1 is your map to the Format tables which follow To find the format which describes your particular measurement you must have the following information about your measurement m Expanded Data function ON or OFF m Measurement function m Input channel s to be used m Arming mode Table 3 1 is in two parts One part describes formats for the Expanded Data ON function the other covers Expanded Data OFF The table titles tell which function is described in each table To determine your format 1 Select the table which corresponds to the Expanded Data function you plan to use 2 Choose the measurement function and channel across the top of the table Mark the column 3 Choose the arming mode row from the left side of the chart and mark the row 4 Locate the output data format for your measurement at the row column intersection For example Expanded Data ON Measurement function PRF or Frequency Input channel A Arming mode Edge Sampling The output format for this measurement is 2A 3 27 HP 5373A Programming Manual Table 3 1 A Format Guide EXPANDED DATA ON ARMING MODE MEASUREMENT FUNCTION TIME INTERVAL CONTINUOUS TIME INTERVAL PRF FREQUENCY PULSE WIDTH OFFTIME ENVELOPE RISE TIME POWER FALL TIME AMPLITUDE DUTY CYCLE MODULATI
300. ing of this interval a list of time interval values from the block arming edge for that block to the first measurement edge in the block is provided BTIM outputs length information followed by pairs of values which indicate the index of the measurement that follows the time interval and the interval value itself For ASCII the length information is the number of values that follow For floating point output format the length information is the number of bytes that follow 8 times the number of values As an example consider a single block frequency measurement performed using edge holdoff arming The time from the holdoff edge to the first sample edge is obtained using BTIM The BTIM content will be 2 indicating 2 values to follow 1 indicating that next value occurred prior to sample 1 lt time value gt Example OUTPUT 703 Requests the output block timestamp list Shortform CANC CANCel hardcopy Longform CANCEL The CANCel command cancels the hardcopy output initiated by the Print PRINt or Plot PLOT commands When the 5373A receives the CANCel command the current printer or plotter output is immediately stopped Refer to the PRINt and PLOT command descriptions Example The following example shows how to use the CANCel command with an HP 9000 Series 200 300 computer as the controller Note that sending OUTPUT 703 CANC does not work because the HP 5373A is in Talk Only mode whi
301. inue with the scan An example routine is given in Technical Note 3 Time Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 3 36 Binary Output Incorporating Interpolator Data The algorithm for producing time stamps from binary time data and binary interpolator data is time stamp time datum 2 ns interpolator datum 0 1 ns Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between Block Arming Channel and Signal Channel There are several possible signal paths running from the signal input connectors on the HP 5373A front panel to measurement hardware inside the instrument Signal routing depends on the selection of several parameters including Common Input Mode and Attenuation To adjust for this variation subtract a correction value called an offset from the time stamp associated with the first sample in each block Subsequent time stamps require no correction Use Technical Note 4 to determine the correct value of offset for your application For the first sample in each block corrected first time stamp time stamp offset Generating Final Function Results from Time Stamps and Event Stamps NOTE The Block Start Status Bit is bit 6 of the interpolator status field Block Start bit 6 is 1 when the sample is the first sample in a block When this occurs the corresponding time datum contains block arming data and is not part of the measurement See the paragraph entitled Interpolator Status Fields
302. ion 1This function converts the 32 bit unsigned binary Time and Event data linto 16 bit signed binary data in order to simplify BASIC processing convert from unsigned to signed binary the function checks to see 1if either the upper or the lower 16 bits of the Time or Event data is 1a negative number if the most significant bit is a 1 If either of Ithe 16 bit numbers are negative 2716 is added to it in order to Iconvert it to its positive signed binary equivalent The upper 16 bit tnumber is then multiplied by 2 16 and added to the lower 16 bit 1number The function can be rewritten as follows 1 1 Return Buff Indexl Index2 2 16 1 2 32 if the msb of Buff Indexl Index2 is a 1 0 otherwise 1 Buff Indexl Index241 1 2 16 if the msb of Buff Indexl Index24 1 is 1 0 otherwise 1 FNEND 1 Get_4byte_val SUB Disp data INTEGER Block_size REAL Ts block arm Time stamp Freq Disp data DISPLAY FREQUENCY MEASUREMENTS PRINT CHR 12 PRINT Meas Measurement PRINT PRINT Timestamp Ts block arm PRINT FOR X 1 TO Block size PRINT X PRINT TAB 20 Freq X NEXT X SUBEND Program Examples Binary Example 3 This binary output program is an example using the binary format output to make a single block of 4095 frequency measurements The following program makes frequency measurements and then displays a graph of the frequency vs time results on the controller CRT see Figure E 1 for an example of the graphic
303. ion of several parameters including Common Input Mode and Attenuation To adjust for this variation add a correction value called an offset to each stop channel time stamp Start 3 130 Binary Output channel time stamps require no correction Use Technical Note 4 to determine the correct value of offset for your application corrected stop time stamp stop time stamp offset Generating Final Function Results From Time Stamps and Event Stamps Totalize results are generated for each channel by calculating elapsed events between valid start event stamps and valid stop event stamps Channel A result stop event stamp start event stamp Channel B result stop event stamp start event stamp The measurement may require that these independent results be combined for example A B If this is required results are combined algebraically measurement by measurement For example Totalize A B result Channel A result Channel B result Expanded Data for Totalize measurements is Measurement Gate Times Gate Times are generated by calculating elapsed time between start time stamps and stop time stamps Gate Time corrected stop time stamp start time stamp 3 131 gt 4 gt Z2707 E 5373A Programming Manual 3 132 Technical Notes TECHNICAL NOTE 1 Binary Output NOTE Each format section contains algorithms which correct for cou
304. is in Remote mode To establish a generally preferred set of conditions default HP IB states are established during power up The HP 5373A address and addressing mode are saved in non volatile memory HP IB default conditions are m HP IB Local mode active m Local Lockout cleared m Unaddressed if in normal addressing mode m RQS bit in the status byte register is set to 0 m Status byte register is cleared Under certain predefined conditions the HP 5373A switches from Remote mode to Local mode These conditions arise via commands sent from the controller or from internal changes Local Lockout If the HP 5373A is under Remote program control and the front panel LOCAL key is inadvertently pressed the instrument returns to Local control Accordingly data or settings could change To prevent undesired front panel control use the Local Lockout message This message allows return to local only under program control Addressing HP IB General Information You can cycle the power switch to return to local control but this technique has serious disadvantages such as loss of data Such action may make the system controller lose control of the instrument During such a cycle several HP IB conditions are reset to the default state at power up and the status of any operation that was in progress is unknown by the controller It is possible that this could stop activity on the system bus as well Required Conditions The
305. is protected Save to another register or unprotect the desired register on the Instrument State Menu Type Momentary Associated With Save Recall Warning This message occurs when an attempt has been made to recall a saved instrument configuration from a register that has not yet been saved Error 142 Register out of range Error 150 Parameter conflict Error 160 Out of sensitivity cal Events occurred which were not timed Exponent entry disallowed Exponent disallowed due to mantissa Status and Error Messages Type Momentary Associated With Save Recall Warning This message occurs when a register number outside the valid range has been entered Valid register numbers are 0 9 for RECALL and 1 9 for SAVE or ERASE Type Static Error Associated With HP IB This message occurs when an HP IB command was sent which conflicts with the current instrument configuration Type Static Failure Associated With Hardware Error This message occurs when the HP 5373A has lost its battery stored memory and the sensitivity calibration factors have been lost When this occurs the factors are set to defaults and the HP 5373A needs calibration Type Momentary Associated With Measurement Status This message occurs when the measurement acquisition process is not able to timestamp every event sample individually All measurement results displayed are still valid in this case no user intervention is required Typ
306. it A res B limit B gate A gate B res A limit gt res B limit B gate A gate B END 2 41 HP 5373A Programming Manual 2 42 Statistics Examples When Statistics mode is enabled and the HP 5373A is displaying the STATISTICS Numeric screen the statistical data is sent instead of the measurement results data Note that when the HP 5373A is displaying the SPLIT Numeric screen which displays results plus four of the statistical values Maximum Mean Minimum and Standard Deviation all eight statistical values are still returned over the bus after the applicable measurement results as shown above have been sent Single Result Statistics header mean A gt std dev A max A min A variance A gt root variance A rms A gt allan variance A gt END Dual Result Statistics header mean A sid dev A max A min A variance A root variance A gt rms A allan variance A mean B std dev B max B m n B variance B root variance B rms B allan variance B END Limit Testing Statistics Examples When the HP 5373A displays the LIMITS screen the statistical data above is not available Instead information about the number of measurements which passed and failed the limit testing high low and inside limits is sent The format is Single Result in LIMIT Screen header low values A pass values
307. itialized to a predefined state Device Clear DCL and Selected Device Clear SDC commands Device Trigger DT This function permits a device to DTI The 5373A can be remotely have its basic operation initiated triggered by the talker the bus Controller This function permits a device to co The 5373A cannot function as a send addresses universal controller commands and addressed commands to other devices on the HP IB It may also include the ability to conduct polling to determine devices requiring service Drivers E This code describes the type of 2 The 5373A has three state drivers electrical drivers used in a device Via the HP IB you can remotely program most controls except Power On Off You also receive measurement data via the HP IB The HP 5373A operates as both a talker and a listener as described in Table 2 1 The output format is the same regardless of the mode Talk Only Addressable TALK LISTEN SERVICE REQUEST The HP 5373A can be addressed to Talk by a controller or by setting the instrument to the Talk Only mode When addressed as a Talker the instrument sends data to other devices on the bus This data may result from a measurement an error condition a diagnostic test or other operations When addressed as a Listener the instrument accepts any number of commands from a controller on the bus These commands are used to program the instrument operation A
308. ivalent to those available via the front panel FUNCTION and PRE TRIGGER menus Syntax diagrams for the MEASurement subsystem commands are shown in Figure 5 8 Major sublevels SAMPle Figure 5 9 and STARt Figure 5 10 are diagrammed separately sep orater p Cuin TSAMpling CSAMpling ESAMpling PSAMoling RSAMpling REDGe RPARity EDINterval EDEDge EDCYcle EDEVent EDParity EDRandom TINTerval TTiMe EViNterval EVEVent EGATe Figure 5 8 MEASurement Subsystem FUNCTION PRE TRIGGER Syntax Diagram 1 of 4 5 73 HP 5373A Programming Manual NTIN MEASurement t BLOCK gt seporator gt number of HC detect separator OFF ABOVe gt Y BELow INSide 000 OUTSide gt DLOWer gt separator lower_arg t gt DMIDale separator middie_org separator gt upper_org gt FUNCtion separotor TINTerval PERiod PRF PWIDth OFFTime DCYCIe ii DUTY PHASe PDEViation TDEViotion FDEViation RRMEA2X3 Figure 5 8 MEASurement Subsystem FUNCTION PRE TRIGGER Syntax Diagram 2 of 4 5 74 Command Reference CONTINUED t Lui 20 FUNCtion seporator AMPMod HCTinterval
309. ive sample mode SMOD REP with Wait To Send off the next measurement starts as soon as the current 5 27 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 28 CLS Clear Status command measurement data is placed in the output buffer When Wait To Send is on the next measurement will start only after the current measurement data has been sent out over the HP IB The WTSend query returns the currently selected Wait To Send mode Parameters ON OFF Examples OUTPUT 703 WTS ON Turns on the Wait To Send mode OUTPUT 703 WTS Queries for the on off status of the Wait To Send mode NOTE If the total acquisition Number of Blocks Number of Measurements in each Block is less than the HP 5373A s memory all blocks are completed before any data is output regardless of the WTS mode Use Appendix A as a guide for determining the maximum number of measurements that will fit into memory for multiple block acquisitions WTS only has an effect as long as the HP 5373A is in REMOTE Shortform CLS CLear Status Longform CLS The CLS command is used to clear the Event Status Register and the Hardware Status Register setting all bits in these registers to zero When the Event and Hardware Status registers are cleared the corresponding summary messages are also cleared thus indirectly clearing bits 0 and 5 in the Status Byte Register Example OUTPUT 703 CLS Clears Event and Hardware Status registers ESE Eve
310. l Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP MOR VERT Sets Marker Orientation to vertical OUTPUT 703 Queries for the current Marker Orientation Shortform MRAT get Modulation RATe Longform MRATE The MRATe query returns the Modulation Rate value This result is obtained by analyzing the data between the vertical display markers to arrive at an estimate of the modulation rate Partial periods between the markers do not detract from the accuracy of this estimate Modulation parameters are calculated when the Marker Display Mode has been set to Modulation If the HP 5373A cannot compute the modulation rate the value 1 is returned Example OUTPUT 703 Queries for the Modulation Rate Shortform MRIG move Marker RIGht Longform MRIGHT Use MRIGht to move the graphics display marker right This simulates using the front panel knob The complementary command is MLEFt Range 1 to 124 Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP MRIG 40 Moves the marker right 40 display points 5 61 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 62 MUP Move Marker Up command OUTL Outline Mode command query NOTE If MNEXT PIXEL is set before the MRIG command is issued the MRIG command moves the marker N pixels to the right where N is the parameter sent with the MRIG command IF MNEXT MEAS is set before the MRIG command is issued the MRIG command moves the marker one data point to the right
311. l A gt B Ons Note that lt SPs gt denotes one or more leading spaces 2 33 HP 5373A Programming Manual 2 34 Multiple Results Continuous Frequency A lt SPs gt 2 04 07 lt gt Frequency A 1 20 4 MHz lt SPs gt 2 05E 07 lt gt Frequency A 2 20 5 MHz lt SPs gt 2 01 07 lt NL gt END Frequency A 20 1 MHz Continuous Frequency A amp B lt SPs gt 2 04E 07 lt gt Frequency A 1 20 4 MHz SPs 5 00 03 lt gt Frequency 1 5 00 kHz lt SPs gt 2 05 07 lt gt Frequency A 2 20 5 MHz lt SPs gt 4 99 03 lt gt Frequency 2 4 99 kHz SPs 2 01E 07 lt gt Frequency A n 20 1 MHz SPs 5 20 03 NL END Frequency B n 5 20 kHz NOTE Dual channel results are transferred in the sequence A B A C B C for simultaneous two channel measurements Alphanumeric Examples SECOND GROUP In the following examples a simplified notation represents the different formats of response elements To receive this data the Numeric screen must be in either NUMERIC BOLD or SPLIT mode In the following examples lt res A gt result for the primary measurement channel lt res B gt result for the secondary measurement channel limit A limit B PASS HIGH LOW INS or NA lt gate A gt gate time for the primary measurement channel lt gate B gt gate time for the secondary measurement channel lt mean gt lt allan
312. l has changed Source input parameters changed Stop Arming precedes Start Arming Undefined key Value out of range set to limit Value out of range C 14 set to maximum Type Momentary Associated With Parameter Status Coupling This message occurs when the Measurement Source channel has been changed to resolve conflict with another parameter that has been entered such as changing the Measurement Function Type Momentary Associated With Parameter Status Coupling This message occurs when the Measurement Source channel and one or more Input menu parameters have been changed to resolve conflict with another parameter that has been entered such as changing the Measurement Function Type Momentary Associated With Parameter Status Validation This message appears when the Stop Arming value is less than the Start Arming value The stop arm will thus occur before the start arm If you are making Time Interval measurements expect negative results Type Momentary Associated With Key entries Status This message occurs when an invalid or undefined key is pressed An example is an undefined softkey Type Momentary Associated With Numeric Entry Status This message occurs when parameter values have been altered to resolve conflict with the selection of Fast Measurement mode Type Momentary Associated With Numeric Entry Status This message occurs when the entered parameter value is above
313. lator Status Field Every time datum has an associated interpolator datum The interpolator data represents the number of 100 ps intervals which have elapsed between a timed input event and the next clock pulse To decode the interpolator data the 5 bits are extracted from the Interpolator Status field and their numerical value is multiplied by 100 ps The resulting number will be subtracted from its associated time datum resulting in a high resolution time stamp When making any measurement with start and stop inputs a correction is needed to compensate for the differences in the Compute Time Stamps Binary Output electrical path length between measurement channels The electrical path length is changed by such things as Attenuation and Separate channel connection Technical Note 4 describes how to compute the offset Each format section contains information on whether or not an offset correction is required and how to apply the correction to the data A time stamp is the result of correcting the binary time count data for counter rollover subtracting interpolator data and in some cases adding the offset information The time stamp in other words represents the true time of occurrence of an event in a block of measurements and is used to compute measurement results The formula for computing time stamps is given in each format and repeated below time stamp time datum x2 ns interpolator datum x0 1 ns offs
314. ldoff Modes Sampling Modes Block Holdoff is Automatic Sample Arm is Automatic Block Holdoff is User defined Arm is Automatic Biock Holdoff is Automatic Sample Arm is User defined Start Arm is Automatic Stop Arm is User defined Holdoff Sampling Modes Block Holdoff Is User defined Sample Arm is User defined Start Arm Is User defined Stop Arm is User defined Table 3 1 B Format Guide EXPANDED DATA OFF Binary Output ARMING MODE MEASUREMENT FUNCTION TIME INTERVAL CONTINUOUS TIME INTERVAL PULSE WIDTH OFFTIME RISE TIME FALL TIME DUTY CYCLE ENVELOPE POWER AMPLITUDE MODULATION PHASE DEVIATION TIME DEVIATION FREQUENCY DEVIATION AUTOMATIC 4A 4A 1 4B 2 10C 108 10B 2A 2 HOLDOFF EDGE HOLDOFF 4 4 18 10B 28 TIME HOLDOFF 4A 4 1B mI EVENT HOLDOFF INTERVAL SAMPLING 4A 4A 1A 33 108 TIME SAMPLING CYCLE SAMPLING EDGE SAMPLING PARITY SAMPLING REPET EDGE PARITY SAMPLING RANDOM SAMPLING EDGE INTERVAL EDGE TIME EDGE EDGE EDGE CYCLE EOGE EVENT EDGE PARITY EDGE RANDOM TIMEANTERVAL TIME TIME REPET EDGE SAMPLING 4A 4A 4A 4A 4A EVENTANTERVAL I EXTERNALLY GATED MANUAL an 1 DUAL Simultaneous Dual
315. le command to turn X axis Manual Scaling on or off The XMSCale query returns the current X axis Manual Scaling status Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP TVAR XMSC ON Sets Manual Scaling on OUTPUT 703 GRAP XMSC Queries for the current X axis Manual Scaling status Shortform YARH Y axis Auto Range Hold Longform YARHOLD Use YARHold to copy the current Y axis values to the Manual Scaling parameters Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP TVAR YARH Copies current Y axis values to the Manual Scaling parameters Shortform YMAX Y axis MAXimum value Longform YMAXIMUM Use the YMAXimum command to set the Y axis maximum value Positive Range 1E 12 xn lt 1 36 and 0 Negative Range 1E 24 xn lt 1E 12 Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP TVAR YMAX 1E6 Sets Y axis maximum value to 1E6 OUTPUT 703 GRAP TVAR YMAX Queries for the current Y axis maximum value YMIN Set Y axis Minimum command query Command Reference NOTE C The YMAX query outputs different formats depending on whether the graph addressed is main graph MGR or memory graph The main graph query returns data in numeric format while the memory graph query returns data in string format For example If the YMAX for MGR and MEM are both 746 4782 us GRAP MGR YMAX returns the numeric value 746 4782E 06 GRAP MEM YMAX returns string value 746 4782 us Shortform YMIN Y axis MINimum value Longform YMINIMUM Use
316. le printing or plotting and cannot respond without first being set to Listen mode by the controller 10 SEND 7 UNT MTA LISTEN 3 DATA CANC CHR 13 CHR 10 20 SEND 7 UNT TALK 3 30 WRITEIO 7 23 11 40 END 5 9 HP 5373A Programming Manual CLE Clear command CLIS Carrier Frequency List 5 10 query only Shortform CLE CLEar Longform CLEAR The CLEar command performs an operation similar to a Device Clear lt DCL gt or Selected Device Clear lt SDC gt In response to either the CLEar lt DCL gt or lt SDC gt message the HP 5373A will m Clear the input and output buffers m Discard all deferred commands and queries m Terminate any measurement or acquisition process Note that the lt DCL gt and lt SDC gt messages but not the CLEar command also clear a static failure condition and clear the Event Status and Hardware Status registers Example OUTPUT 703 CLE Terminates measurements clears input and output buffers and discards all deferred commands and queries Shortform CLIS Longform CLIST CLIS returns the carrier frequency value for each block when performing a Phase Deviation MEAS FUNC PDEV or Time Deviation MEAS FUNC TDEV measurement If the carrier mode is maual PROC CARR MAN the returned value s will be the user entered value see PROC CFR command If the carrier mode is AUTO PROC CARR AUTO the returned value s will be computed by the HP 5373A based upon the
317. letion of the previously issued command If problems are encountered WAIT commands should be used to allow the command sufficient time to complete execution Table 2 3 Meta Messages Meta Command General Specific Message Sequence Description HP 5373A Response DATA UNL MTA Transfers device dependent The 5373A sends measurement LAD data information from one device to data as defined by the device one or more devices on the bus dependent command received from the controller TRIGGER UNL MTA Causes a group of selected Starts a new measurement LAD GET devices to simultaneously initiate a set of device dependent actions CLEAR UNL MTA Causes the instrument to be set to Causes the 5373A to clear any LAD SDC a predefined state such as a errors present clears all input certain range or function and output buffers and resets the hardware for a new measurement REMOTE REN UNL Permits selected devices to be set Causes the 5373A to go to remote MTA LAD to remote operation allowing operation if REN is true and if parameters and device instrument is addressed to listen characteristics to be controlled by Locks out all front panel keys bus messages except LOCAL instrument is controlled by bus messages Until changed via the bus remote operation is according to state of front panel settings just prior to going to remote LOCAL UNL MTA Causes selected devices to return Returns the 5373A to front panel LA
318. lex instrument most of the measurement data produced in the binary mode originates in the circuits described above To understand how the output data is formed consider the following simplified Frequency measurement The input frequency is lt 10 MHz and the measurement uses the Automatic arming mode The measurement begins when an input signal is applied Every time the input signal meets the input trigger and arming requirements a pulse is generated which increments the event counter This makes three things happen 1 The count in the event counter is instantly transferred to memory 2 The interpolator begins to measure the time between the event pulse and the next 2 ns clock pulse to be captured in the time counter 3 At the next time count the number in the time counter is transferred to memory When the next event occurs the process is repeated Periodically event time and interpolator data is transferred to the HP IB buffer There it is formatted and sent to the rear panel HP IB port as binary data To generate measurement results the binary data must be captured and processed by your program in an external computer In simplified form the process is 1 event count data is examined to be sure that the event counter has not overflowed during the measurement If the event counter has overflowed a correction is applied so that the data increases continuously Processed event data is called event stamps 2 T
319. ller buf COUNT Num bytes FOR I 1 TO Sample size PRINT I Buff I NEXT I Example 2 1 MEASUREMENT RESULTS LIMIT TEST RESULTS AND STATISTICS PRINT PRINT EXAMPLE 2 MEAS LIMIT AND STATS RESULTS OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT Counter PROC SOUR A LIM ON Counter PROC SOUR A HLIM Hi lim Counter PROC SOUR A LLIM Lo lim Counter NUM DISP SPLIT 1 TRIGGER Counter GOSUB Read_header RESET Controller buf STAT ON ITURN LIMITS AND STATS ON SET HI LIMIT ISET LOW LIMIT DISPLAY RESULTS AND STATS BLOCK DATA HEADER TRANSFER Counter TO Controller buf COUNT Num bytes READ MEASUREMENT AND J 1 PRINT PRINT PRINT PRINT HIGH LIMIT Hi lim MEAS MEAS RESULT LIMIT TEST RESULTS LOW LIMIT Low lim LIMIT RESULTS l HIGH O0 PASS 1 LOW FOR I 1 TO Sample size PRINT I Buff J Buff J l PRINT MEASUREMENT NUMBER IRESULT AND LIMIT RESULTS E 29 HP 5373A Programming Manual E 30 STATISTICS IPRINT STATISTICS RESULTS Mean Buff Sample size 2 41 Std dev Buff Sample_size 2 2 Maximum Buff Sample 2 2 3 Minimum Buff Sample_size 2 4 Variance Buff Sample 2 2 5 Root Allen Variance Buff Sample size 2 46 RMS Buff Sample 2 2 7 Allan Variance Buff Sample size 2 8 1READ MEASUREMENT RESULTS AND GATE DATA PRINT PRINT EXAMPLE 3 MEASUREMENT AND EVENT RESULTS FOR CHANNELS A AND
320. low the procedure listed below m If stop start gt 221 1 then the stop must have come before the start and a rollover must have occurred between them In this case the processing routine must add 232 to the start datum and all subsequent data excluding the current stop datum 3 141 HP 5373A Programming Manual m If stop start lt 231 1 then the start must have come before the stop and a rollover must have occurred between them In this case the processing routine must add 232 to the stop and all subsequent data excluding the current start datum To correct for rollovers between start stop pairs Once the first data scan is complete a second routine detects and corrects for counter rollovers between start stop pairs The smallest time value in each pair should be greater than the largest time value in the preceding pair unless a counter rollover has occurred between pairs The second scan identifies the smallest time value in each pair True start and identifies the largest time value in the preceding pair True stop If true stop is greater than true start a counter rollover has occurred between stop start pairs 232 must be added to all data subsequent to true stop The following example demonstrates this procedure The rollover processing routine for the time data is N the number of desired results There are 2N samples for this format This example uses a one dimensional array to hold all t
321. lt Measurement result Reference Normalize Offset xScale 5 123 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 124 NORM Normalize command query If no reference is set reference 0 the above formula is equivalent to Math result Measurement result Normalize Offset xScale The MATH query returns the current status of the Math modifiers Parameters ON OFF Examples OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR A MATH ON Enables the Math modifiers for Channel A OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR B MATH Queries for the current math status for Channel B Shortform NORM NORMalize Longform NORMALIZE The NORMalize command allows raw measurement data to be divided by a user entered normalization constant Normalization values are set separately for each channel Positive Range 1E 12 lt n lt 1 12 Negative Range 1E 12 lt n lt 1 12 Resolution 1E 12 Note that if zero is entered the value will default to 1E 12 The NORMalize query returns the value of the current Normalization value in exponential form NR3 format Examples OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR A NORM 60 Sets Channel A Normalization value to 60 OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR B NORM Queries for the current Normalization value for Channel B OFFS Offset command query SCAL Scale command query Command Reference Shortform OFFS OFFSet Longform OFFSET After the application of the Normalization value the OFFSet command can be u
322. lues be added to Time Data 1B 2B 3 4A 4B 5A 5B 6 8 10A 10B 10C 14 15 OFFSET DETERMINATION FOR FORMATS 4A 4B 5A 5B 6 8 10A 10B 10C 14 15 To determine the offset value to be added to the Binary Time Data for a particular measurement follow these steps 1 Determine which channel is the start channel see START STOP table at the end of this Technical Note 2 Determine the total delay the measurement s start channel by following the OFFSET FLOWCHART for that particular channel The OFFSET FLOWCHART is located next to the START STOP table at the end of this Technical Note For example For a Time Interval B gt A measurement Channel B is the start channel Use the OFFSET FLOWCHART to sum all the delays for Channel B 3 Determine which channel is the stop channel see START STOP table 4 Determine the total delay on the measurement s stop channel by following the OFFSET FLOWCHART for that channel For example For a Time Interval gt A measurement Channel A is the stop channel Use the OFFSET FLOWCHART to sum all the delays for Channel A 5 Subtract the total delay for the stop channel from the total delay for the start channel This difference will be the offset value to be added to the stop time data The formula is Offset Start channel delay Stop channel delay 3 151 HP 5373A Programming Manual Example 1 Measurement Time Interval A gt B Separate Mode Channel A X2 5 Attn Channel
323. m value Example OUTPUT 703 Queries for the current Histogram maximum value Shortform HME Histogram MEan value Longform HMEAN Use HMEAn to query the statistical mean of a Histogram Note Correct Histogram Statistics are only available when the HP 5373A is in the STATS mode Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP HME Queries for the current Histogram Minimum value Shortform HMIN Histogram MINimum value Longform HMINIMUM Use HMAXimum to query the current Histogram minimum value Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP HMIN Queries for the current Histogram Mean value Shortform HPA Histogram PAuse Longform HPAUSE This command controls the pause portion of the Pause Continue Histogram feature When received the Histogram stops before data acquisition is complete Issue the HSD Histogram Standard Deviation Value query only MCEN Modulation Center Value query only MDM Marker Display Mode command query Command Reference HCONTinue command to continue the Histogram Refer to HCONTinue command Example OUTPUT 703 Pauses the Hardware Histogram acquisition in progress Shortform HSD Histogram Standard Deviation Longform HSDEV Use HSDeviation to query the Histogram standard deviation value Example OUTPUT 703 GRAE HSD Queries for the current Histogram Standard Deviation value Shortform MCEN Modulation CENter value
324. mber of measurements There are N 1 samples for this format 3 137 HP 5373A Programming Manual Data Structure Notes 1 One dimensional array 2 Time data stored in successive array locations in chronological order i e order in which data was received FOR i 1 TON time i l lt time i THEN lis next sample less than current sample FOR j 1 1 TO N 1 1for all following samples time j time j 2 32 tadd overflow value NEXT j ENDIF NEXT i The rollover processing routine for event data is N the number of measurements There are N 1 samples for this format Data Structure Notes 1 One dimensional array 2 Time data stored in successive array locations in chronological order i e order in which data was received FOR 1 TON IF 1 1 lt event i THEN tis next sample less than current sample FOR j 1 1 TO N 1 tfor all following samples event j event j 2732 tadd overflow value NEXT j ENDIF NEXT i NOTE Event Data is not available for Format 1A 3 138 Binary Output FORMATS 1B 2B AND 3 The rollover processing routine for time data is N the number of measurements There are N 1 samples for this format FOR i 0 TON Time 0 corresponds to the time stamp tof the Block Arm IF time it l lt time i THEN lis next sample less than current sample FOR j 1 1 TO N 1 ifor all following samples time j time j 2 32 ladd overflow
325. me Overflow Correction value to that datum and to all subsequent data then continue with the scan An example routine is given in Technical Note 3 Time Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Incorporating Interpolator Data The algorithm for producing time stamps from binary time data and binary interpolator data is time stamp time datum X 2 ns interpolator datum 0 1 ns Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between Start and Stop Channels There are several possible signal paths running from signal input connectors on the HP 5373A front panel to measurement hardware inside the instrument Signal routing depends on the selection of several parameters including Common Input Mode and Attenuation To adjust for this variation add a correction value called an offset to each stop channel time stamp Start channel time stamps require no correction Use Technical Note 4 to determine the correct value of offset for your application For the stop channel time stamp corrected stop time stamp stop time stamp offset 3 79 HP 5373A Programming Manual Generating Final Functions Results from Event and Time Stamps Time Interval results are generated by calculating elapsed time between start time stamp and stop time stamp Time Interval corrected stop time stamp start time stamp Z 0m Expanded Data for Time Interval measurements is Missed Stop Channel Events Missed Stop Chann
326. me Variation Result command query 5 102 Input Subsystem Commands 5 105 CATT Input C Channel Attenuation command query 5 107 MOD Input Mode command query 5 107 SOUR Input Source 5 108 ATT Attenuation command query 5 108 BIAS Termination Bias command query 5 109 HYST Input Hysteresis command query 5 109 LEV Trigger Level 5 110 RLEV Relative Trigger Level command query 5 111 SLOP Slope command query 5 112 TRIG Trigger command query 5 112 Process MATH Subsystem Commands 5 115 CARR Set Carrier Control command query 5 118 CFR Carrier Frequency command query 5 119 xviii Chapter 5 COMMAND REFERENCE Continued Appendix A HP IB INTERCONNECTION Table of Contents CSL Linear Carrier Frequency Slope command query 5 119 CST Linear Carrier Starting Frequency command query 5 120 PCOM Phase Computation command query 5 120 SOUR Source command query 5 121 CREF Clear Reference command 5 121 High Limit command query
327. me data points are determined as follows w for Frequency all points whose frequency is less than 1 5 of the maximum frequency are considered to be off time data points and are rejected m for PRI all points whose average period is greater than 5 times the minimum average period are considered to be off time data points and are rejected CFR Carrier Frequency command query CSL Linear Carrier Frequency Slope command query Command Reference The CARRier query returns the current Carrier Frequency determination mode Parameters PULSe CW MANual LINear Examples OUTPUT 703 PROC CARR CW Selects automatic Carrier Frequency determination from measurement data OUTPUT 703 PROC CARR Queries for the current Carrier Frequency determination mode Comments Refer to chapter 3 Special Purpose Measurements for a description of the Phase Deviation Time Deviation and Frequency Deviation measurement functions Shortform Carrier FRequency Longform CFREQUENCY Use the CFRequency command to specify the Carrier Frequency for the Manual mode Carrier Frequency manually CARRier parameter is set to MANual The CFRequency query returns the current Manual mode Carrier Frequency value Range Hz 1E 12 to 1E 10 Examples OUTPUT 703 PROC CFR 3 14E 6 Sets the Carrier Frequency to 3 14 MHz OUTPUT 703 PROC CFR Queries for the current Carrier Frequency value Shortform CS
328. me interval detector The PXSLope query returns the current pre trigger external arm slope Parameter POSitive NEGative Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS PXSL POS Sets pre trigger arming to occur on a positive edge OUTPUT 703 MEAS PXSL Queries for the current pre trigger external arm slope Shortform SAMP SAMPle arm sublevel Longform SAMPLE The SAMPle command selects the arming mode sublevel for selecting sampling arming conditions for continuous gating measurements or stop arming conditions for non continuous gating measurements After SAMPle is selected four subcommands CHANnel Delay CHannel DELay value and SLOPe can be used to configure various sample or stop arming conditions Example OUTPUT 703 MEAS SAMP Selects the SAMPle arm sublevel for setting up sample arm or stop arm conditions The Sample Arm Sublevel command has four subcommands CHANnel Delay CHannel DELay value and SLOPe These subcommands are described below Shortform CHAN arming CHANnel Longform CHANNEL The CHANnel command for the sample arm sublevel selects the input channel to be the source of the sampling or stop arming signal 5 95 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 96 DCH Delay Channel command query The CHANnel query returns the currently selected arming source for sample arming or stop arming Parameters Examples Shortform Longform A B EXTernal X OUTPUT 703 MEAS
329. me stamp 3 110 Binary Output Format 11 EXPANDED MEASUREMENT CHANNEL S DATA ARMING MODES Totalize A B ON OFF Interval Sampling Edge Sampling Edge Interval Edge Edge How Signals are Converted to Binary Data Example Totalize Channel A Interval Sampling BLOCK ARMED N Chon MEASUREMENT INTERVAL First Data Copture First Data Capture i Second Data Capture Figure 11 A Totalize Measurement on Channel A with Interval Sampling Arming Mode Showing Corresponding Binary Output BINARY DATA WENO Producing Results Totalize results are generated by calculating elapsed events between contiguous valid samples As diagrammed above the instrument makes two attempts to capture valid data for each sample Your program must use the status bits provided to merge the data from each pair of attempts into a single valid sample then process the set of valid samples Expanded Data for Totalize measurements is Measurement Gate Time Gate Time is generated by calculating elapsed time between samples 3 111 HP 5373A Programming Manual Binary Data Output F 2 eere M Normal Mode Bits 16 5 A Kos Mode Bie 16 I 11 Figure 11 B Format 11 Binary Output Format 11 binary output is shown in Figure 11 B above Each sample generates the binary data described below EVENT instrument s first attempt at capture of a valid event datum UNUSED FIELD INT status bits only
330. measurement Format bytes 10 ASSIGN Hp5373a TO 703 OUTPUT Hp5373a PRES OUTPUT Hp5373a REM PRESET REMOTE OUTPUT Hp5373a SMODE SING SINGLE MEASUREMENT MODE OUTPUT Hp5373a INP MOD COM COMMON INPUTS OUTPUT Hp5373a INT OUTP BIN 1 BINARY OUTPUT OUTPUT Hp5373a MEAS FUNC FREQ FREQUENCY OUTPUT Hp5373a MSIZE amp VAL Block_size IF Gate_time THEN OUTPUT Hp5373a ARM ISAM 1 INTERVAL SAMPLING OUTPUT 6Hp5373a SAMP DEL amp VAL Gate time DELAY GATE TIME END IF INPUT Press RETURN to RE START measurement A OUTPUT 8Hp5373a REST 1 START MEASUREMENT ASSIGN Buff TO BUFFER Data buff DISP Waiting for completion of measurement ENTER Hp5373a USING 8A Header Block size VAL Header 3 DIV Format bytes Tot byte count Format bytes Block size TRANSFER Hp5373a TO Buff COUNT Tot byte count WAIT OUTPUT 5373 1 IN LOCAL OUTPUT Hp5373a INT OUTP ASC 1 SET TO ASCII MODE ENABLE GRAPHICS DISP SUBEND Transfer_data 1 1 SUB Convert_bin72 INTEGER Block size Buff BUFFER REAL Convert bin72 1 Converts binary 5373A data to Frequency and Time arrays COM Constants Format bytes Two expl6 Two exp32 1 1 OUTPUT 5373 1 STATE MENU 1 1 E 22 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 Program Examples INTEGER I Format words REAL TimeO Ti
331. measurement with inhibitted data in locations 5 and 11 The IDAT content will be 2 indicating 2 values to follow 5 11 Example OUTPUT 703 IDAT Queries for the inhibited data list Command Reference KEY Shortform KEY KEY simulation Key Simulation Longform KEY command query The KEY command simulates pressing a front panel key Keys may be pressed in any order Invalid keys are ignored When using this command ensure the instrument is in the desired state before sending a KEY command The key codes and their front panel function equivalents are listed in Table 5 2 The KEY query returns the Key Numbers see Table 5 2 of the last keys pressed including those pressed via a KEY command up to a maximum of 20 numbers If more than 20 keys have been pressed only the last 20 key presses are returned those before the last 20 are lost If no keys have been pressed such as after power up or if a PRESet is performed the KEY query returns NONE The KEY query does not report pressing of the front panel Local key however KEY will report that key s number 65 if it was pressed via a KEY command Table 5 2 Key Number Assignments Key Number Key Function Key Number Key Function 1 23 30 31 not used 53 EXP 24 softkey 1 54 BACKSPACE 25 softkey 2 55 LAST VALUE 26 56 UP cursor 27 softkey 4 57 RIGHT cursor
332. mebase cycles at a rate of 2 ns cycle D 4 Programming the Arming Modes Table D 2 Arming Mode Programming Commands Continued Arming Sublevel Delay Arming Mode Command SLOPe DELay CHannel 19 Edge Parity STAR POS NEG EDP 20 Edge Random STAR POS NEG EDR 21 Time Interval STAR POS NEG 2 ns TINT SAMP 10 us 22 Time Time 5 5 2 ns TTIM SAMP 1 5 2 25 23 Event Interval POS 1 event EVIN SAMP 10 us 24 Event Event STAR POS NEG B 1 event A B EVEV SAMP 10 events A B 25 Manual Conventions used in Table D 2 Table D 2 shows the commands to program the arming modes This list of items explains the terms used in the table 1 The programming shortform for each of the arming modes is listed in the left column 2 In the column called Arming Sublevel Command STAR is the shortform for START and SAMP is the shortform for SAMPLE 3 programming commands are listed across the top of the table in the same order as the menu fields programmed by these commands are displayed on the Function menu 4 Lines in the boxes indicate that the command is not recognized for that particular arming mode sublevel command combination 5 choices are listed Choices in parentheses are default choices The
333. mel EventO0 Eventl Time ovfl Time0 offset Time0 is the previous 32 bit unsigned integer time count Event0 is the event count Timel is the current time count Eventl is the d event count Format words is the number of 16 bit words used for each measurement Time ovfl increments by 2 32 every time the time counters overflow It essentially adds more bits to the time counter This measurement does not need to keep track of cumulative event overflows only relative ones 0 offset is the value of the time counter at time t 0 It is subtracted from every time value This is calculated using the interpolator data which is the lower 5 bits of the 16 bit status interp word Note that the lower 5 bits of the upper 8 bit byte is a duplication of the same data for the FREQUENCY function Format words Format bytes DIV 2 FORMAT IN 16 BIT WORDS Time ovfl 0 REDIMENSION ARRAYS TO ALLOW FOR CONVENIENT INDEXING REDIM Buff 0 Block size 1 1 Format words Time 1 Block size 1 Freq 1 Bl OCk size 1 GOSUB Disp update 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 1 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 l Do GET FIRST EVENT AND TIME VALUES THESE ARE ASSOCIATED WITH TIME 0 Event0 FNGet_4byte_val 0 1 Buff Time0 FNGet_4byte_val 0 3 Buff Time0 offset Time0 2 E 9 Buff 0 5 MOD 32 1 E 10 Use low 5 bits of 1 interpolator data GET FIRST MEASUREM
334. ment a carrier can be any one of m anestimated pulse CW carrier or linear carrier specified manually by entering the slope and starting point or m a manually entered carrier frequency value or m the automatically calculated mean of a block of measurements If the automatic carrier frequency is calculated in the Pulse AUTO mode any measurement that includes off time data is not used in the calculation For more information about carrier frequency determination see Section 5 of this manual 2 Sample is used as a reference edge the first result is generated by manipulation of t2 3 result is negative if the signal lags the reference 3 43 gt 4 gt PSn707 gt 5373A Programming Manual 3 44 Binary Output FORMAT 2B MEASUREMENT CHANNEL S ARMING MODES Edge Holdoff Edge Interval Edge Holdoff Edge Interval Edge Edge Edge Cycle Edge Holdoff Edge Interval Edge Holdoff Edge Interval Edge Holdoff Edge Interval Continuous Time Interval ON Frequency PRI Period B C ON OFF Phase Deviation A B ON OFF Time Deviation A B Frequency Deviation A B ON OFF How Signals Are Converted to Binary Data Example Frequency B Edge Holdoff TIME STAMP OF BLOCK ARMING EDGE BINARY DATA Figure 2B A Frequency Measurement on Cha
335. ment function For Histogram functions HCTinterval HPMtTinterval HTIMe the output is histogram data refer to the OHIStogram command for more information about histogram output For all other functions the output is the list of measurement results as described in Chapter 2 The ODATa query is useful for retrieving measurement results any time after the measurement has completed In many situations ODATa is unnecessary because the HP 5373A automatically makes the measurement results available upon measurement completion The value of is that it provides a user directed method for requesting measurement results OHIS Output Histogram Result query only PLOCation Pre trigger Location query only PLOT Plot Screen command Command Reference Use ODAT2 with ASCII or Floating Point output formats If no results are available when ODATa executes a zero is returned 6000000 for floating point ASCII 0 for ASCII Example OUTPUT 703 ODA Ta Queries for measurement data Shortform OHIS Output HlIStogram result Longform OHlStogram The OHIStogram query returns the histogram result over HP IB It can be used to obtain hardware or software produced histograrn results Either ASCII or floating point output formats may be used The content of the OHIS query is dependent on the selected histogram format see HPFORmat command in Interface section of this chapter Example OUTPUT 703 OHI
336. ming parameter changes have occurred Type Momentary Associated With Parameter Status Coupling This message occurs when Fast Measurement mode is selected causing an out of limits condition for the interval sample value 131 ysec is the maximum interval sample value allowed in Fast Measurement mode Type Momentary Associated With Measurement Status This message occurs when the ABORT HP IB command is received or the Abort MANUAL ARM key is pressed while a measurement is in progress and enough samples have been taken to give at least one valid measurement result The Abort command is valid only when the HP 5373A is in Single Sample mode Type Static Status Associated With Measurement This message occurs when Inhibit mode is activated and at least one measurement in the last acquisition sequence was inhibited Type Momentary Associated With Measurement Status This message occurs when the ABORT HP IB command is received or the Abort MANUAL ARM key is pressed while a measurement is in progress and not enough samples have been taken to give at least one valid measurement result The Abort command is valid only when the HP 53734 is in Single mode C 11 HP 5373A Programming Manual No digits specified C 12 entry aborted Non numeric key ignored Not in Talk only Number must be positive Numeric entry aborted Out of Range see Meas mode on System menu Type Momentary Asso
337. ming Manual To produce valid time stamps your program must 1 Correct the binary time data for counter rollovers 2 Incorporate interpolator data 3 Correct for differences in electrical path lengths between block arming channel and signal channel PRODUCING VALID EVENT STAMPS Correcting Event Data for Counter Rollovers With the exception of the first sample in each block successive valid event counts increase monotonically An overflow processing routine must scan the event data for any datum which is both valid not associated with the first sample in the block and which is smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Event Overflow Correction value to that datum and to all subsequent data then continue with the scan An example is given in Technical Note 3 Event Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Channel C Correction When making measurements on Channel C the event counter sees only one out of every four input events To correct for this multiply event data by four This must be done after correcting for counter rollovers PRODUCING VALID TIME STAMPS Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers Binary time data increases monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred The first sample in each block is not an exception to this rule An overflow processing routine must scan the time data for any datum smaller than its immediate predecessor
338. mple a value of 36 indicates that bit 2 Query Error and bit 5 Command Error are set to 1 Upon reading the Event Status Register all bits in the register are cleared set to 0 Example OUTPUT 703 ESR Queries for the contents of the Event Status Register and clears the register 5 29 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 30 HSE Hardware Status Enable command query HSR Hardware Status Register query only Shortform HSE Hardware Status Enable Longform HSE The HSE command is used to set selected bits of the Hardware Status Enable register An enabled set to 1 bit in the Enable register is ANDed with its corresponding bit in the Hardware Status Register to generate a Service Request if an enabled condition occurs To enable the register bits send the HSE command with an integer parameter range 0 to 255 representing the binary weighted values of the bits to be set For example to set bits 2 and 4 send the decimal integer 20 4 16 as the parameter The HSE query returns an integer NR1 format that is the decimal equivalent of the binary weighted values of the bits that are currently set to 1 Refer to Chapter 2 for information about the Hardware Status Register and Hardware Status Enable Register Range 0 to 255 Examples OUTPUT 703 HSE 80 Sets bits 4 and 6 of the Hardware Status Enable Register thus enabling bit 4 Time Base Error and bit 6 Power On Failure of the Hardw
339. mples which initiate blocks may be embedded in the output data Totalize Status 1 Totalize Status 2 The Totalize function requires that data be captured by making two attempts at each sample One attempt will be valid data The other will not Bit 13 Totalize Status 1 TS1 and bit 14 Totalize Status 2 TS2 are used only for Totalize measurements Bit 13 is used in Totalize formats 11 13 14 and 15 Bit 14 is used in formats 12 13 and 15 These bits indicate which sample contains a valid event count If the bit is 1 the second attempt at data capture represents the valid event datum If the bit is 0 the first attempt at data capture is valid Use of bit 13 and or 14 is specified where necessary for each binary format at the back of this chapter The HP 5373A has been designed to include Fast mode a data transmission mode tailored to users who need very high speed binary data delivery along with a faster sample interval 75 ns In Fast mode the HP 5373A collects fewer bits of data with each sample but collects samples much more quickly Specifically time and event fields in Fast mode contain 16 bits of data In Normal mode these fields contain 32 bits The size of the Interpolator Status Field is unchanged 16 bits The use of 16 bits to count events limits the HP 5373A to toa maximum count of 65 536 216 events prior to counter rollover Thus to be unambiguously interpreted there must be no more than 65 536 input eve
340. mum count to minimum count every 4 294 967 296 counts Time data is also a four byte 32 bit unsigned binary number which comes from the time counter It represents the cumulative count of the HP 5373A 500 MHz time base In most cases whenever an event datum occurs you will get a corresponding time datum The output of the time counter can be thought of as a clock which gives you the time of occurrence for each timed event Time data increases monotonically and rolls over goes from maximum count to minimum count every 4 294 967 296 counts or once about every 8 59 seconds The 16 bit Interpolator Status Field is shown in Figure 3 5 It provides space for interpolator data and four status bits The 16 bit field is delivered most significant byte first during binary output STATUS BITS Binary Output 5 4 0 INTERPOLATOR DATA TOTALIZE STATUS 4 TOTALIZE STATUS 2 BLOCK START INHIBIT Figure 3 5 16 bit Interpolator Status Field Interpolator Data Interpolator Data is a 5 bit unsigned binary number This number represents the number of 0 1 nanosecond intervals which have occurred between a timed event count and the next 500 MHz clock pulse Interpolator time data is computed by multiplying the interpolator output by 0 1 nanoseconds The high resolution result is subtracted from its associated time datum to produce a time stamp These instructions are repeated for each format For more detail see paragraph en
341. must be used to select channel before the SOURce query can be used RRINP N3 MODe separator Figure 5 11 INPut Subsystem Syntax Diagram 5 105 5373A Programming Manual CSOURce separator A ATTenuation 9 separator 7 x separator T ECL gt HYSTeresis separator I 4 MAXimum separator ltrigger level voltage org e separator mftrigger level percent arg separator POSitive gt NEGative SLOPe TRiGger separator MANuai gt TRIGger RRSOURNS Figure 5 12 SOURce Sublevel Syntax Diagram 5 106 CATT Input C Channel Attenuation command query MOD Input Mode command query Command Reference Shortform CATT input C Channel ATTenuation Longform CATTEN The CATTen command sets the C channel attenuation This command differs from the A and B channel attenuation commands which are set by keyword Instead the CATTen setting is expressed as a percentage A reading of 0 means that the minimum amount of attenuation is set 100 means the maximum setting is seet The CATTen query returns the value of the current C channel attenuation setting Range 0 100 in 5 increments Examples OUTPUT 703 INP CATT 50 Sets the C channel attenuation to 50 OUTPUT 703 INP CATT Queries for the current C channel attenuation se
342. n OUTPUT 703 GRAP TVAR YMSC Queries for the current Y axis Manual Scaling status Shortform UPD UPDate mode Longform UPDATE Use the UPDate command to set the graphic update mode to update the display after each data acquisition pass WHILe or after the final pass AFTer Accordingly the command only applies to multiple pass measurements The UPDate query returns the currently selected Update mode Parameters WHILe AFTer Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP UPD WHIL Sets graph updating to occur after each pass OUTPUT 703 GRAP UPD Queries for the current Update mode VCH View Channel command query XVAL Get X axis Value query only YSC Y axis Scale command query Command Reference Shortform VCH View CHannel Longform VCHANNEL Use the VCHannel command to select the View Channel for dual channel dual result measurements These measurements are Frequency Period or Totalize A amp B B amp C or A amp C VCHannel query returns the currently selected View Channel Parameters A Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP VCH A Selects channel A as the view channel OUTPUT 703 Queries for the current view channel selection Shortform XVAL X axis VALue Longform XVALUE TheXVALue query returns the current X value for Marker or Delta Marker Display Mode Values Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP XVAL Queries for the current Marker or D
343. n addition it can operate as a Talk Only instrument and will respond to serial poll It will unlisten if addressed as a talker The HP 5373A cannot function as an extended talker The HP 5373A can function as a listener In addition it will untalk if addressed as a listener Capability permitting a device to asynchronously request service from the controller Remote Local RL Capability to select between two sources of input information local front panel controls and remote input information from the bus Parallel Poll PP Provides capability for a device to uniquely identify itself if it requires service and the controller is requesting a response This capability differs from service request in that it requires a commitment of the controller to periodically conduct a parallel poll LEO The HP 5373A cannot function as an extended listener SR1 The HP 5373A can generate service request The HP 5373 can operate both in remote and local modes In addition it can respond to local lockout PPO The 5373A does not support parallel poll 2 4 HP IB General Information Table 2 1 HP 5373A HP IB Interface Function Capabilities Continued Name and General Subset Specific HP 5373A Mnemonic Description Identifier Capability Device Clear DC This function allows a device to DCI The 5373A supports both the be in
344. nded Data for Totalize measurements is Measurement Gate Time Gate Times are generated by calculating elapsed time between valid start time stamps and valid stop time stamps Gate Time corrected stop time stamp start time stamp 3 126 Binary Output Format 15 EXPANDED DATA ON OFF MEASUREMENT CHANNEL S ARMING MODES Dual Ratio Sum and Difference of A and Totalize Externally Gated How Signals are Converted to Binary Data Example Totalize A and B Externally Gated I MEASUREMENT O 3 Q 2 5 EXT ARM Start Stop 1 First Data Capture 4 First Data Capture e INT Stop iSecond Dala Capture EPUM Start Data Capture DOO BNARY DATA Figure 15 A Totalize Measurement on Channels A and B with Externally Gated Arming Mode Showing Corresponding Binary Output Producing Results Totalize results are generated by calculating elapsed events between a valid start sample and a valid stop sample As shown above in Figure 15 A the HP 5373A makes two attempts to capture valid data for each sample Your program must use the status bits provided to merge the data from each pair of attempts into a single valid sample Then process the set of valid samples 3 127 gt gt HP 5373A Programming Manual EXPANDED DATA Expanded Data for Totalize measuremen
345. ng BLOCK ARMED a SAMPLE SAMPLE ARMED WARMED WEIN gt BINARY DATA Figure 2A A Frequency Measurement on Channel A with Edge Sampling Arming Mode Showing Corresponding Binary Data Output Producing Results Continuous Time Interval results are generated by calculating elapsed time between contiguous samples 3 39 gt HP 5373A Programming Manual PRF Frequency PRI and Period results are generated by calculating both elapsed time and elapsed events between samples then taking the appropriate quotient elapsed events or Frequency elapsed time PRI or Period elapsed events Phase Deviation Time Deviation and Frequency Deviation results are generated by use of a special algorithm The algorithm and an explanatory diagram are included at the end of this format section EXPANDED DATA Expanded Data for Continuous Time Interval measurements is Missed Events Missed Events are trigger events which fall between samples but which are not time stamped See the Glossary in this chapter for more details The formula for calculating Missed Events is Missed Events elapsed events between samples 1 Expanded Data for PRF Frequency PRI and Period measurements is Measurement Gate Time Gate Time is generated by calculating elapsed time between samples Binary Data Output 32 Normal Mode Bits 32 16 F
346. nly Command Reference nn Note that two sets of quotation marks are required for sending the display string within the command string Examples OUTPUT 703 DSP Hello Displays Hello on the status line of the display Examples OUTPUT 703 DSP Queries the status line of the display Shortform ERRor Longform ERROR This query returns the next error number from the error queue The HP 5373A has an error queue that is 16 errors deep and operates on a first in first out basis Successively sending the ERRor query returns error numbers in the order that they occurred until the queue is empty Any further queries then return 0 until another error is detected See Appendix C for a list of error numbers and a description of each error Example OUTPUT 703 ERR Queries the HP 5373A for the next error number in the error queue Shortform HOVer Histogram measurements OVer the upper histogram limit Longform HOVER The HOVer query returns the number of histogram measurements that were over the upper histogram limit A is returned if no Histogram data is available Example OUTPUT 703 HOV Queries for the number of measurements that were over the upper histogram limit Shortform HUNDer Histogram measurements UNDer the lower histogram limit Longform HUNDER The HUNDer query returns the number of histogram measurements that were under the the lower histogram
347. nnel B with Edge Holdoff Arming Mode Showing Corresponding Binary Data Output Producing Results For all five functions the first sample in each block is unique it captures time of occurrence for the block arming edge No event data is provided for this sample Subsequent samples generate standard measurement results 3 45 pZ707 HP 5373A Programming Manual Continuous Time Interval results are generated by calculating elapsed time between contiguous samples PRF Frequency PRI and Period results are generated by calculating both elapsed time and elapsed events between samples then taking the appropriate quotient Avoid accidental misuse of the first sample in each block The formulas are elapsed events or Frequency elapsed time PRI or Period wees une elapsed events Phase Deviation Time Deviation and Frequency Deviation results are generated by use of a special algorithm The algorithm and an explanatory diagram are included at the end of this format section EXPANDED DATA Expanded Data for PRF Frequency PRI and Period measurements is Measurement Gate Time Gate Time is generated by calculating elapsed time between samples Expanded Data for Continuous Time Interval measurements is Missed Events Missed Events are defined as trigger events which are counted between samples but which are not time stamped See Glossary in this chapter for more details Avoid accidental misuse of the
348. nnel trigger events which are counted between stop samples but which are not time stamped See the Glossary in this chapter for more details The formula is Missed Stop Channel Events elapsed stop channel events between successive stops 1 3 77 zx0m HP 5373A Programming Manual Binary Data Output gt EH Pur gt EXP CIO AW Normal Mode Bits Fast Mode Bits 32 Figure 6 Format 6 Binary Output Format 6 binary output is shown in Figure 6 B above Each measurement consists of two samples start and stop Input channels associated with start and stop data must be identified See Technical Note 4 for information on how to determine the correct start and stop channels Each pair of samples each measurement generates the set of binary data described below UNUSED FIELD UNUSED FIELD TIME start sample time of occurrence INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit STOP CHANNEL EVENT binary event count on the stop channel UNUSED FIELD TIME stop sample time of occurrence INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps gt n B BQ 22 Figure 6 C Format 6 Binary Output The binary data stream shown above was derived f
349. nt 5 79 Arming mode programming commands D 5 Arming modes ASCII measurement result ASCII Alphnumeric Examples ASCII Limits Examples ASCII Measurement result format HS ASCII Numeric Examples ASCII Statistics Examples ASCI SHINES a putre eb y e pr ee BEND query System format m Cable connection HP IB 1 CANCel command System 5 9 CARRier 5 118 CATT command input 5 107 CLEar command System 5 10 Clearing enable registers at power on 5 32 Command alpha format block format delimiters 21 oerte error queue query general formatting rules longform maximum length maximum length HP 85 mnemonics cso ciem mnemonics alternate numeric format 2 2 2 2220222 2 4 SROPHOM acoso ee e bae Er Cei Strings structure system sublevel terminatOrs Command structure illustrated and described 4 1 Commands detailed descriptions of 5 1 Conditions for Remote to Local 2 15 Connecting the HP 5373A to a controller
350. nt Status Enable command query ESR Event Status Register query only Command Reference Shortform ESE Event Status Enable Longform ESE The ESE command is used to set selected bits of the Event Status Enable register An enabled set to 1 bit in the Enable register is ANDed with its corresponding bit in the Event Status Register to generate a Service Request if an enabled condition occurs To enable the register bits send the ESE command with an integer parameter range 0 to 255 representing the binary weighted values of the bits to be set For example to set bits 2 and 4 send the decimal integer 20 4 16 as the parameter The 5 query returns an integer NR1 format that is the decimal equivalent of the binary weighted values of the bits that are currently set to 1 Refer to chapter 2 for information about the Event Status Register and Event Status Enable Register Range 0 to 255 Examples OUTPUT 703 ESE 36 Sets bits 2 and 5 of the Event Status Enable register thus enabling bit 2 Query Error and bit 5 Command Error of the Event Status Register OUTPUT 703 ESE Queries for the contents of the Event Status Enable register Shortform ESR Event Status Register Longform ESR The ESR query returns the contents of the Event Status Register The value returned is an integer NR1 format that is the decimal equivalent of the binary weighted values of the register bits For exa
351. nter rollover These algorithms are simplified to more clearly describe the rollover correction process When you write your data collection and reduction program you may wish to devise more efficient algorithms For example an overflow correction routine will execute faster if the accumulated number of rollovers is multiplied by the Overflow Correction value and added to each datum before it is tested for rollover Event Overflow Correction Values Normal Mode 32 bit data fields Required Overflow Add 4 294 967 296 Correction for 232 to all event data event data after rollover Time Overflow Correction Values Normal Mode 32 bit data fields Required Overflow Add 4 294 967 296 Correction for 232 to all time data time data after rollover Fast Mode 16 bit data fields Add 65 536 216 to all event data after rollover Fast Mode 16 bit data fields Add 65 536 216 to all time data after rollover 3 133 HP 5373A Programming Manual 3 134 Binary Output TECHNICAL NOTE 2 Maximum and Maximum Values Normal Mode Fast Mode 32 bit data fields 16 bit data fields Maximum value 2 147 483 647 32 767 Qn 1 25 1 Maximum value 2 147 483 647 32 767 3 135 5373A Programming Manual 3 136 Binary Output TECHNICAL NOTE 3 Rollover Processing Routines This Technical Note contains example rollover processing routines for each Binary Format The examples can be used
352. nterpolator Data 3 54 HP 5373A Programming Manual Chapter 3 Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length BINARY OUTPUT Between Block Arming Channel and Signal 3 54 Continued Generating Final Function Results from Time Stamps and Event Stamps 3 55 Continuous Time Interval Results 8 55 Frequency PRI and Period Results 3 55 Lr DE 3 57 How Signals are Converted to Binary Data 3 57 Producing Results 3 57 Binary Data 3 58 Converting Binary Data to Time Stamps 3 58 Producing Valid Time Stamps 3 58 Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers 3 58 Incorporating Interpolator Data 3 59 Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between the Start and Stop Channels Generating Final Function Results From Time Stamps 4 How Signals are Converted to Binary Data Producing Results Binary Data Output Converting Binary Data to Time Producing Valid Time Stamps Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers
353. nts between samples The use of 16 bits to count time data allows the HP 5373A to count for a maximum time of 131 072 us prior to counter rollover Thus for time data to be unambiguously interpreted incoming signals must be sampled at least once every 131 072 Further restrictions are imposed on Formats 4B 5B 10B and 10D For these formats elapsed time must not exceed 65 If samples occur at a slower rate you will not be able to compute correct measurement results Pre trigger Binary Output A thorough introduction to the Pre trigger feature is provided in Chapter 10 of the HP 5373A Operating Manual We suggest you read that material so you may more easily relate the information below to the task of reducing binary output data Important characteristics of Pre triggered acquisitions are m The instrument monitors the data stream for Pre trigger event During the monitoring phase samples are stored to memory but are not output to the binary Bus m When the Pre trigger event is detected the capture window is positioned about the Pre trigger event Samples falling within the capture window are recovered from memory and delivered as binary output data m The capture window is wide enough to recover at least 1 block s worth of samples For example Measurement PRF or frequency Channel A Arming Automatic Single block of 10 measurements The capture window is 11 samples wide m If one Pre trigger event oc
354. nts in block N passed Measurements continuing OUTPUT Hp5373a REST 1Start a new measurement END IF END LOOP 1 Srq 1 An SRQ caused the program to branch here OFF INTR 7 PRINT SRQ generated by HP 5373A PRINT Test bit SPOLL 8Hp5373a ISerial Poll to clear SRQ IF BIT Test bit 0 THEN 1Bit 0 goes high because of Hardware Status IRegister activity DISP iClear display line PRINT Hardware Status Register enabled SRQ PRINT OUTPUT Hp5373a HSR 1Query the Hardware Status Register contents ENTER 8Hp5373a Hsr value Put the contents in Hsr value PRINT Hardware Status Register returned a value of Hsr value IF BIT Hsr value 7 THEN If bit 7 then measurement is out of limit INote Other bits may also be set Consult ithe manual for details PRINT PRINT Hardware Status Register Bit 7 set See manual for other Bits PRINT PRINT Measurement out of limit END IF ELSE DISP Measurement error END IF END Program Examples PRINT PLOT Example Program This program demonstrates using a computer to access the printer and plotter dump features of the HP 5373A Modulation Domain Pulse Analyzer The program also demonstrates the use of the Hardware Status Register and Service Request Enable Register to determine when a print or plot is done the HP 5373A communicates this fact via SRQ Make a measurement using the front panel of the instrument set the instrument s display to be as you want to se
355. o produce valid time stamps 1 Correct the binary data for counter rollovers T 13 2 Incorporate interpolator data Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers Binary time data increases monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred An overflow processing routine must scan the time data for any datum which is smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Time Overflow Correction value to that datum and all subsequent time data then continue the scan An example is given in Technical Note 3 Time Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Incorporating Interpolator Data The algorithm for producing time stamps from binary time data and binary interpolator data is time stamp time datum 2 ns interpolator datum x 0 1 ns Generating Final Function Results From Time Stamps and Event Stamps Totalize results are generated for each channel by calculating elapsed events between valid event stamps Channel A result Channel event stamp 1 Channel A event stamp Channel B result Channel B event stamp Channel B event stamp The measurement may require that these independent results be combined for example A B If this is required results are combined algebraically measurement by measurement For example Totalize A B result Channel A result Channel B result Expanded Data for Totalize measurements is Meas
356. ocessed results HLIMit values are set for each channel separately 5 121 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 122 LIM Limit Testing command query Positive Range 1E 34 lt n lt 1E 34 and 0 Negative Range 1 34 lt n lt 1 34 Resolution 1E 34 The HLIMit query returns the value of the current High Limit The value is returned in exponential form NR3 format Examples OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR A HLIM 1E 9 Sets the High Limit value to 1 10 for limit testing of Channel A results OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR B HLIM Queries for the current High Limit value for Channel B Shortform LIM LIMit testing Longform LIMIT The LIMit command selects the limit test mode for setting upper and lower limits on the processed results Both upper and lower limits can be specified using the HLIMit and LLIMit commands When a result falls outside the set limits this will be indicated on the display and over the HP IB an SRQ is generated if at least one value is out of range In this case the Limit Error bit LME bit 7 in the Hardware Status Register will be set to indicate that a limit error has occurred thus setting the HSB bit bit 0 in the Status Byte The LIMit query returns the current status of the limit testing mode Parameters ON OFF Examples OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR A LIM ON Enables limit testing mode for Channel A OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR A LIM Queries for Channel A Limit Testing st
357. of a valid Channel A event datum TIME time of occurrence for sample INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Totalize Status 1 bit 13 Totalize Status 2 bit 14 3 128 Binary Output Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps 099 O005 0SI8 Se0s Figure 15 Format 15 Binary Output The binary data stream was derived from the signals shown in Figure 15 A To produce valid event stamps 1 Identify each datum which represents a valid Channel A event count e e 2 Correct the valid Channel A event counts for counter rollovers 3 Identify each datum which represents a valid Channel B event count E or E 4 Correct the valid Channel B event counts for counter rollovers PRODUCING VALID EVENT STAMPS Identifying the Datum Which Represents the Valid Channel A Event Count The Totalize Status 1 Bit TS1 is bit 13 of the Interpolator Status field see Interpolator Status Field under Special Topics at the front of this chapter During two channel Totalize measurements TS1 identifies the datum which represents the valid Channel A event count If TS1 0 use the instrument s first attempt at valid Channel A event data capture This is the valid binary event count If TS1 1 use e the instrument s second attempt at valid Channel A event capture Subtract 1 from the integer represented by e The subtraction results in a val
358. oller mode is requested by the instrument 0 1 Operation Complete OPC High indicates that same parsing is completed 2 23 HP 5373A Programming Manual EVENT STATUS ENABLE REGISTER Reading the Event Status Enable Register Writing to the Event Status Enable Register Clearing the Event Status Enable Register 2 24 STATUS BYTE REGISTER The Event Status Enable Register is a 16 bit register that allows one or more events in the Event Status Register to be reflected in the Event Status Bit ESB summary message Each bit of the Enable register is ANDed with its corresponding bit in the Event Status Register the Enable register bits are ORed to determine the summary ESB message The ESB message appears at bit 5 of the Status Byte Register If ESB is set to 1 and bit 5 of the Status Byte Enable Register is set to 1 an 5 is generated The Event Status Enable Register is read with the ESE query This query returns an integer value representing the sum of the binary weighted values of the register bits as previously described for the Event Status Register For example a returned integer value of 36 32 4 indicates that bit 5 and bit 2 of the Event Status Enable Register are set to 1 thus enabling bit 5 CME Command Error and bit 2 QYE Query Error of the Event Status Register The Event Status Enable Register is written to with the ESE command The numeric argument of this command must
359. ommand clears the key queue but does not clear the error queue Example OUTPUT 703 RST Resets the HP 5373A to default conditions Shortform SAV SAVe register Longform SAV The SAV command saves an instrument setup to a specified save recall register This command performs the same function as the front panel SAVE key All instrument settings except the HP IB configuration are saved Registers 1 through 9 may be specified Register 0 cannot be specified because it is reserved for automatically storing the instrument setup that existed just prior to invoking the PRESet or DMSetup functions Register 0 can be recalled refer to the RCL command description for information about recalling registers Parameters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Example OUTPUT 703 SA V 1 Saves the current setup in register 1 Shortform SRE Service Request Enable Longform SRE The SRE command sets the bits of the Service Request Enable register The command must be sent with a decimal number representing the binary weighted values of the bits to be set For example sending SRE 32 sets bit 5 of the register to 1 5 33 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 34 STB Read Status Byte query only TRG Trigger command thus enabling bit 5 Event Status Bit of the Status Byte register to generate a Service Request if an event occurs The SRE query returns the value of the bits in the Service Request Enable regist
360. ommand is equivalent to the front panel SINGLE REPET key function When you select the REPetitive sample mode the instrument makes measurements as quickly as possible Selecting the SINGle sample makes the instrument hold off a measurement indefinitely until 5 25 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 26 SUBS Subsystem query only triggered In this case the instrument displays the previous measurement and halts until one of the following occurs m The 5373A receives the TRG or GET Group Execute Trigger command This is available via HP IB only The HP 5373A receives the RESTart or PRESet commands This is available via HP IB or Front Panel The SMODe query returns the currently selected Sample Mode Parameters SINGle REPetitive Examples OUTPUT 703 SMOD SING Tells the HP 5373A to display previous measurement and halt until triggered OUTPUT 703 SMOD Queries for the currently selected sample mode Shortform SUBS SUBSystem Longform SUBS The SUBSystem query returns the currently selected subsystem The string returned is one of the following DIAG Diagnostics subsystem Graphic subsystem INP Input subsystem INT Interface subsystem IST Instrument State subsystem MEAS Measurement subsystem NUM Numeric subsystem PROC Process subsystem Example OUTPUT 703 SUBS Queries the HP 5373A for the currently active subsystem
361. ommand query 5 68 YMIN Set Y axis Minimum command query 5 69 YMRH Y axis Marker Range Hold command 5 70 YMSC Y axis Manual Scale command query 5 70 UPD Set Update Mode 5 70 VCH View Channel command query 5 71 XVAL Get X axis Value query only 5 71 YSC Y axis Scale command query 5 71 YVAL Get Y axis Value query only 5 72 ZOOM Zoom Graph 5 72 Measurement Subsystem 48 5 73 ARM Arming 5 79 BLOC Block Size command query 5 80 DET Time Interval Detect command query 5 80 DLOW Detector Lower Threshold command query 5 81 DMID Detector Middle Threshold command query 5 81 DUPP Detector Upper Threshold command query 5 82 HP 5373A Programming Manual Chapter 5 FUNC Function command query 5 82 COMMAND REFERENCE HBIN Histogram Bin Width command query 5 84 Continued HBL Histogram Block command query HCEN Histogram Center command query Histogram Span command query HST Histogram Start command query
362. on in the instrument They will clear automatically after three seconds These are warning messages to alert you to an illegal operation that was attempted They will clear automatically after three seconds Examples of actions that generate a Momentary Warning Message are pressing an undefined softkey or pressing a non numeric key while entering a numeric value An error number will be placed in the Error Queue for each Momentary Warning Message Static errors convey improper operating states or errors generated by HP IB Pressing a valid key clears these errors HP IB errors are cleared on the transition from REMOTE to LOCAL Examples of Static Errors are sending an invalid HP IB command or attempting to query the instrument while it is in Binary output mode An error number will be placed in the Error Queue for each Static Error Message These are failures which prevent the instrument from operating properly They convey catastrophic hardware related failure conditions Static failures must be acknowledged by pressing the RESTART key or by correcting the failure condition Examples of Static Failures are applying too much voltage to the Channel A or B input pods or neglecting to power down the instrument before removing one of the input pods An error number will be placed in the Error Queue for each Static Failure Message The Error Queue query command ERR allows an HP IB system controller to request the contents of the H
363. onse timeout occurred Result format must be ASCII see System menu Sending output to plotter Sending output to printer Status and Error Messages Type Momentary Associated With Plot Print Status The current plot or print output action in progress has been canceled at user request Type Momentary Associated With Measurement Status This message appears when a block of data has been captured due to a Pre trigger but the point where the Pre trigger occurred precedes the block of data shown Type Momentary Associated With System Operation Warning Error Number 303 This message occurs when the Response Timeout feature is enabled and a measurement is in progress but has not completed within the specified time period The instrument will proceed with the measurement acquisition to completion if possible Momentary Associated With HP IB Status This message occurs when an attempt is made to send data out on the HP IB while in Talk Only and the output format is binary or floating point The output format should be changed to ASCII on the System menu Type Static Status Associated With Plot This message occurs while the current Graphics screen display is being output to the attached plotter Type Static Status Associated With Print This message occurs while the current screen display is being output to the attached printer 13 5373 Programming Manual Source channe
364. ont Panel Interface Status LEDS 2 6 HP IB Address Selection 2 7 Interface Commands 2 8 Device Independent Commands 2 8 Meta Messages Remote Operation Local Mode 2 2 Switching from Local to Remote Operation 2 14 HP IB Default Startup Conditions 2 14 Switching from Remote to Local Operation 2 14 Local Lockout 2 0 0 2 2 2 14 Required Conditions 2 15 Addressing 1 5 pc Stade Ra en 2 15 Receiving the Data Message 2 16 Sending Data Messages 2 16 Receiving the Device Clear Message 2 16 Receiving the Group Execute Trigger Message 2 16 Data 2 16 Status Reporting and Service 2 17 Status Registers 2 19 Status Enabling Registers 2 19 Hardware Status Register 2 20 Reading the Hardware Status Register 2 21 HP 5373A Programming Manual Chapter2 Clearing the Hardwar
365. ontroller 2 15 HP 5373A Programming Manual Receiving the Data Message Sending Data Messages Receiving the Device Clear Message Receiving the Group Execute Trigger Message DATA MESSAGES 2 16 The instrument responds to data messages when set to Remote mode and addressed to listen A complete description of data messages is given in the chapter on HP IB programmin commands Refer to that chapter for syntax and other detailed information The instrument sends data messages when set to Local or Remote modes when addressed to talk or when in the Talk Only mode Measurement results will be available for reading when the HP 5373A is a talker or when queried In response to either the Device Clear message or the Selected Device Clear message the HP 5373A Clears the input and output buffers m Resets the command parser to enable parsing of the next message Discards all deferred commands and queries m Terminates any measurement acquisition process The HP 5373A responds to the Group Execute Trigger GET command by triggering a measurement That is the instrument responds exactly as if it had received the TRG or RESTart command to restart a measurement The HP 5373A communicates on the HP IB primarily with data messages The instrument interprets a byte on the eight data lines as a data message when the bus is in the data mode The bus is in the data mode when the Attention ATN control line is
366. or information 2 3 HP 5373A Programming Manual HP 5373A INTERFACE CAPABILITIES messages over the bus The capabilities of a device connected to the bus are specified by the list of interface functions supported These functions provide a way for a device to receive process and send Table 2 1 lists the HP IB interface functions defined by the 488 1978 standard including the name mnemonic and a brief description Also listed in the table are the subset identifiers the interface function mnemonic followed by a number These identifiers indicate the specific HP IB interface function capabilities of the HP 5373A Table 2 1 HP 5373A HP IB Interface Function Capabilities Extended Talker TE Listener L the bus when addressed Talker capability with address extension Capability to receive data over the bus when addressed Extended Listener LE Listener capability with address extension Service Request SR Name and General Subset Specific HP 5373A Mnemonic Description Identifier Capability Source Handshake Capability to properly translate a SH1 The HP 5373 can generate SH multiline message messages Acceptor Capability to guarantee proper 1 The HP 5373A can interpret Handshake AH reception of remote multiline received messages messages Talker T Capability to transmit data over 5 The HP 5373 can function as talker I
367. ore the data in your computer 1 Find the number of your data format in Table 3 1 Be sure to read the short instructions for using Table 3 1 To use the table you must have the following information about your measurement m Expanded Data feature ON or OFF Measurement Function Frequency PRI Period etc Measurement Channel Channel A Channel A gt B etc m Arming Mode Automatic Edge Interval etc Turn to the format indicated in Table 3 1 There you will find the exact binary output format produced by your measurement This is the key information required to write your binary data reduction program Each format section will contain m Output data structures and how they are related to the input signal 3 7 HP 5373A Programming Manual CHARACTERISTICS OF THE BINARY OUTPUT DATA Data Output Specific instructions for generating time and event stamps Formulas for computing measurement results from the time and event stamps Information on how to process Expanded Data information 3 Write program steps to Query the HP 5373A for data Read header string to recognize the beginning of the data stream and set up the proper amount of array space Transfer the binary measurement data to your computer Convert the binary data to a format which is suited for numerical manipulation of large high resolution numbers Process your data to obtain measurement results Each b
368. ou can see the Block Arming Sample may occur anywhere in the capture window but always at the beginning of a block The Block Arming Sample contains a 3 21 HP 5373A Programming Manual 3 22 time datum which is generated by the Block Arming condition and thus is not necessarily correlated with the signal being measured Further the unused field produced in the same sample as the Block Arm time data may contain invalid data Thus your program must recognize the Block Arm time datum and its associated event datum by use of status bit 6 and distinguish this data from the actual measurement data The following set of rules summarizes the use of Block Arming and inter block data when making Pre trigger measurements 1 Identify Block Arming data using Bit 6 of the Interpolator Status field Note that bit 6 of the Interpolator Status Field is 1 when the corresponding sample initiates a block Use this bit to determine the Block Arming time data See paragraph entitled Time Stamps Associated with the Block Arming Edge in this Special Topics section for more details Use the Block Arming time datum the same as other time data to detect counter rollovers Once the time data has been corrected for rollovers set aside the Block Arming time data It cannot be used to compute measurement results Discard data in the unused field associated with Block Arming time data This data cannot be used to compute measurement results
369. ounter rollover is detected Correction for counter rollovers can be accomplished in two scans of the time data A scan correcting for rollovers between start and stop is described first second a scan is described which corrects for rollovers occurring between measurements Correcting for Rollovers Between Start and Stop Counter rollovers which occur between start and stop are detected when subtraction of start data from stop data produces an out of range result If the subtraction produces a number greater than Maximum leave the stop datum uncorrected and add the appropriate Time Overflow Correction to the start datum If the subtraction produces a number smaller than Maximum leave the start datum uncorrected and add the appropriate Time Overflow Correction to the stop datum Add the appropriate Time Overflow Correction value to all subsequent data both start and stop in either case Following correction resume the scan at the next measurement Time Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Values for Maximum and Maximum are given in Technical Note 2 3 75 gt HP 5373A Programming Manual Correcting for Rollovers Between Measurements Once the first scan is complete a second scanning routine detects and corrects for counter rollovers between start stop pairs The first scan leaves the time data in this condition the smallest time value in each pair should be greater than the largest
370. ounter rollovers can be accomplished with two scans of the time data A scan correcting for rollovers which occur between start and stop is described first second a scan is described which corrects for rollovers which occur between measurements 3 63 PJO D gt HP 5373A Programming Manual Correcting for Rollovers Between Start and Stop Counter rollovers which occur between start and stop are detected when subtraction of start data from stop data produces an out of range result If a subtraction produces a number greater than Maximum leave the stop datum uncorrected and add the appropriate Time Overflow Correction to the start datum Make the same correction to all subsequent data both start and stop Following the corrections continue subtracting start data from stop data to detect further rollovers If a subtraction produces a number smaller than Maximum leave the start datum uncorrected and add the appropriate Time Overflow Correction to the stop datum Make the same correction to all subsequent data both start and stop Following the corrections resume the scan at the next start datum Time Overflow Corrections are given in Technical Note 1 Values for Maximum and Maximum are given in Technical Note 2 Correcting for Rollovers Between Measurements Once the first scan is complete a second scanning routine detects and corrects for counter rollovers which occur between start stop pairs The first scan leav
371. out function Parameters ON OFF Examples OUTPUT 703 INT MTST ON Turns on the Measurement Timeout function OUTPUT 703 INT MTST Queries for the current Measurement Timeout status Shortform MTV Measurement Timeout Value Longform MTVALUE The MTValue command is used to set the Measurement Timeout value A time value up to 36000 seconds may be set When the selected timeout value is exceeded a timeout message is displayed on the screen For example if a timeout value of 5 seconds is specified and the total measurement time is 10 seconds a message will be displayed after 5 seconds indicating that the measurement has not yet completed The MTSTatus function must be turned on for the MTValue command to be used The MTValue query returns the current Measurement Timeout value Range 0 seconds to 36000 seconds in 1 second steps Examples OUTPUT 703 INT MTV 100 Sets the HP 5373A Measurement Timeout Value to 100 seconds OUTPUT 703 INT MTV Queries for the Measurement Timeout Value 5 137 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 138 OUTP Output Format command query PSO Print Source command query Shortform OUTP OUTPut format Longform OUTPUT The OUTPut command selects the output format for sending data to the controller Either ASCII Floating Point or Binary can be selected Changing the output format will change subsequent data outputs any data currently in the output buffer
372. overs Producing Valid Time Stamps Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers 5 Incorporating Interpolator Data Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between Start and Stop Channels 3 79 Generating Final Functions Results from Event and Time 3 80 Format B i 3 81 How Signals Are Converted to Binary Data 3 81 Producing Results 3 81 Expanded Data 3 81 Binary Data 3 81 Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps 3 82 Producing Valid Event 8 82 Correcting Event Data for Counter Rollovers 3 82 Producing Valid Time Stamps 3 83 Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers 3 83 Incorporating Interpolator Data 3 83 Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between Start and Stop Channels 3 83 HP 5373A Programming Manual Chapter 3 BINARY OUTPUT Continued Generating Final Function Results From Time Stamps 3 83 Format TOA serere enses aidan whee cies op Sada CV 3 85 How Signals are Converted to Binary Data 3
373. ower On Failure POF High indicates that a power on failure occurred 5 32 Missing Event Error MEE High indicates that time interval 4 16 Time Base Error TBE High indicates that the timebase oscillator is measurement events were lost Channel B Pod BPD High indicates that the Channel B input pod Channel A Pod APD High indicates that the Channel A input Channel B Input Overload BIO High indicates that the Channel B input amplitude exceeds the maximum level out of lock 3 8 has been removed 2 4 pod has been removed 1 2 0 1 Channel A Input Overload AIO High indicates that the Channel A input amplitude exceeds the maximum level 2 20 Reading the Hardware Status Register Clearing the Hardware Status Register HSR Program Example HARDWARE STATUS ENABLE REGISTER HP IB General Information The Hardware Status Register is read with the HSR query This query returns an integer value representing the sum of the binary weighted values of the register bits For example a returned integer value of 68 64 4 means that bit 6 POF Power On Failure and bit 2 APD Channel A Pod of the Hardware Status Register are set to 1 When the Hardware Status Register is read all register bits are cleared The Hardware Status Register is cleared by any one of the following The CLS command m A power on transition m The read operation initiated by the H
374. parts or assemblies These diagnostic functions are identical to those available via the front panel TEST menu A subset of these tests occurs automatically when you set power to ON The syntax diagram for the DIAGnostic TEST subsystem is illustrated in Figure 5 17 This subsystem does not have any sublevel commands sep arator mS seporator test 9 RRDIACN Figure 5 17 DIAGnostic TEST Subsystem Syntax Diagrams 5 139 HP 5373A Programming Manual CONT Continue Test command PAUS Pause Test command STOP Stop Test command 5 140 Shortform CONT CONTinue test Longform CONTINUE The CONTinue command resumes execution of a test suspended by the PAUSe command Example OUTPUT 703 DIAG CONT Continues the last diagnostic test before the PAUSe command Shortform PAUS PAUSe test Longform PAUSE The PAUSe command pauses the currently running test until a CONTinue command is received Example OUTPUT 703 DIAG PAUS Suspends the current diagnostic test Shortform STOP STOP Longform STOP The STOP command terminates the execution of the currently running diagnostic test Example OUTPUT 703 DIAG STOP Terminates the currently running test TEST Run Test command query UFA Run Until Fail command query Command Reference Shortform Longform TEST run TEST TEST
375. pe Momentary Associated With Manual Totalize Status and Envelope Power Measurements Graphics displays are not allowed when the HP 5373A is making Envelope Power Amplitude Modulation or Manually armed Totalize measurements Type Momentary Associated With HP IB Warning Error Number 120 This message occurs if an unsupported HP 5371A Graphics command is sent via HP IB See Appendix F for details on how HP 5371A commands may be translated into equivalent HP 5373A commands Type Momentary Associated With Inhibit function Status When the Inhibit function is activated the requested number of measurements will be made but not all results may be valid The Numeric screen and Graphics displays indicate which measurements have been inhibited during the measurement sequence Type Momentary Associated With HP IB Status This message occurs when an HP IB string of more than 80 characters is entered from the controller The parser truncates the string to the first 80 characters and continues processing Input parameters may have changed Interval sample value changed to 131 us Measurement Aborted Measurement Inhibited Measurement terminated no data Status and Error Messages Type Momentary Associated With Parameter Status Coupling This message occurs when parameters on the Input menu have been changed to resolve conflict with another parameter that has been entered In this case no Arming mode or Ar
376. pecifies 40 lall instrument settings for a particular measurement 50 SET command sends the same information that was received 60 tby the SET query to the instrument thereby remembering the 70 tinstrument setups 80 1 90 SET AND SET COMMANDS SHOULD ONLY BE USED BY THE 100 EXPERIENCED HP IB PROGRAMMER THE SAVE AND RECALL 110 ICOMMANDS ARE EASIER TO USE AND MAY SERVE YOUR NEEDS 120 130 OPTION BASE 1 140 Isc 7 150 Analyzer 703 160 CLEAR Isc 170 OUTPUT Analyzer 180 PRINT MANUALLY SET THE 5373A TO THE DESIRED SETTINGS 190 PRINT PRESS CONTINUE WHEN 5 s 200 PAUSE 210 ASSIGN Analyzer TO 703 FORMAT OFF 220 ASSIGN Setup buffer TO BUFFER 500 230 OUTPUT Analyzer SET 240 ENTER Analyzer USING 5A A 260 TRANSFER Analyzer TO Setup buffer END WAIT 261 STATUS 8Setup buffer 4 Bytes received 270 PRINT MANUALLY CHANGE THE 5373A TO DIFFERENT SETTINGS 280 PRINT PRESS CONTINUE AND CHECK FOR CORRECT SETTINGS 290 PAUSE 300 OUTPUT Analayzer SET 310 Header 3 amp VALS Bytes received 320 CONTROL Setup buffer 5 1 330 OUTPUT Analyzer USING 5A Header 340 TRANSFER 8Setup buffer TO Analyzer 350 PRINT SET COMMAND FINISHED 360 END Figure 5 2 Program Example Using the SET Query SMOD __ Shortform SMOD Sample MODe Sample Mode Longform SMODE command query The SMODe command is used to determine how often the measurement is displayed This c
377. peration of the instrument or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free LIMITATION The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from WARRANTY improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE EXCLUSIVE THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND REMEDIES EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES HP SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY ASSISTANCE Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Hewlett Packard products For any assistance contact your nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office Addresses are provided at the bach of this manual PROGRAMMING MANUAL 5373A Modulation Domain Pulse Analyzer MANUAL APPLICABILITY This manual applies directly to an HP 5373A having the serial number prefix listed below If this number does not match your instrument refer to the Manual Updating Changes included with this manual For additional important information about serial numbers see INSTRUMENTS
378. pper detector threshold value to 4 seconds OUTPUT 703 MEAS DUPP Queries for the currently selected upper detector threshold setting Shortform FUNC FUNCtion Longform FUNCTION The FUNCtion command selects the desired measurement function The possible function selections are listed below PRF FREQuency PRI PERiod TOTalize or TINTerval Time Interval PMTinterval Plus or Minus Time Interval CTINterval Continuous Time Interval RISetime or RTIMe FALLtime or FTIMe Command Reference PWIDth Pulse Width OFFTime Pulse Offtime DUTY or DCYCle Duty Cycle PHASe PDEViation Phase Deviation TDEViation Time Deviation FDEViation Frequency Deviation POWer Envelope Power AMPM AMPlitude Modulation HCTinterval Histogram Continuous Time Interval HPMTime Histogram Plus or Minus Time Interval HTIMe Histogram Time Interval Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS FUNC TOT Sets the HP 5373A function to Totalize OUTPUT 703 MEAS FUNC Queries for the currently selected measurement function NOTE Programming to a new function can modify other instrument states although this only happens if the current setting is unavailable for the new function Refer to Appendix D Arming Modes for a table that lists all the default arming and measurement source settings for each measurement function NOTE The PRF and Frequency function selection commands may be used interchangeably The
379. presented by the second attempt at data capture The valid time data always refers to the second attempt at data capture NOTE Format 11 uses TS1 as the status bit Format 12 uses TS2 as the status bit Format 13 uses TS1 as the channel status bit TS2 as the channel status bit This program assumes use of Format 11 Therefore the status bit used is 51 Rollover routines for Formats 12 and 13 should be changed to use the appropriate status bits The algorithm for the events data is N the number of desired results There are 2 N 1 samples for this format This example uses two one dimensional arrays to hold binary event data and status data The array which holds the event data is structured as follows Data in the odd indices are the first attempt at data capture Data in the even indices are the second attempt at data capture The array which holds the status data is structured as follows Data in the odd indices are unused Data in the even indices hold status data for corresponding samples in the event data array FOR i 2 to 2 N 1 STEP 2 subtracts event i event i 1 11 from every NEXT i tsecond attempt fat data capture FOR 1 1 TON IF 51 2 i THEN valid current sample is second read attempt IF TS1 2 i 2 THEN valid next sample is that pair s second read attempt check second read and second read IF event 2 i 2 lt event 2 i THEN next sample lt than current sample FOR j
380. psed events between valid event stamps Totalize result event stamp event stamp gt Expanded Data for Totalize measurements is Measurement Gate Time Gate Times are generated by calculating the elapsed time between valid time stamps E Gate Time time stamp time stamp 3 114 Binary Output Format 12 MEASUREMENT CHANNEL S ARMING MODES Totalize ON OFF Time Interval How Signals are Converted to Binary Data Example Totalize A Time Interval Arming FT TIME HOLDOFF INTERVAL First Data Capture First Data Capture 7 228869 Second Data Capture 2 Second Data Capture BINARY DATA Fig 12 Totalize Measurement on Channel A with Time Interval Arming Mode Showing Corresponding Binary Output Producing Results Totalize results are generated by calculating elapsed events between contiguous valid samples As diagrammed above the instrument makes two attempts to capture valid data for each sample Your program must use the status bits provided to merge the data from each pair of attempts into a single valid sample then process the set of valid samples EXPANDED DATA Expanded Data for Totalize measurement is Measurement Gate Time Gate Time is generated by calculating elapsed time between samples 3 115 me E N HP 5373A Programming Manual Binary Data Output EVENTS UNUSED UNUSED EVENTS JUNUSED No
381. put Pod as the HP 5373A CHANNEL A Input m Measurement results for Channel A m Measurement results limit test and statistics for Channel A m Measurement results and gate data for Channels A and B The arrays for holding the data from the HP 5373A are dimensioned at the beginning of the program Example Program DIMENSION ARRAYS WHICH WILL BE READING DATA FROM THE 5373A DIM a 10 22 DATA DIM Meas b 10 22 DIM Gate a 10 22 1GATE DATA DIM Gate b 10 22 Limit a 10 5 TEST RESULTS Stats a 10 22 ISTATISTICAL RESULTS Initialize constants Counter 703 Sample size 10 Nr of stats 8 CLEAR Counter OUTPUT Counter PRESET PRESET THE HP 5373A OUTPUT 703 INP MODE COM ICOMMON INPUT CHANNELS OUTPUT Counter SMOD SINGLE ISINGLE SAMPLE MODE OUTPUT Counter MEAS FUNC FREQ ARM ISAM IFREQ INTERVAL SAMPLING OUTPUT Counter SSIZE Sample size ISET SAMPLE SIZE OUTPUT Counter INT OUTPUT ASCII 1OUTPUT FORMAT ASCII OUTPUT Counter MENU NUM ITURN OFF EXPANDED DATA 1 GOSUB 1 _1 1 RESULTS GOSUB Example 2 1MEAS LIMITS STATS RESULTS GOSUB Example 3 1MEAS GATE RESULTS 1 GOTO End of program Example 1 1 E 26 Program Examples 300 Read just measurement results on Channel 310 PRINT 320 PRINT EXAMPLE 1 MEAS RESULTS FOR CHANNEL A 330 TRIGGER Counter 340 1 350 FOR I 1 TO Sample size 1READ MEASURMENT RESULTS 360 ENTER
382. r Status Field Interpolator Status The 16 bit Interpolator Status Field is shown in Figure 3 6 Field This field provides space for interpolator data as well as four status bits and is delivered most significant byte first during binary output INTERPOLATOR DATA The five interpolator bits are numbered 4 through 0 These bits represent a binary number from 0 to 18 Bit 4 is the most significant bit The 5 bit interpolator datum is used to improve resolution on its associated time datum The interpolator datum represents an even number of 100 picosecond intervals bit 0 is always 0 The Interpolator datum is multiplied by 100 ps to obtain a correction value then subtracted from its associated time datum to produce a time stamp For example if the binary Interpolator datum is 00110 0 6 ns must be subtracted from the associated time datum to form the time stamp STATUS BITS Inhibit Bit 5 indicates whether Inhibit was asserted prior to the current sample If Inhibit was asserted and at least one sample 3 17 HP 5373A Programming Manual 3 18 Fast Mode was discarded as a consequence the Inhibit bit is set to 1 With no Inhibit bit 5 is 0 Block Start Bit 6 when set to 1 indicates that the current sample is the first sample in the block otherwise bit 6 is 0 Bit 6 information is particularly useful with multiple block acquisitions or multiple block Pre triggered acquisitions During these types of acquisitions sa
383. rallel poll capability Each device on the interface bus may have one or more of the following major device capabilities Controller Talker or Listener The Controller manages interface activity and must have the applicable interface module Controllers transmit all device independent commands to other devices in the interface and usually have Talker and Listener capabilities Only one device on the interface may be the active controller at any one time The HP 5373A has no controller capabilities Talkers are devices that can send data or device dependent commands through the interface Note that a talker will not actually send data or information until the appropriate command is sent by the controller The HP 5373A has Talker capabilities When the instrument is talking on the interface or is addressed to talk the TLK LED on the front panel lights In special situations a device may be classified as a Talk Only device A Talk Only device sends information to Listen Always devices or any devices addressed to listen Such a system has no controller For example the HP 5373A can be configured to Talk Only and send measurement results to a printer configured as Listen Always by setting the instrument to the Talk Only mode Listeners can receive information over the interface When the HP 5373A is listening or addressed to listen the LSN LED on the front panel lights Listeners must also be enabled by the Controller to receive data
384. ramming Manual Floating Point Format Data Structure Floating Point Measurement Result 2 38 Format Examples Each floating point measurement result consists of eight bytes Each result is represented as follows Bye 1 Bye 2 Byte 8 SEEEEEEE EEEEFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF where S is the sign bit E represents an 11 bit exponent biased by 1023 F represents a 52 bit fraction which together with an implicit leading 1 yields the significant digit field 1 Therefore a real number N can be defined as follows 1 If Eis greater than or equal to 1 then 1 25 0923 4 2 IfEequals 0 then N C1 27102 05 3 IfE F 0 then N 0 The following floating point output format examples are divided into categories In the first group specific numeric values are shown to illustrate formatting of results In the second group alphanumeric descritions such as lt result A gt are used to simplify the examples In the third group statistics examples of raw statistics data are given followed by examples relating to limit testing NOTE The value 1 0E438 is transmitted instead of a calculated result if the calculated result is invalid For example if a Totalize A B result has 0 for the Channel B denominator 1 0E 38 is transmitted HP IB General Information Single result example Frequency A 10 MHz lt gt Block lt 6 gt Preamble lt 0 gt lt
385. rences in electrical path length between the start and stop channels PRODUCING VALID EVENT STAMPS Identifying the Datum Which Represents the Valid Event Count The Totalize Status 1 Bit TS1 is bit 13 of the Interpolator Status field see Interpolator Status Field under Special Topics at the front of this chapter TS1 identifies the datum which represents the valid event count If TS1 0 use e the instrument s first attempt at valid event data capture This is the valid binary event count If TS1 1 use e the instrument s second attempt at valid event data capture Subtract 1 from the integer represented by e The subtraction results in a valid binary event count Correcting Event Data for Counter Rollovers Valid event counts increase monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred An overflow processing routine must scan the event data for any datum which is smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Event Overflow Correction value to that datum and all subsequent data then continue the scan An example is given in Technical Note 3 Event Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 PRODUCING VALID TIME STAMPS Correcting Binary Time Data for Counter Rollovers Binary time data increases monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred An overflow processing routine must scan the time data for any datum which is smaller than its imm
386. responding samples in the event data array FOR i 1 TON IF time 2 i 2 lt time 2 i THEN is next sample less than current sample FOR j 1 1 TO N 1 Ifor all following samples add overflow value to all second read samples time 2 j time 2 j 2 32 NEXT j ENDIF NEXT i 3 147 HP 5373A Programming Manual FORMATS 14 AND 15 The algorithm for the event data is N the number of desired results There are 4N samples for this format NOTE Format 14 uses TS1 as the STATUS bit Format 15 uses TS1 as the Channel A STATUS bit and TS2 as the Channel B STATUS bit This program assumes use of Format 14 Therefore the status bit that is used is TS1 Rollover routines for Format 15 should be changed to use the appropriate status bits FOR i 2 to 4 N STEP 2 This subtracts event i event i 1 11 from every NEXT i second attempt lat data capture FOR i 1 TO 2 N 1 IF TS1 2 i THEN TS1 set IF 51 2 i 2 THEN TS1 set check second read and second read IF event 2 i 2 lt event 2 i THEN next sample lt than current sample FOR j 2 1 2 TO 4 N tfor all following samples event j event j 2732 tadd overflow value to all samples NEXT j ENDIF ELSE 1751 clear check second read and first read IF event 2 i 1 lt event 2 i THEN next sample lt than current sample FOR 2 1 1 TO 4 N Ifor all following samples event j event j 2 32 ladd overflow value to all samples NEXT j ENDIF EL
387. rigger events which are counted between samples but are not time stamped The formula for calculating Missed Events is Missed Events event stamp 1 event stamp 1 PRE FREQUENCY PRI AND PERIOD RESULTS PRF Frequency PRI and Period results are generated by calculating both elapsed time and elapsed events between samples then taking the appropriate quotient event stamp 1 time stamp or Frequency time stamp 41 event stamp time stamp 1 time stamp Period PRIpor Periodi event stamp 1 event stamp Expanded Data for PRF Frequency PRI and Period measurements is Measurement Gate Time Gate Time is generated by calculating the elapsed time between samples Measurement Gate Time time stamp 1 time stamp 3 42 Binary Output TIME DEVIATION PHASE DEVIATION AND FREQUENCY DEVIATION RESULTS ty i3 tz 1 e Figure 2A D Time Deviation and Phase Deviation Example Signal showing Time and Event Stamp Measurement Points Time Deviation e 1 ej t1 t1 360 Phase Deviation 1 XP ti 1 t x gt 1 Frequency Deviation 4 y tina tj NOTES 1 P Period of reference signal f frequency of reference signal i e f 1 P The signal used as the reference carrier is identified on the Math menu For a Phase Deviation Time Deviation or Frequency Deviation measure
388. rings thus these 2 8 HP IB General Information commands cannot be sent from the controller using the OUTPUT statement Many controllers however do incorporate a command of the form SEND CMD where is a decimal number Table 2 2 lists the mnemonic full name and a brief description of the instrument response for each supported device independent command Table 2 2 Device Independent Commands Mnemonic Command Name Description ATN DCL EOI GET GTL IFC LAD LLO MLA MTA Attention Device Clear End Or Identify Group Execute Trigger Go To Local Interface Clear Listen Address n Local Lockout My Listen Address My Talk Address Alerts the instrument of each device independent message being sent so the instrument is ready to accept data and interpret them as commands This command clears all errors aborts all partially completed commands and pending send data commands and clears all input and output buffers If ATN is false and the instrument is a listener EOI acts as a message delimiter and indicates the last data byte of a multibyte sequence If the instrument is addressed to listen GET aborts the current measurement and triggers the next measurement immediately If the instrument is addressed to listen GTL returns the instrument to front panel local operation Local Lockout is not cleared The instrument untalks and unlistens and
389. rived 4 12 How Shortform Commands Are Derived 4 12 Alternate Command Mnemonics 4 13 Maximum Command Line Length 4 13 Command Form And Sequence 413 command format 2 4 14 Alpha and Numeric Arguments Parameter Formats General Formatting Rules Syntax Diagrams Explained Interpreting the Top Level Syntax Diagrams Message Delimiters separators Processing Considerations Programming Tips Going From Front Panel To Teach Learn Explained Chapter5 Introduction COMMAND REFERENCE Who This Section Is For G How This Section Is Organized What Each Listing Includes Master List System ABOR Abort command BEND Output Block End List query only BTIM Output Block Timestamp List query only CANC Cancel Hardcopy command
390. rmal Mode Bits 32 32 32 16 32 32 32 16 Fast Mode Bits 16 6 16 16 16 16 16 16 MEDORA Figure 12 B Format 12 Binary Output Format 12 binary output is shown in Figure 12 B above Each sample generates the binary data described below EVENT instrument s first attempt at capture of a valid event datum UNUSED FIELD UNUSED FIELD INT status bits only Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit EVENT instrument s second attempt at capture of a valid event datum UNUSED FIELD TIME time of occurrence for sample INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Totalize Status 2 bit 14 Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps CJO8E3 CJECJEJ JOE CJOCJES Figure 12 C Format 12 Binary Output The binary data stream was derived from the signal shown in Figure 11 A To produce valid event stamps 1 Identify each datum which represents a valid event count e or e 2 Correct the valid event counts for counter rollovers To produce valid time stamps 1 Correct the binary time data for counter rollovers 2 Incorporate the interpolator data 3 116 Binary Output PRODUCING VALID EVENT STAMPS Identifying the Datum Which Represents the Valid Event Count The Totalize Status 2 Bit TS2 is bit 14 of the Interpolator Status field see Interpolator Status Field under Special Topics at the front of this chapter TS2 identifies the datum which represents the valid ev
391. rmine the total delay on the measurement channel by following the OFFSET FLOWCHART for that channel 3 Subtract the total delay for the measurement channel from the total delay for the block arming channel This difference will be the offset value to be subtracted from the first time datum this first time datum represents the time stamp of the Block Arm The formula is Offset Block Arming channel measurement channel Example 3 Measurement Continuous Time Interval Channel A X2 5 Attn arm block of measurements on positive edge of External Arm Following the OFFSET FLOWCHART the delay in the External Arm is 14 000 ps 600 ps 14 600 ps Following the OFFSET FLOWCHART the delay in Channel A is 9 900 ps 0 ps 400 ps 0 ps 10 300 ps The offset that should be subtracted from the first Time Datum is External Arm delay Channel A delay 14 600 ps 10 300 ps 4 300 ps Example 4 Measurement Continuous Time Interval on Channel B Channel A X2 5 Attn Channel B X2 5 Attn arm block of measurements on positive edge of Channel A Following the OFFSET FLOWCHART the delay in Channel A is 9 900 ps 0 ps 400 ps 600 ps 10 900 ps Following the OFFSET FLOWCHART the delay in Channel B is 10 100 ps 0 ps 400 ps 0 ps 10 500 ps The offset that should be subtracted from the first time datum is Channel A delay Channel delay 10 900 ps 10 500 ps 400 ps 3 153 HP 5373A Programming
392. rogramming reference set If you are using HP BASIC HP IB Tutorial Description of the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP part number 5952 0156 The HP 5373A Operating Manual describes all the operational controls and the menu structure Many tutorial examples lead you through specific measurements The HP BASIC programming reference is a multi volume set of manuals that completely describes all HP BASIC commands In addition the work treats interface issues and programming techniques at length HP 5373A Programming Manual 1 4 HP IB OVERVIEW WRITING PROGRAMS Turn to the HP IB tutorial description for the following topics Introduction to HP IB TEEE 488 1 bus TEEE 488 2 standard Data coding and formats Syntax Status reporting Common commands System initialization The HP IB is a general purpose digital interface which simplifies the design and integration of instruments and computers into systems The bus minimizes electrical mechanical hardware and functional compatibility problems between devices yet has sufficient flexibility to accommodate a wide and growing range of products HP IB is Hewlett Packard s implementation of IEEE 488 This standard permits the linking of diverse products into measurement systems Accordingly you may incorporate many test instruments up to 15 devices on a single bus in ways to suit individual needs and preferences Before attempting to program the HP 5373A you should firs
393. rom the signals shown in Figure 6 A To produce valid event stamps your program must correct the binary stop channel data for event counter rollovers To produce valid time stamps your program must 1 Correct the binary time data for counter rollovers 2 Incorporate interpolator data 3 78 Binary Output 3 Correct for differences in electrical path length between the start channel and the stop channel PRODUCING VALID EVENT STAMPS Correcting Stop Channel Data for Counter Rollovers Successive stop channel event counts increase monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred Note that stop channel event counts are provided with every other sample Monotonic increase should be expected for data e2 e4 e6 etc see Figure 6 A An overflow processing routine must scan the stop event data for any stop event datum smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Event Overflow Correction value to that datum and to all subsequent stop data then continue with the scan Event Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 PZxOm PRODUCING VALID TIME STAMPS Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers Binary time data increases monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred An overflow processing routine must scan the time data for any datum smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Ti
394. ror 110 Ch B Overvoltage C 8 Error 111 Power down before removing pods C 8 Error 130 Only graphs be plotted C 8 Error 131 Plot meas data conflict C 8 Error 140 Register protected C 8 Error 141 Register not saved yet C 8 Error 142 Register out of range C 9 Error 150 Parameter conflict 9 lt Appendix C STATUS AND ERROR MESSAGES Continued Table of Contents Error 160 Out of sensitivity cal 9 Events occurred which were not timed C 9 Exponent entry disallowed 9 Exponent disallowed due to mantissa 9 Gate Opens 10 Graphics not allowed for this meas C 10 HP 5373A Graphics command no longer used C 10 Inhibit usage may distort results C 10 Input line truncated to first 80 chars C 10 Input parameters may have changed C 11 Interval sample value changed to 131 C 11 Measurement Aborted Measurement Inhibited C 11 Measurement terminated 4
395. rrection values are given in Technical Note 1 Correcting Stop Channel Data for Counter Rollovers This correction process parallels that performed for start channel data Successive stop channel event counts increase monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred Note that sto channel event counts are provided with every other sample Monotonic increase should be expected for e2 e4 e6 etc See Figure 10A A The start data overflow processing routine may be used here by providing it with stop data The routine should then find the rollover points and add the overflow correction to all subsequent data 3 87 Euh I loh gt HP 5373A Programming Manual PRODUCING VALID TIME STAMPS Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers Binary time data increases monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred An overflow processing routine must scan the time data for any datum smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Time Overflow Correction value to that datum and to all subsequent data then continue with the scan An example routine is given in Technical Note 3 Time Overflow Correction values given in Technical Note 1 E Ioh Incorporating Interpolator Data The algorithm for producing time stamps from binary time data and binary interpolator data is time stamp time datum X 2 ns interpolator datum 0 1 ns Correcting for
396. rval Measurement on Channel A With Automatic Arming Mode Showing Corresponding Binary Data Output Producing Results Continuous Time Interval results are generated by calculating elapsed time between contiguous samples NOTE With Expanded Data OFF the count of elapsed trigger events is unavailable 3 31 5373A Programming Manual Binary Data Output g R Normal Mode Bits 32 16 M Fast Mode Bits 16 16 A OT 1A Figure 1A B Format 1A Binary Output Format 1A binary output is shown in Figure 1A B above Each sample generates the binary data defined below TIME time of occurrence for each sample INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid Status Bits Block Start Inhibit Converting Binary Data to Time Stamps pa E C a C C a C CD MCEDT NOM Figure 1A C Format 1A Binary Output The binary data stream shown above was derived from the signal shown in Figure 1A A To produce valid time stamps your program must l Correct the binary time data for counter rollovers 2 Incorporate interpolator data PRODUCING VALID TIME STAMPS Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers Binary time data increases monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred An overflow processing routine must scan the time data for any datum which is smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Time Overflow Correction value to t
397. ry data defined below UNUSED FIELD START CHANNEL EVENT binary event count TIME start sample time of occurrence INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit UNUSED FIELD STOP CHANNEL EVENT binary event count TIME stop sample time of occurrence INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit If stop precedes start use the format shown in Figure 10D D Each pair of samples each measurement generates the set of binary data defined below START CHANNEL EVENT binary event count UNUSED FIELD TIME start sample time of occurrence INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit 3 107 m z 0m F R M A HP 5373A Programming Manual STOP CHANNEL EVENT binary event count UNUSED FIELD TIME stop sample time of occurrence INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit E Igi Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps ppro 0T oTi MCEOTONOM Figure 10D E Format 10D Binary Output The binary data stream was derived from the signal shown in Figure 10D A followed by the signal in Figure 10D B To produce valid time stamps your program must 1 Correct the binary time data for counter rollovers 2 Identify from the binary
398. s 3 125 Correcting Binary Time Data for Counter Rollovers 3 125 Incorporating Interpolator Data 3 126 Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between the Start and Stop Channels 3 126 Generating Final Function Results From Time Stamps and Event Stamps 3 126 Format 15 3 127 How Signals are Converted to Binary Data 3 127 Producing Results 3 127 Expanded Data 3 128 Table of Contents Chapter 3 Binary Data 3 128 BINARY OUTPUT Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps 3 129 Continued Producing Valid Event 3 129 Identifying the Datum Which Represents the Valid Channel A Event Count 3 129 Identifying the Datum Which Represents the Valid Channel B Event 3 129 Correcting Event Data for Counter Rollovers 3 130 Producing Valid Time Stamps 3 130 Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers 3 130 Incorporating Interpolator Data 3 130 Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between the Start and Stop Channels 3 130 Generating Final Function Results From
399. s Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between Start and Stop Channels There are several possible signal paths running from signal input connectors on the HP 5373A front panel to measurement hardware inside the instrument Signal routing depends on the selection of several parameters including Common Input Mode and Attenuation To adjust for this variation add a correction value called an offset to each stop channel time stamp Start channel time stamps require no correction Use Technical Note 4 to determine the correct value of offset for your application For the stop channel time stamp corrected stop time stamp stop time stamp offset 3 102 Binary Output Generating Final Function Results PRF Frequency PRI and Period results are generated for each channel by calculating elapsed events and elapsed time between appropriate samples Results are generated for the start channel by using the odd numbered samples while results are generated for the stop channel by using even numbered samples start event stamp 1 start event stamp St A arechannel PRE OF Frequenor start time stamp 1 start time stamp Stop event stampi 1 stop event stampi S N Er Aee ae N PREY Or Freq eneyi corrected stop time stampi 1 corrected stop time stampi start time stamp 4 start time stamp Start channel PRI or Period E i OF start
400. s gt 360 The PCOMpute query returns the current Phase Computation mode Parameters MODulo CUMulative SOUR Source command query CREF Clear Reference command HLIM High Limit command query Command Reference Examples OUTPUT 703 Sets the Phase Computation mode to modulo 360 OUTPUT 703 PROC PCOM Queries for the Phase Computation mode Shortform SOUR SOURce sublevel Longform SOURCE The PROCess MATH subsystem SOURce command selects an input channel signal Channel A B or C Subsequent processing function commands then apply to the selected channel The SOURce query returns the current selected channel The SOURce command must be sent prior to the SOURce query Parameters A B C Examples OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR A Selects Channel A as the signal source for subsequent processing functions OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR Queries for the current signal source The PROCess MATH subsystem subsystem SOURce sublevel command has 18 subcommands Shortform CREF Clear REFerence Longform CREFERENCE The CREFerence command sets the Reference value to 0 Reference values for each channel are set separately using the SREFerence command Example OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR A CREF Sets Channel A reference value to 0 Shortform High Longform HLIMIT The HLIMit command sets the upper limit for limit testing of the pr
401. s command is ignored if a normally correct relative trigger level value is sent If an incorrect value is sent an error message is displayed The trigger points are determined by the following formula Trigger point minimum peak maximum peak minimum peak xpercentage Thus a selected relative trigger level of 20 for Channel A and 80 for Channel B applied to a signal that has a maximum peak of 1 V and a minimum peak of 1 V 2 V results in trigger points of 0 6 V and 0 6 V respectively Here is how that result is derived 1V 1 20 2 1 0 4 0 6 OV 1 8096 2 1 16 06 1V The RLEV query returns the value of the current trigger level for the selected input channel Preset NOMINALLY set to 50 point of input signal Range NOMINALLY between maximum and minimum peaks of input signal in 1 steps Level Resolution X1 attenuation 2mV steps NOMINAL Level Resolution X2 5 attenuation 5 mV steps NOMINAL 5 111 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 112 SLOP Slope command query TRIG Trigger command query Examples OUTPUT 703 INP SOUR A RLEV 20 Sets the Channel A relative trigger level to 2076 of the maximum and minimum peaks of the input signal OUTPUT 703 INP SOUR B RLEV Queries for the current Channel B relative trigger level Shortform SLOP SLOPe Longform SLOPE The SLOPe command in the Input subsystem selects the positive rising or negative fallin
402. s is sent the HP 5373A will still process all commands up to the 79 character length You can ignore this false error message if the command line length is equal to or less than 79 characters All commands are of the form COMMAND space modifier or COMMAND lt gt modifier The command parser accepts command sequences in different program lines as long as the overall sequence is correct For example the following program segment 10 OUTPUT 703 PRES MEAS FUNC FREQ SOUR A 20 OUTPUT 703 ARM AUT INP MOD SEP 4 13 HP 5373A Programming Manual COMMAND FORMAT Alpha and Numeric 4 14 Arguments Parameter Formats is equivalent to the following sequence 10 OUTPUT 703 PRES 1 Presets the instrument 20 OUTPUT 703 MEAS 1 Selects Measurement subsystem 30 OUTPUT 703 FUNC FREQ 1 Sets the function to Frequency 40 OUTPUT 703 SOUR A 1 Selects Channel A a measurement source channel 50 OUTPUT 703 ARM AUT 1 Selects Automatic arming 60 OUTPUT 703 INP Selects Input subsystem 70 OUTPUT 703 MOD SEP 1 Selects Separate mode for Channel A and Channel B The following paragraphs describe Alpha and numeric argument formats m Delimiters Except for GRAPhic subsysem commands a command that requires ON and OFF parameters may use either alpha or numeric arguments The alpha argument OFF can be represented by 0 and the argument ON can be represented by 1 Note that except for the
403. sample less than current sample FOR j itl TO 2 N ifor all following samples event j event j 2 32 tadd overflow value NEXT j ENDIF NEXT i NOTE Event Data is not available for Format 4A FORMAT 4B FOR TIME INTERVAL MEASUREMENTS Processing counter rollovers for TI measurements must be handled differently because negative time intervals are allowed in other words a stop event is allowed to occur before a start event It is important to understand that the start channel data is always physically transferred before the stop channel data However the time and event data from the start channel may have a larger value than the time and event data from the stop channel While taking TI measurements it is most convenient to process rollovers by grouping time data into start stop pairs Rollovers can occur between start stop pairs or within start stop pairs To check for these two rollover possibilities two scans of the data are necessary To correct for rollovers within start stop pairs Because stop is allowed to happen before the start in TI measurements the rollover processing routine must distinguish between counter rollovers and start stop reversals To do this the processing routine must check the difference between the start time and the stop time within a start stop pair If the difference between start and stop is greater than 231 1 then a rollover must have occurred To account for a rollover within a start stop pair fol
404. se because of design constraints or other factors In this regard the HP IB Pre trigger commands present a special case Although front panel Pre trigger commands are grouped under a corresponding PRE TRIGGER pushbutton the corresponding HP IB commands are selected via the MEASurement FUNCTION PRE TRIGGER subsystem selector This is the only exception to the one to one tracking of subsystem selection and front panel controls In this manual the Pre trigger commands are merged alphabetically in the MEASurement FUNCTION PRE TRIGGER tabbed section of the Command Reference Chapter 5 The HP 5373A accepts shortform and longform programming commands and queries The HP 5373A parser accepts upper or lower case letters In the manual text upper case letters denote the command shortform the complete spelling is the longform Shortform and longform versions are derived using the rules covered below Use the shortform if conserving memory space is a consideration Doing so results in a more efficient program The efficiencies are in two areas your program occupies less total program memory and it runs slightly faster since fewer characters are transmitted to the HP 5373A and the instrument has fewer characters to parse Alternately you can make your programs easier to read and understand by using longform commands 4 11 HP 5373A Programming Manual 4 12 How Longform Commands Are Derived How Shortform Commands Are Deriv
405. se default choices are set by the HP IB PRESet command or by pressing the Preset key on the front panel when in local 6 X External Arm input HP 5373A Programming Manual D 6 Example Program Arming Excerpts Figure D 1 Automatic Arming Mode Four examples are included here to demonstrate the use of Table D 2 to program the arming modes Compare the arming commands used in these examples with the command sequence as listed in the table NOTE The HP 5373A will accept a maximum program line length of 80 characters including delimiters The programming examples below are shown with shorter line lengths to make them easier to describe Automatic Arming Mode OUTPUT 703 MEAS FUNC FREQ SOUR A ARM AUT This program line selects a Channel A frequency measurement with Automatic arming Figure D 1 shows the HP 5373A as it would be programmed PRF PRF A 28 33 MHZ Frequency FUNCTION Measurement Channel PR Acquire block of weas Period Pre trigger Total Meas 188 Pulse Width Arming Mode Block Holdoff Ara a block of measurements autowatically Pulse Offtime Sample Ara Buty Cycle sampling on meas channel automatically More Programming the Arming Modes Event Holdoff Arming Mode OUTPUT 703 MEAS FUNC TINT SOUR
406. sed time and elapsed events between start and stop samples then taking the appropriate quotient The formulas are 3 67 Eon a gt 5373A Programming Manual _ elapsed events PRF or Frequency elapsed time PRI or Period elapsed ume elapsed events EXPANDED DATA Expanded Data for Time Interval measurements is Missed Events Missed Events are defined as trigger events which are counted between measurements but which are not time stamped See the Glossary in this chapter for more details Expanded Data for PRF Frequency PRI and Period measurements is Measurement Gate Time Gate Time is generated by calculating elapsed time between start and stop Binary Data Output pra E Normal Mode Bits a Fast Mode Bits 716 16 Figure 5A B Format 5A Binary Output Format 5A binary output is shown in Figure 5 Each measurement consists of two samples start and stop Input channels associated with start and stop data must be identified See Technical Note 4 for information on how to determine the correct start and stop channels Each sample generates the set of binary data defined below EVENT binary event count TIME time of occurrence for each sample INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps OD a ES Jess Figure 5A C Format 5
407. sed to enter an Offset value to be added to a measurement value Offset values are set separately for each channel Positive Range 1E 12 lt n 1 12 and 0 Negative Range 1 12 lt n s 1E 12 Resolution 1E 12 The OFFSet query returns the current Offset value in exponential form Example OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR A OFFS 10E 9 Sets a Channel A Offset value to 10 10 9 OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR A OFFS Queries for the Channel A Offset value Shortform SCAL SCALe Longform SCALE The SCALe command sets a Scaling factor for multiplication of the result value The Scaling factor is applied after Normalization and Offset have been applied Scaling factors are set separately for each channel Refer to the MATH command description for information about how the Scaling factor relates to normalization and offset values The SCALe query returns the value of the current Scaling factor in exponential format Positive Range 1E 12 lt n lt 1E 12 and 0 Negative Range 1E 12 sn x 1E 12 Resolution 1 12 OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR A SCAL 1E 3 Sets Channel A Scaling value to 1000 OUTPUT 703 PROC SOUR A SCAL Queries for the Channel A Source value 5 125 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 126 SREF Set Reference command query Shortform SREF Set REFerence Longform SREFERENCE The SREFerence command is used to assign a Reference value based on the current measurement siz
408. ses Shift Preset you can set up a measurement likely to obtain valid measurement results plus statistical analysis results When going into DMS mode the following conditions are true for all measurement types with an HP 53702A Envelope Detector Pod in CHANNEL A and an HP 54002A 50Q Input Pod in CHANNEL B General applies to all functions Prior setup stored in register 0 Acquisition mode Repetitive Numeric Display Mode Split results and statistics Displayed Menu Numeric Screen Math Channel A B C Off Statistics Channel A B C On Limit Test Channel A B C Off Reference value A B C 0 B 1 HP 5373A Programming Manual Block count Bias channel A Bias channel B Attenuation A B Pre trigger Carrier Inhibit Hysteresis A B Attenuation C Trigger Mode A B Ext arm trigger level Function Specific 1 Time Interval Continuous Time Interval Time Deviation 1 AC GND X1 Off Pulse Off Min 0 Repetitive Auto Trigger oV Phase Deviation PRF Frequency PRI Period Block size Siope A B Input Mode Measurement channel Arming Channel A Auto trig Ivl Channel B Auto trig lvl 100 Positive Separate A Automatic 50 50 Histogram Time Interval Histogram Continuous Time Interval Same as 1 except Block size 1 000 000 Envelope Power Amplitude Modulation Same as 1 except Block size Time Interval Same as 1 except Measurement channel Histogram Time Interval Sam
409. set Pre trigger amount Shortform PBL Pre trigger BLocks Longform PBLOCK The PBLock command provides block control for pre trigger measurements When set to SINGle a single block is endlessly monitored until the pre trigger condition occurs When set to MULTiple repeated block arm block acquire cycles occur until the pre trigger condition occurs The MULTiple setting allows the arming to be used to qualify the portion of the input to be measured The PBLock query returns the current pre trigger block control status Parameters SINGle MULTiple Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS PBL SING Sets the measurement to SINGIe following the initial block arming the measurement continues without re arming OUTPUT 703 MEAS PBL Queries for the currently selected pre trigger block control status Shortform PRET PRE Trigger control Longform PRETRIGGER The PRETrigger command is used to enable ON or disable OFF the pre trigger capability of the HP 5373A see PAMount PXSLope for related pre trigger commands A third choice OCON On CONditionally is available for hardware histogram measurement functions HTIMe HPMrTinterval HCTinterval When OCONG is selected 5 93 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 94 PMOD Pre trigger mode command query PUN Pre trigger Units query only Pre trigger will be active but the measurement will also end if the prescribed number of measurements have been tak
410. sponses from the instrument while in the Binary output mode are in binary format Accordingly queries requiring a string response will appear incorrect to the controlling program Some subsystem command names are duplicated from subsystem to subsystem For example the subsystem command SOURce occurs in the INPut MEASurement and PROCess subsystems You must keep these duplications in mind when programming the HP 5373A Likewise some subsystem sublevel command groups have duplicate command names For example XMINimum XMAXimum YMINimum and YMAXimum are duplicated in several GRAPhic subsystem sublevels HP 5373A Programming Manual System Commands IEEE COMMON COMMANDS HP 5373A SPECIFIC Subsystem Commands The system commands are ABORt MMODe ESE BEND ODATa ESR BTIMe OHIStogram HSE CANCel PLOCation HSE CLEar PLOT HSR DATe POD IDN DATe PRESet OPC DLENgth PRINt OPC DMSetup REMote OPT DSP RESTart PSC DSP SETup PSC ERRor SETup RCL HOVer SMODe RST HUNder SMODe SAV HWIThin SUBS SRE IDATa TODay SRE KEY TODay STB KEY WINTerval TRG LOCal WTSend 5 WTSend CLS MMODe ESE System commands are divided into two subgroups HP 5373A instrument specific commands and IEEE common commands The IEEE common commands include an asterisk as the first character in their command mnemonic They act just like instrument specific commands the only di
411. ssing all listeners UNT Untalk Unaddresses the instrument if currently a talker and terminates talking Addressing another talker on the interface automatically unaddresses any current talker Meta Messages 2 10 To simplify using the HP IB interface Hewlett Packard developed the Meta Message concept shown in Table 2 3 Rather than require you to remember all the device independent messages and their interactions useful command sequences are integrated into a corresponding single command on many Hewlett Packard controllers For example to clear the instrument at address three using the device independent commands you must send the sequence ATN UNL MTA LAD 3 SDC The HP BASIC command CLEAR 3 sends the same sequence with no further user interaction required thus greatly simplifying the programming interface General Information Many messages implemented in HP BASIC may be sent in either of two forms with addressing and without addressing The form with addressing normally addresses a particular device to listen For example the command REMOTE 7 sends REN without making any device a listener while the command REMOTE 703 sends REN and makes the device at address 3 a listener NOTE Care must be taken when using Meta messages If a Meta message is issued shortly after sending another command there is a possiblity that the Meta message will prevent the comp
412. start and stop data must be identified See Technical Note 4 to determine the correct start and stop channels Each sample generates the binary data defined below TIME time of occurrence for each sample INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit Converting Binary Data to Time Stamps 08 08 8 rs om Figure 4A C Format 4A Binary Output The binary data stream shown above was derived from the signals shown in Figure 4A A To produce valid time stamps your program must 1 Correct the binary time data for counter rollovers 2 Incorporate interpolator data 3 Correct for differences in electrical path length between the start channel and the stop channel PRODUCING VALID TIME STAMPS Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers Binary time data increases monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred An overflow processing routine must scan the time data for any datum smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Time Overflow Correction value to that datum and all subsequent data then continue with the scan 3 58 Binary Output An example routine is given in Technical Note 3 Time Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Incorporating Interpolator Data The algorithm for producing time stamps from binary time data and binary interpolator data is time stamp
413. sts as a consequence of other settings You cannot set segmentation but you can see if it is applicable Example OUTPUT 703 MEAS MSEG Queries to determine if Memory Segmentation is currently active Shortform MSIZ Measurement SIZe Longform MSIZE The MSIZe command sets the number of measurements taken within each measurement block The maximum MSIZe is dependent on the selected function the selected measurement source or sources as the case may be and the arming mode Refer to Table 5 7 Maximum Measuerments Per Block on the next page The measurement block size is set by the BLOCK command up to a maximum of 2E 9 blocks The product of the measurement size and the number of blocks can never exceed 1E 15 5 89 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 90 The MSIZe query returns the current measurement size Range Examples Refer to Table 5 7 OUTPUT 703 5 517 100 Sets the number of measurements within each measurement block to 100 OUTPUT 703 MEAS MSIZ Queries for the currently selected measurement size Command Reference Table 5 7 Maximum Measurements per Block 1 of 2 ARMING MODE MEASUREMENT FUNCTION TOTALIZE PULSE WIDTH OFFTIME RISETIME FALLTIME DUTY CYCLE ENVELOPE POWER AMPLITUDE MODULATION PHASE DEVIATION TIME DEVIATION FREQUENCY DEVIATION AUTOMATIC AUTOMATIC 4096 8191 4096 8191 4095
414. subsystem tabbed section are usually organized alphabetically except where functional grouping provides a more logical reference The IEEE 488 common commands in the system section are all organized alphabetically and appear after the first group of HP 5373A specific System commands Each command description includes m a heading and brief command function description this heading appears in the table of contents m the shortform mnemonic including the full functional descriptor from which the mnemonics are derived in brackets m the longform mnemonic m description of the command function and operation m required parameters and their ranges if applicable m one or more example lines of code In a few cases the function descriptor entry is clarified by additional terms that are not part of the command mnemonics Accordingly the explanatory terms are printed in parentheses within the brackets For example Shortform MATH MATH modifiers Shortform REST RESTart measurement The terms modifiers and measurement respectively clarify MATH and RESTart The example code is written in HP Series 200 300 BASIC All examples assume that the instrument address is set to three and the interface select code is set to seven MASTER LIST OF COMMANDS Command Reference Table 5 1 lists all commands in alphabetical order and references the respective sublevel If you can remember a command name and want to know which sub
415. sult of each block is accumulated into an internal software histogram result The histogram IC is cleared so that each bin can start from zero on the next block The effect is that a huge bin size is achieved 2 measurements per bin at the expense of increased time between blocks If FARM Fast ARM is selected no transfer occurs between blocks The histogram IC is not cleared so the result accumulates over all the blocks but the bin limit is defined by the actual bin count limit on the IC p The benefit of this mode is that the time between blocks is 2 microseconds The HBLOcK query returns the Histogram Block status Parameters FARM BBIN Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS HBL BBIN Sets the Histogram Block mode to BBIN Big Bin OUTPUT 703 MEAS HBL Queries for the currently selected Histogram Block mode 5 85 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 86 HCEN Histogram Center command query HSP Histogram Span command query Shortform HCEN Histogram CENter Longform HCENTER The HCENter command sets the histogram center for any histogram functions HCTinterval HPMTime HTIMe Setting HCENter can result in a change of the value associated with the HSTart command refer to the Operating Manual for further information about how the HCENter value can interact with HSTart The HCENter query returns the current Histogram Center value Range Refer to Table 5 6 you can set values in 200 pS increments
416. system the command belongs in search the table If you want to see all the commands in a given subsystem or sublevel organized alphabetically refer to the table of contents Table 5 1 Master List of Commands Alphabetical Order COMMAND WHERE USED COMMAND WHERE USED COMMAND WHERE USED ABORt System DISPlay NUM HYSTeresis INP SOUR ARMing MEAS DISPlay NUM HYSTeresis INP SOUR ARMing MEAS DLENgth System ATTenuation INP SOUR DLOWer MEAS IDATa System ATTenuation INP SOUR DLOWer MEAS ILEVel MEAS AVARiance PROC SOUR DMiDdle MEAS ILEVel MEAS DMIDdle MEAS INHibit MEAS BEND System DMSetup System INHibit MEAS BIAS INP SOUR DSP System ISENse MEAS BIAS INP SOUR DSP System ISENse MEAS BLOCk MEAS DUPPer MEAS BLOCk MEAS DUPPer MEAS KEY System BTiMe System KEY System BWIDth GRAP WALL ERASe IST BWIDth GRAP WHIST ERRor System LEVel INP SOUR BWIDth GRAP WMUL ETIMe GRAP LEVel INP SOUR BWIDth GRAP HIST EVT1 GRAP ETIM LIMit PROC SOUR BWIDth GRAP HIST EVT1 GRAP TVAR LIMit PROC SOUR EVT2 GRAP ETIM LLIMit PROC SOUR CANCel System EVT2 GRAP TVAR LLIMit PROC SOUR CARRier PROC NUM System CARRier PROC EXPand NUM CATTen INP SOUR MATH PROC SOUR CATTen INP SOUR FUNCtion MEAS MATH PROC SOUR CDATa GRAP FUNCtion MEAS MAXimum PROC SOUR CDATa GRAP MCENter GRAP CFRequency PROC GDISplay GRAP MDMode GRAP CFRequency PROC GDISplay GRAP MDMode GRAP CHANnel MEAS SAMP GRID GRAP MDOWn GRAP CHANnel MEAS STAR GRID
417. systems in bold have subievels MHCS N3M Figure 4 1 Hierarchical Command Structure Command Hierarchy Matching Front Panel Features to HP IB Commands Programming Rules and Guidance 5373A front panel controls and menus refer to the Operating Manual for a complete explanation of these topics The command hierarchy contains these elements m system commands m subsystem commands a sublevel commands only under the following subsystems GRAPhic MEASurement FUNCTION PRE TRIGGER INPut PROCess MATH ISTate System commands are general purpose high level commands On the other hand subsystem commands correspond to front panel functional controls that relate to specific activities such as making measurements or displaying results System commands and subsystem commands are at the same level in the hierarchy Beneath a subsystem classification are the respective subsystem commands In turn sublevel commands fall under five of the eight subsystems As an organizational aid the Command Reference Chapter 5 is tabbed so you can readily turn to the functional groups illustrated Alternately to quickly find a command listed in the Command Reference refer to the Table of Contents Index or Table 5 1 Figure 4 2 illustrates how front panel display choices relate to corresponding HP IB commands For each functional group a two column table maps the relationship 5373A Programming Manual 4 4
418. t know how to use all the HP 5373A front panel controls and thoroughly understand the measurements you wish to perform Knowing the front panel controls helps because the programming command scheme follows the general menu layout and thus mimics to some extent manual operation of the instrument Measurement techniques and operational tips are described in the HP 5373A Operating Manual A Teach Learn feature is described that enables you to store operating setups for later use This programming tip and others are given in Chapter 4 2 HP IB GENERAL INFORMATION INTRODUCTION This chapter contains programming information for remotely operating the HP 5373A through the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP IB The information in this chapter includes descriptions of The m HP 5373 interface capabilities Remote operation characteristics m Status reporting structure Data output formats NOTE All the HP 5373A HP IB programming commands are described in Chapter 5 Command Reference Command entries include one or more program lines Appendix E has expanded program examples that demonstrate in greater detail some of the programming features of the HP 5373A The HP 5373A operates remotely via the HP IB All menu functions and front panel controls excluding the power switch are programmable through the HP IB At the simplest level the HP 5373A can transmit data in the Talk Only mode to output de
419. t Format Data Structure 2 38 iv Table of Contents Chapter 2 Floating Point Measurement Result Format Examples 2 38 HP IB GENERAL Multiple result example 2 39 INFormatION Alphanumeric Examples 2 40 Continued Statistics 2 42 Limit Testing Statistics Examples 2 42 Chapter 3 Introduction 0 3 1 BINARY OUTPUT How Binary Data Is Created 3 1 Event Counter 3 2 Time Counterc ii ra x Mo Pire eve 3 2 Making Measurements 3 3 How Measurement Results are Generated 3 3 Binary Output What Follows How to Produce Measurement Results General Information How to Write Your Program Getting Started Writing the Program Characteristics of the Binary Output Data Data Output nen Header Information Measurement Data DataFields Event Data Time Data Interpolator Status Field Data Interpolator Data Status Bits Inhibit Bit 5 Block
420. t arming modes AVAILABLE Table D 1 lists the arming modes available for each ARMING MODES measurement function The arming modes are shown in the left most column of the table and the measurements are listed across the top To use Table D 1 1 Pick a measurement column at the top of the table 2 Scan down that column until you come to a box with an entry 3 Each box with an entry indicates an arming mode on the left that you can use to make the selected measurement 4 Use the Key at the end of the table for an explanation of the entry For information about measurements and arming modes refer to the operating manual HP 5373A Programming Manual Table D 1 Function and Arming Summary ARMING MODE MEASUREMENT FUNCTION PULSE PHASE WIDTH DEVIATION TIME CONTINUOUS OFFTIME ENVELOPE TME INTERVAL TME INTERVAL INTERVAL OR RISE TIME POWER DEVIATION OR OR HISTOGRAM FALL TIME PHASE AMPLITUDE FREQUENCY HISTOGRAM HISTOGRAM CTI Tt OUTY CYCLE MODULATION DEVIATION AUTOMATIC AUTOMATIC c c 5 c Ge HOLDOFF EDGE HOLDOFF TIME HOLOOFF EVENT HOLDOFF INTERVAL SAMPLING SAMPLING N CYCLE SAMPLING 9 EDGE SAMPLING PARITY SAMPLING REPET EDGE SAMPLING REPET EDGE PARITY SAMPLING RANDOM SAMPLING
421. t command query interface HOVer System command HOVer query System HP 85 maximum command length HP IB 4 HP IB Address Selection HP IB cable connectionoc HP IB Controller HP IB default conditions HP IB description 32 HP IB operating modes HSB Hardware Status Bit 2 20 2 21 HSPan command query MEASurement 5 86 query ee NP RECS 2 21 HSTart command query MEASurement 5 87 HUNder System HUNder query System HWIThin System HWIThin query System 5 14 Hysteresis command query input 5 109 I IDAT query System IDATa System IEEE common commands ILEV command query MEASurement 5 88 INFo Menu display 5 17 INH command query MEASurement 5 87 INPut Menu display e SEE Ade Input INPut subsystem description Instrument State ISTate subsystem description 5 131 Instrument STate Menu display 5 17 Ae ace eta Ea ta hia EX Rae CERE 24 INTerface SYSTEM subsystem description 5 135 Interface
422. t follow For floating point the length information is the number of bytes that follow 8 times the number of results As an example consider a histogram with 20 hits at bin 52 and 8 hits at bin 955 if COMPressed is selected OHIS will return 4 indicating 4 values to follow 52 indicating bin position 20 indicating occurrences at bin 52 955 8 If full is selected OHIS will return 2000 indicating 2000 values to follow 0 0 20 in 52nd position 0 0 8 in 955th position 0 0 The HFORmat query returns the status of the Histogram format Parameters COMPressed FULL Examples OUTPUT 703 INT HFOR COMP Send only non zero valued bins OUTPUT 703 INT HFOR Queries for the current status of the HFORmat setting Shortform MTST Measurement Timeout STatus Longform MTSTATUS The MTSTatus command controls the Measurement Timeout function When MTSTatus is turned ON a measurement MTV Measurement Timeout Value command query Command Reference timeout value up to 36000 seconds may be selected using the MTValue command When the measurement time exceeds the specified timeout value a message is displayed on the screen to indicate that the measurement has not yet completed The measurement continues to run to completion if possible When MTSTatus is turned OFF no Measurement Timeout message is displayed The MTSTatus query returns the current status of the Measurement Time
423. t in the measurement memory The TVResult query returns the currently selected result mode The parameters mean m AVERage average the Time Variation Result over all the blocks where result size block size ALL every block measurement sequentially appears in the result The TVResult query returns the current Time Variation Result mode Note the state of this parameter is forced to AVERage or ALL under certain conditions when a choice is not available Parameters ALL Command Reference Examples OUTPUT 703 MEAS TVR AVER Sets the instrument to compute the average time variation over all the blocks OUTPUT 703 MEAS TVR Queries for the current Time Variation Result mode 5 103 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 104 Input Command Reference INPUT SUBSYSTEM The INPut subsystem commands control the input COMMANDS characteristics and signal conditioning for the input channels and the external arm channel The INPut subsystem command functions are equivalent to those available via the front panel INPUT menu screen The top level syntax diagram for the INPut subsystem commands is shown in Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 illustrates the SOURce Sublevel syntax sep arator pon CATTen separator n Y MODe L susce eie SOURce The SOURce command
424. t of this chapter During two channel Totalize measurements TS2 identifies the datum which represents the valid Channel B event count If TS2 0 use the instrument s first attempt at valid Channel B event capture This is the valid binary event count If TS2 1 use E the instrument s second attempt at valid Channel B event capture Subtract 1 from the integer represented by E The subtraction results in a valid binary event count Correcting Event Data for Counter Rollovers Each sample should now include both a valid Channel A event datum and a valid Channel B event datum The Channel A event data should be processed independent of Channel B event data Consider each channel s event data as an independent data stream Each set of data can now be processed for counter rollover Valid event counts increase monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred An overflow processing routine must scan the event data for any datum which is smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Event Overflow Correction value to that datum and all subsequent data then continue the scan An example is given in Technical Note 3 Event Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 3 121 gt gt HP 5373A Programming Manual PRODUCING VALID TIME STAMPS Time and interpolator data is delivered with the second data capture for each sample T
425. t subsystem System commands are divided into two subgroups HP 5373A specific commands and IEEE common commands The IEEE common commands are preceded by an asterisk that is part of the command mnemonic The common commands are identical to instrument specific system commands except that they lack longform command mnemonics For ease of reference all of the IEEE common commands are grouped together after all of the HP 5373A specific commands system and common subgroups respectively appear in alphabetical order Figure 5 1 illustrates the system command syntax ABORt BEND CLEor Cust DATe i sep sep gt month_org sep Lol day org LH DATe DLENgth onan OMSetup gt ISP separator string_arg gt 05 gt ERRor iDATa HOVer 906060008 Figure 5 1 System Command Syntax Diagram 1 of 3 RRSTSINS HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 6 CONTINUED SYSTEM COMMANDS O 4 P xe gt separator key number_arg J MENU ODATo OHIStogram PLOCation PLOT POD 2 E 5 vj A ye o afte 2 gt SETup separator binary setup_arg SMODe separator REPetiti
426. t timeout values The functions in this subsystem are equivalent to the front panel COMMANDS SYSTEM menu except you cannot set the HP IB dde over the bus Syntax diagrams for the INTerface SYSTEM subsystem commands are illustrated in Figure 5 16 This subsystem does not have sublevels INTerface X Ly mS HFORmat seporotor COMPressed FULL MTSTatus seporator OFF MTSTatus measurement timeout volue orq OUTPut seporator MEASurements RRINT_NS Figure 5 16 INTerface SYSTEM Subsystem Syntax Diagram 5 135 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 136 HFOR Histogram Format command query MTST Measurement Timeout Status command query Shortform HFOR Histogram FORmat Longform HFORMAT Use the HFORmat command to select the way histogram data is output If COMPressed is selected only non zero valued bins are output For many acquisitions this can result in much less total data transfer With this mode the results are output in pairs bin index value at that index If FULL is selected all 2000 bin values are output With this mode there is no need to send bin index information since it is implied by the sequence of the data This mode allows for direct transfer into a user defined array With either format length information is provided first then the actual results For ASCII output format the length information is the number of values tha
427. ta 3 120 Binary Data 3 120 Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps 3 120 Producing Valid Event 3 121 Identifying the Datum Which Represents the Valid Channel A Event Count 3 121 Identifying the Datum Which Represents the Valid Channel Event 3 121 Correcting Event Data for Counter Rollovers 3 121 Producing Valid Time Stamps 3 122 Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers 3 122 Incorporating Interpolator Data 3 122 Generating Final Function Results From Time Stamps and Event Stamps 3 122 Format 14 3 123 How Signals are Converted to Binary Data 3 123 Producing Results 3 123 Expanded Data 3 123 Binary Data 3 124 Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps 3 124 Producing Valid Event 3 125 Identifying the Datum Which Represents the Valid Event Count 3 125 Correcting Event Data for Counter Rollovers 3 125 Producing Valid Time Stamp
428. tains block arming data which is not part of the measurement See the paragraph entitled Interpolator Status Fields in the Special Topics section of this chapter for more information CONTINUOUS TIME INTERVAL RESULTS Continuous Time Interval results are generated by calculating elapsed time between contiguous time stamps For each contiguous pair Continuous Time Interval time stamp 4 time stamp Expanded Data for Continuous Time Interval measurements is Missed Events Missed Events are defined as trigger events which are counted between samples but are not time stamped The formula for calculating Missed Events is Missed Events event stamp event stampi 1 FREQUENCY PRI AND PERIOD RESULTS PRF Frequency PRI and Period results are generated by calculating both elapsed time and elapsed events between samples then taking the appropriate quotient to produce the final result The elapsed time between first and second sample in each block represents the elapsed time between the block arming edge and the first signal edge For the first sample in each block Block Arming Data first measurement channel time stamp block arming time stamp 3 49 md loh N N HP 5373 Programming Manual For subsequent samples event stamp 41 event stamp PRF or F OF TEQUEDCYi stamp 1 time stamp time stamp 1 time stamp
429. ted by that format The following paragraphs contain general information designed to acquaint you with the various processes for computing time stamps and event stamps Time and event stamps are used to compute the final measurement results The time and event counters have a finite capacity 4 294 967 296 counts in Normal 32 bit mode 65 536 counts in Fast 16 bit mode In many cases the counters will roll over go from maximum count to zero during a measurement block This causes discontinuities in the data which prevents the computation of measurement results To eliminate the discontinuities caused by counter rollover your computer program must scan the data comparing each datum to its immediate predecessor When a datum is found which is smaller than its predecessor a rollover has occurred The program must then add 4 294 967 296 or 65 536 in Fast mode to the smaller datum and to all subsequent data The result of this process is that data will continuously increase throughout the measurement block Some formats such as those which describe Fime Interval will require a variation of this process so be sure to read the information for your specific measurement format thoroughly To turn time counter data into actual time stamps requires one or two further manipulations these are described below Interpolator data is an unsigned 5 bit binary number which is part of the Interpolator Status field see paragraph above entitled Interpo
430. ted with the HCENter command refer to Operating Manuals for further information about how these commands interact The HSTart query returns the current Histogram Start value Range Examples Shortform Longform Histogram start time is adjustable in 200 pS increments Limits are shown in Table 5 6 OUTPUT 703 MEAS HST 1E 3 Sets the hardware Histogram Start time to 1 millisecond OUTPUT 703 MEAS HST Queries for the currently selected Histogram Start setting INH INHibit measurement INHIBIT The INHibit command turns the Inhibit feature on or off The INHibit query returns the current Inhibit status 5 87 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 88 ILEV Inhibit Level command query NOTE Some instrument setups do not support the Inhibit feature refer to HP 5373A Reference Function Arming Channel Matrix table in Appendix D When a setup is selected that does not support Inhibit the INHibit state is not forced to off This way you do not have to remember to reprogram the INHibit state when the setup is later changed to one that does support inhibit If you query INHibit INHibit when the setup does not support inhibit the response is UNAV unavailable This response is an indication the state of INHibit is not meaningful for the current setup Parameters Examples Shortform Longform ON OFF OUTPUT 703 MEAS INH ON Sets Inhibit feature to on OUTPUT 703 MEAS I
431. ter under program control In the absence of a controller the HP 5373A when in Talk Only becomes the controller for the printer or plotter When operating a printer or plotter without a controller set the HP 5373A HP IB mode to Talk Only When operating in Talk Only mode the printer or plotter must be in Listen Only or Listen Always mode and may be set to output a service request SRQ Refer to the respective printer or plotter manual for these settings The Print Plot program in Appendix E Program Examples controls printing and plotting features of the HP 5373A when using a controller This program takes advantage of the Hardware Status Register and Service Request Enable SRE register to determine when a hardcopy is complete APPENDIX B DEFAULT MEASUREMENT SETUPS DEFAULT MEASUREMENT SETUPS General Conditions The Default Measurement Setup function DMS command sets a configuration most likely to give valid results for the currently chosen measurement function When the DMS function is selected using the DMS command or the front panel SHIFT PRESET keys certain values are preset to default conditions These conditions include source channel sample size arming and the associated parameters input channel specifications trigger modes levels Math modifiers are disabled Statistics is enabled and the Numeric Results Statistics screen is displayed With two keypres
432. th the corresponding bit in the associated Status Register To enable a condition to generate an SRQ the bit in the enable register corresponding to the desired condition must be set to 1 All the enabled bits in the status register are logical ORed with each other the resultant summary of either the Hardware Status Register or the Event Status Register appears in the Status Byte Register HSB bit 0 and ESB bit 5 respectively If bit in the Status Byte Register and the corresponding bit in the Service Request Enable Register are high an SRQ will be generated 2 19 HP 5373A Programming Manual HARDWARE STATUS REGISTER The Hardware Status Register is a 16 bit register that reflects the status of the measurement hardware These status conditions are summarized by the Hardware Status Bit HSB summary message which appears in bit 0 of the Status Byte register Table 2 4 defines the status bits in the Hardware Status Register Binary weighting is as shown Table 2 4 5373A Hardware Status Register Binary Bit Weight Status Bit Condition 15 11 mE Not used set to zero 10 1024 HMC High indicates measurement completed 9 512 Hardcopy Complete HCC High indicates that a hardcopy output printer or plotter is completed 8 256 Measurement Timeout Error MTO High indicates that a measurement timeout occurred 7 128 Limits Error LME High indicates that a measurement limit testing error occurred 6 64 P
433. the measurement is not affected Time Interval measurements are made in a similar manner Start and stop signals when accumulated in the event counters result in the generation of time data similar to the PRF or Frequency measurement Time Interval results the time between start and stop signals are computed from the resulting time stamps The binary output mode operates with all HP 5373A measurements except Histogram measurements Envelope Power measurements Amplitude Modulation measurements m Totalize FAST mode All other measurement modes can be used with the binary output and are covered in this chapter In order to simplify the descriptions in this chapter the following assumptions are made Multiple block measurements not used a Pre trigger is OFF What Follows Binary Output The HP 5373A is in the Normal mode not Fast The Inhibit function is not being used Manually Gated Totalize measurements are not being made For more information on the use of binary output in these modes refer to the Special Topics section in this chapter NOTE HP IB query commands are not allowed in the Binary output mode Any output in response to a query while the HP 5373A is in the binary mode will be unreadable As you may suspect actual measurements are somewhat more complex than the examples The remainder of this chapter describes the complexities The HP 5373A can output binary data in 20 differ
434. the programming process A multi page reference illustrates how programming commands relate to instrument menus and corresponding front panel controls m Chapter 5 is a complete reference to all the HP IB commands It describes in detail the proper syntax path and parameters of the commands as well as providing RELATED DOCUMENTATION Before You Start to Program HP BASIC programming examples This chapter will probably be used continually as you write your programs Appendix A HP IB Connection illustrates and describes how to connect the HP 5373A to an HP IB network including an optional printer or plotter Appendix B Default Measurement Setups describes how the Default Measurement Setup function works Setup values for all the measurement types are listed Appendix C Status and Error Messages lists and describes the various error types and status messages Appendix D Programming the Arming Modes gives arming modes that are available for respective instrument functions Appendix E Programming Examples gives commented HP BASIC program listings The programs are chosen and constructed to highlight useful programming techniques You may be able to employ these programs directly or modify them to suit your individual situation and preferences Other manuals guides and tutorials you can refer to for information are The HP 5373A Modulation Domain Pulse Analyzer Operating Manual HP part number 05373 90001 The HP BASIC p
435. the YMINimum command to set the Y axis minimum value Positive Range 1E 12 lt n 1E 24 and 0 Negative Range 1E 24 lt n lt 1 12 Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP TVAR YMIN 1E 6 Sets Y axis minimum value to 1E 6 OUTPUT 703 GRAP TVAR YMIN Queries for the current Y axis minumum value NOTE The YMIN query outputs different formats depending on whether the graph addressed is main graph MGR or memory graph MEM The main graph query returns data in numeric format while the memory graph query returns data in string format For example If the YMIN for MGR and MEM are both 746 4782 us GRAP MGR YMIN retums the numeric value 746 4782E 06 GRAP MEM YMIN returns the string value 746 4782 5 69 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 70 YMRH Y axis Marker Range Hold command YMSC Y axis Manual Scale command query UPD Set Update Mode command query Shortform YMRH Y axis Marker Range Hold Longform YMRHOLD The YMRHold command presets YMINimum and YMAXimum to the horizontal marker values Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP TVAR YMRH Copies marker values to Manual Scaling parameters Shortform YMSC Y axis Manual SCaling Longform YMSCALE Use the YMSCale command to turn the Y axis Manual Scaling on or off The YMSCale query returns the current Y axis Manual Scaling status Parameter ON OFF Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP TVAR YMSC ON Sets Y axis Manual Scaling o
436. tify the length bytes field and 000123 means that 123 bytes follow 6000123 000 D 06 690 RRNR N Figure 4 3 Numeric Data Formats 4 15 HP 5373A Programming Manual GENERAL FORMATTING RULES SYNTAX DIAGRAMS EXPLAINED Interpreting the Top 4 16 Level Syntax Diagrams The general rules for command formatting are m All program messages except binary types are interpreted as standard 7 bit ASCII code A program message is a string of one or more program commands followed by an End of String EOS message m No distinction is made between upper and lower case letters m Except for GRAPhic subsystem commands for a command requiring ON and OFF as arguments the instrument will respond to 1 and 0 equally well m Command headers and multiple arguments must be explicitly delimited Figure 4 4 is a top level command syntax diagram This diagram relates the entire subsystem and sublevel command structure and graphically reveals how you can string commands together using delimiters as appropriate Use the syntax diagrams to work out program flow and visually distinguish subsystem commands and sublevel commands The key to interpreting the top level diagram and other syntax diagrams printed elsewhere is to understand the looping flow implied by the arrow heads You can only move
437. time value in the preceding pair unless a counter rollover has occurred between pairs The second scan identifies the smallest time value in each pair called true start and identifies the largest time value in the preceding pair called true stop If true stop is greater than true start a counter rollover has occurred between pairs The appropriate Time Overflow Correction should be added to all data subsequent to true stop Following correction resume the scan at the next pair An example routine is given in Technical Note 3 Time Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 E Ion a Incorporating Interpolator Data The algorithm for producing time stamps from binary time data and binary interpolator data is time stamp time datum X 2 ns interpolator datum 0 1 ns Correcting for Differences in Electrical Path Length Between the Start and Stop Channels There are several possible signal paths running from signal input connectors on the HP 5373A front panel to measurement hardware inside the instrument Signal routing depends on the selection of several parameters including Common Input Mode and Attenuation To adjust for this variation add a correction value called an offset to each stop channel time stamp Start channel time stamps require no correction Use Technical Note 4 to determine the correct value of offset for your application For the stop channel time stamp corrected stop time stamp
438. titled Interpolator Data under Special Topics Inhibit Bit 5 Bit 5 of the Interpolator Status field indicates whether the Inhibit function was asserted prior to the current sample If Inhibit was asserted bit 5 is set to 1 With no Inhibit bit 5 is 0 See Measurement Inhibit paragraph under Special Topics for a more complete description of the Inhibit function Block Start Bit 6 Bit 6 enables you to find the first sample in a block of data The first sample in each block will have bit 6 of the Interpolator Status field set to 1 In all subsequent samples bit 6 will be 0 For more details see Block Start paragraph under Special Topics Totalize Status 1 TS1 and Totalize Status 2 TS2 51 TS2 are only active when the HP 5373A is performing Totalize functions The purpose of status bits TS1 and TS2 is to indicate which Totalize sample has valid event data For more details see paragraph entitled Totalize Status 1 And Totalize Status 2 under Special Topics Each of the Totalize formats at the 3 11 5373A Programming Manual HOW TO PROCESS 3 12 BINARY DATA Correct For Counter Rollover Process Interpolator Data Determine Offset back of this chapter contain specific instructions for use of TS1 and TS2 Binary data must be processed several ways before it can be used to compute measurement results Each format description contains specific information on how to process the output data genera
439. tive marker position Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP MMOV Move inactive marker to active marker position Shortform MNEX Marker NEXt Longform MNEXT Use the MNEXt command to set the marker control mode to move marker to next where next means either a pixel or a data point On a Time Variation graph if data points are far apart and you always want the marker on a data point use next MEASurement Conversely to get the marker in a place between data points use next PIXel The MNEXt query returns the Marker Next status Parameters MEASurement PIXel Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP MNEX PIX Sets marker to move to next pixel OUTPUT 703 GRAP MNEX Queries for the current Marker Next mode Shortform MNUM Measurement NUMber Longform MNUMBER The MNUMber query requests the measurement number associated with the active vertical marker This command is only relevant for Time Variation or Event Time graphs Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP MNUM Queries for the current measurement number associated with the active vertical marker MOR Marker Orientation command query MRAT Get Modulation Rate query only MRIG Move Marker Right command Command Reference Shortform MOR Marker ORientation Longform MORIENT The MORient command is used to select the vertical or horizontal marker orientation The MORient query returns the current marker orientation Parameters VERTical HORizonta
440. to determine the correct start and stop channels 3 62 Binary Output Note that the binary output stream will always deliver the start channel time datum first followed by the stop channel datum even if the start sample was collected after the stop sample Each sample generates the binary data defined below TIME time of occurrence for each sample INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit Converting Binary Data to Time Stamps CJEJ CJEJ CJEJ CJEJ Figure 4B C Format 4B Binary Output The binary data stream shown above was derived from the input signals shown in Figure 4B A To produce valid time stamps your program must 1 Correct the binary time data for counter rollovers 2 Incorporate interpolator data 3 Correct for differences in electrical path length between the start channel and the stop channel PRODUCING VALID TIME STAMPS Correcting Time Data for Counter Rollovers Since the Time Interval function will allow the stop sample to be collected before the start sample time data does not always increase monotonically When start and stop are reversed stop before start the stop time count is correctly smaller than the start time count Overflow processing routines must distinguish between start stop reversals and counter rollovers Overflow processing routines must correct the data only when counter rollover is detected Correction for c
441. to occur C 15 HP 5373A Programming Manual Waiting for Stop Arming WARNING Both frequencies out of auto trigger range WARNING Frequency too high for auto trigger WARNING Frequency too low for auto trigger C 16 Type Static Status Associated With Measurement Status This message appears when the measurement in progress is waiting for the stop arm to occur Type Momentary Associated With System Operation Warning Error Number 182 This message occurs when the instrument is in Auto trigger mode and the input signals on both Channel A and B are outside the Auto trigger frequency range One input signal is below 1 kHz and one signal is above 200 MHz Type Momentary Associated With System Operation Warning Error Number 180 This message occurs when the instrument is in Auto trigger mode and the input signal is above 200 MHz The Auto trigger frequency range is 1 kHz to 200 MHz Type Momentary Associated With System Operation Warning Error Number 181 This message occurs when the instrument is in Auto trigger mode and the input signal is below 1 kHz The Auto trigger frequency range is 1 kHz to 200 MHz APPENDIX PROGRAMMING THE ARMING MODES INTRODUCTION This appendix describes how to select an arming mode then choose the appropriate commands and options Four examples show representative program lines and screen displays for four differen
442. top HP 5373A measurement activity with a signal applied to the rear panel Inhibit Input connector Refer to the Pre trigger 3 23 HP 5373A Programming Manual 3 24 Interpolator Interpolator Data Minus Time Interval Missed Events Sample Start Sample Stop Sample Menu chapter in the Operating Manual and the Inhibit paragraphs in the Special Topics section of this chapter for more details Circuits within the HP 5373A which measure the precise time between the occurrence of an event and the next 2 ns clock pulse The interpolator has a resolution of 200 ps Information from the interpolator is used to increase measurement resolution when computing time stamps Binary data output from the interpolator circuits Each interpolator datum is an unsigned 5 bit binary number See the Interpolator Data paragraph in the Special Topics section of this chapter for details A Time Interval measurement made when the stop signal is received before the start signal When this occurs special processing of the time and event data is required See Technical Note 3 for details When events occur at a rate greater than can be time stamped by the HP 5373A the instrument will not generate time data for each event although each event will be counted These events which do not have associated time data are called Missed Events Data sufficient to calculate the number of Missed Events is available when Expanded Data is ON Each appli
443. tream was derived from the signals shown in Figure 13 A To produce valid event stamps 1 Identify each datum which represents a valid Channel A event count e or e 2 Correct the valid Channel A event counts for counter rollovers 3 Identify each datum which represents a valid Channel B event count E or E 3 120 Binary Output 4 Correct the valid Channel event counts for counter rollovers To produce valid time stamps 1 Correct the binary time data for counter rollovers 2 Incorporate the interpolator data PRODUCING VALID EVENT STAMPS Identifying the Datum Which Represents the Valid Channel A Event Count The Totalize Status 1 Bit TS1 is bit 13 of the interpolator status field see Interpolator Status Field under Special Topics at the front of this chapter During two channel Totalize measurements TS1 identifies the datum which represents the valid Channel A event count If TS1 0 use e the instrument s first attempt at valid Channel A event data capture This is the valid binary event count If TS1 1 use e the instrument s second attempt at valid Channel A event data capture Subtract 1 from the integer represented by e The subtraction results in a valid binary event count Identifying the Datum Which Represents the Valid Channel B Event Count The Totalize Status 2 Bit TS2 is bit 14 of the interpolator status field see Interpolator Status Field under Special Topics at the fron
444. tring is sent The commands in the string are then interpreted and processed in the order received Commands preceding an error in a multi command message are executed up to the point where the error occurred Two ways to go about programming the instrument are to use the front panel control method as a guide to selecting applicable commands or to use the Teach Learn method Going From Front Panel To Program Teach Learn Explained Programming Rules and Guidance One way to write a program is to first devise a corresponding measurement using the front panel operating features Note the steps you take then write your program following the same flow you used to make the manual measurement except write the corresponding commands A program in Appendix E demonstrates how to use the SETup query and the SETup command to save and recall front panel setups a technique known as the Teach Learn method As the name implies Teach Learn is a two step process First the Teach Learn program stores a desired front panel setup in a string variable Later you select a stored string variable the learned settings to retrieve the corresponding front panel setup You can create an unlimited number of such variables to manage diverse measurement setups 4 19 HP 5373A Programming Manual 4 20 INTRODUCTION WHO THIS SECTION IS FOR HOW THIS SECTION IS ORGANIZED 5 COMMAND REFERENCE This reference section lists
445. ts is Measurement Gate Time Gate Time is generated by calculating elapsed time between start and stop samples Binary Data Output ETE 8 ETE EVENTS Lj 16 CHAN gt 5 32 16 6 16 16 Normal Mode Bits Fast Mode Bits ie MEDOIENOM Figure 15 B Format 15 Binary Output Format 15 binary output is shown in Figure 15 B above Each sample generates the binary data described below START EVENT instrument s first attempt at capture of a valid Channel B event datum START EVENT instrument s first attempt at capture of a valid Channel A event datum UNUSED FIELD INT status bits only Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit START EVENT instrument s second attempt at capture of a valid Channel B event datum START EVENT instrument s second attempt at capture of a valid Channel A event datum TIME time of occurrence for sample INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Totalize Status 1 bit 13 Totalize Status 2 bit 14 STOP EVENT instrument s first attempt at capture of a valid Channel B event datum STOP EVENT instrument s first attempt at capture of a valid Channel A event datum UNUSED FIELD INT status bits only Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit STOP EVENT instrument s second attempt at capture of a valid Channel B event datum STOP EVENT instrument s second attempt at capture
446. tting Shortform MOD input MODe Longform MODE The MODe command selects the input mode for Channels A and B Select COMMon to simultaneously route the input signal to Channel A and Channel B or SEParate to use each channel individually The input impedance and sensitivity specifications are the same for either Separate or Common mode Note COMmon is also accepted The MODe query returns the value of the input mode setting Parameters COMMon SEParate Examples OUTPUT 703 INP MOD SEP Sets the input mode to Separate to allow Channel A and Channel B to be used individually OUTPUT 703 INP MOD Queries for the current input mode 5 107 HP 5373A Programming Manual 5 108 SOUR Input Source command query ATT Attenuation command query Shortform SOUR input SOURce Longform SOURCE The SOURce command selects the current input channel Subsequent input function selections such as Attenuation Slope and Trigger Level apply until the source selection is changed You can select Channel A Channel B or External Arm The SOURce query returns the current source selection The SOURce command must be sent prior to the SOURce query Parameters B EXTernal X Examples OUTPUT 703 INP SOUR P Selects Channel B as the current input source OUTPUT 703 INP SOUR Queries for the channel input source The Input Source command has eight sublevel commands A
447. turned value of 0 indicates that the Service Request Enable Event Status Enable and Hardware Status Enable registers will retain their status when power is restored to the instrument A returned value of 1 indicates that the three registers are cleared when power is restored Parameters 0 any non zero number Examples OUTPUT 703 PSC 1 Clear the Service Request Enable Event Status Enable and Hardware Status Enable registers at power on OUTPUT 703 PSC Queries for the value of the power on clear flag Shortform RCL register Longform RCL The RCL command restores the instrument to a previously saved configuration from a specified save recall register This command is equivalent to the front panel RECALL key function Registers 0 through 9 may be specified Specifying Register 0 recalls the instrument setup that existed just prior to invoking the PRESet or DMSetup functions Refer to the SAV command description for information about saving to the registers RST Reset command SAV Save Register command SRE Service Request Enable command query Command Reference Parameters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Example OUTPUT 703 RCL 1 Recall a setup from save recall register 1 Shortform RST ReSeT Longform RST The RST command resets the instrument to the default settings This command performs the same function as the PRESet command Note that the RST c
448. ued the MLEF command moves the marker N pixels to the left where N is the parameter sent with the MLEF command IF MNEXT MEAS is set before the MLEF command is issued the MLEF command moves the marker one data point to the left and the parameter sent with MLEF is ignored Shortform move Marker to MAXimum Move Marker to Longform MMAXIMUM Maximum Value command Use the MMAXimum command to move the marker to the maximum value displayed For a Histogram this is the maximum bin height displayed for a Time Variation graph this is the maximum Y value which is the maximum measured value Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP MMAX Move marker to maximum value Shortform move Marker to MINimum Move Marker to Longform MMINIMUM Minimum Value comman d Use the MMINimum command to move the marker to the minimum value displayed For a Histogram this is the minimum bin height displayed for a Time Variation graph this is the minimum Y value which is the minimum measured value Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP MMIN Move marker to minimum value 5 59 HP 5373A Programming Manual MMOV Copy Inactive Marker 5 60 to Active command MNEX Set Marker Next Mode command query MNUM Get Measurement Number query only Shortform MMOV Marker MOVe to position of active marker Longform MMOVE Use the MMOVe command to move the inactive marker to the ac
449. uld be expected for e2 e4 e6 etc see Figure 10C A An overflow processing routine must scan the stop event data for any stop event datum smaller oc than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Event Overflow Correction value to that stop datum and to all subsequent stop data then continue with the scan Event Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Channel C Correction When making measurements on Channel C the event counter sees only every fourth input event To correct for this multiply each event datum by four This must be done after correcting for counter rollovers PRODUCING VALID TIME STAMPS Correcting Time Data For Counter Rollovers Binary time data increases monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred The start sample will always be collected before the stop sample An overflow processing routine must scan the time data for any datum smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Time Overflow Correction value to that datum and to all subsequent data then continue with the scan An example routine is given in Technical Note 3 Time Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Incorporating Interpolator Data The algorithm for producing time stamps from binary time data and binary interpolator data is time stamp time datum x 2 ns interpolator datum x 0 1 n
450. unter rollovers can be accomplished in two scans of the time data A scan correcting for rollovers between start and stop is described first second a scan is described which corrects for rollovers occurring between measurements Correcting for Rollovers Between Start and Stop Counter rollovers which occur between start and stop are detected when subtraction of start data from stop data produces an out of range result If the subtraction produces a number greater than Maximum leave the stop datum uncorrected and add the appropriate Time Overflow Correction to the start datum If the subtraction produces a number smaller than Maximum leave the start datum uncorrected and add the appropriate Time Overflow Correction to the stop datum Add the appropriate Time Overflow Correction value to all subsequent data both start and stop in either case Following correction resume the scan at the next measurement Time Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 Values for Maximum Maximum are given in Technical Note 2 Correcting for Overflows Between Measurements Once the first scan is complete a second scanning routine detects and corrects for counter rollovers between start stop pairs The first scan leaves the time data in this condition the smallest time value in each pair should be greater than the largest time value in the preceding pair unless a counter rollover has occurred between pairs The second scan identifies the
451. urement Gate Time Gate Times are generated by calculating elapsed time between valid time stamps Gate Time time stamp time stamp 3 122 Binary Output Format 14 EXPANDED DATA ON OFF MEASUREMENT CHANNEL S ARMING MODES Totalize Externally Gated How Signals are Converted to Binary Data Example Totalize A Externally Gated Start Stop First Data Capture First Data Capture JL 4 Second Data Capture Figure 14 Totalize Measurement Channel A with Externally Gated Arming Mode Showing Corresponding Binary Output Stop Second Data Capture BINARY DATA WENTONSM Producing Results Totalize results are generated by calculating elapsed events between a valid start sample and a valid stop sample As shown above in Figure 14 A the instrument makes two attempts to capture valid data for each sample Your program must use the status bits provided to merge the data from each pair of attempts into a single valid sample Then processes the set of valid samples EXPANDED DATA Expanded Data for Totalize measurements is Measurement Gate Time Gate Time is generated by calculating elapsed time between start and stop samples 3 123 mI lehJ AR HP 5373A Programming Manual Binary Data Output EVENTS UNUSED amp EVENTS gt 32 32 16 32 32 16 16 16 6 Normal Mode Bits Fast Mode Bits 16 16 16 1 seoan
452. urement process Shortform BEND BLock END Longform BEND Use the BEND query to obtain information about the position of the last measurement in each block While this position is predictable for most types of measurements there are situations where the block end position or positions are not predictable An example is a Multiple Block setup using Pre trigger termination The end of block position could be anywhere When there is more than one block end in the acquisition a list containing the number of blocks and end of block positions is returned For example if 5 blocks of 3 measurements were acquired not Block Averaged BEND would return the values 5 3 6 9 12 15 BEND outputs length information followed by the measurement indices where block ends occurred For ASCII the length information is the number of values that follow For floating point output format the length information is the number of bytes that follow this will be 8 times the number of values Example OUTPUT 703 BEND Queries for the block end list Shortform BTIM Block TIMestamp Longform BTIME Use the BTIMe query to obtain a list of time intervals from the block arming edge to the first measurement edge of each CANC Cancel Hardcopy command Command Reference block A table of instrument setups that support timing of this interval is provided in Appendix D Arming Modes For multiple block measurements which support tim
453. ut of range set to maximum C 14 Value out of range set to minimum C 15 Waiting for arming 15 Waiting for input signal C 15 Waiting for Manual Arm 15 Waiting for Pre trigger C 15 Waiting for Start Arming 15 Waiting for Stop Arming C 16 Status messages momentary defined Ca Status messages static defined 1 Status registers Status Status reporting structure STB query System STOP test command diagnostic 5 140 String 4 15 SUBSystem query System 5 26 Subsystem sublevel commands explained 4 9 Supported arming D 1 Switching from Local to Remote 2 14 Switching from Remote to Local 2 14 Syntax diagrams explained 4 16 Syntax diagrams hierarchy explained 4 16 Syntax INTerface SYSTEM subsystem 5 135 Syntax ISTate subsystem commands 5 131 Syntax MEASurement subsystem commands 5 73 Syntax Numeric subsystem commands 5 37 Syntax PROCess MATH subsystem commands 5 115 Index 6 System clock date DA
454. value NEXT j ENDIF NEXT i The rollover processing routine for event data is N the number of measurements There are N 2 samples for this format FOR i 1TON Event 0 corresponds to the time stamp tof the Block Arm and is not valid IF event i l lt event i THEN tis next sample less than current sample FOR j 1 1 TO N 1 for all following samples event j event j 2 32 1 overflow value NEXT j ENDIF NEXT i NOTE Event Data is not available in Format 1B 3 139 HP 5373A Programming Manual FORMAT 2A See Format 1A FORMAT 2B See Format 1B FORMAT 3 See Format 1B FORMAT 4A The rollover processing routine for time data is N the number of measurements There are 2N samples for this format Data Structure Notes 1 One dimensional array 2 Odd indices reference Start Samples 3 Even indices reference Stop Samples FOR i 1 TO 2 N 1 IF time i 1 lt time i THEN lis next sample less than current sample FOR j 1 1 TO 2 N for all following samples time j time j 2 32 tadd overflow value NEXT j ENDIF NEXT i The rollover processing routine for event data is N the number of measurements There are 2N samples for this format 3 140 Binary Output Data Sructure Notes 1 One dimensional array 2 Odd indices reference Start Samples 3 Even indices reference Stop Samples FOR i 1 TO 2 N 1 IF event i l lt event i THEN lis next
455. variance gt the statistical values available HP IB General Information lt low values A low values B gt the number of values which fell below the low limit lt pass values A pass values B gt the number of values which fell between the low and high limits or if the limits are reversed the number of values outside the low and high limits lt high values A high values B gt the number of values which fell above the high limit lt inside values A inside values B gt the number of values which fell inside the reversed limits lt NA values A NA values B gt the number of values for which limit testing was not applicable These included time stamps inter block data data extended by Inhibit and invalid data Single Result with Limit Testing res A gt lt gt limit A gt lt gt res A gt lt gt limit A lt NL gt END Single Result with Gate Time Data res gt gate A gt lt gt res gt gate A gt lt NL gt END Single Result with Limit Testing and Gate Time Data res A gt lt gt limit A gt lt gt gate A lt gt res A gt lt gt limit A gt lt gt gate A gt lt NL gt END Dual Result with Limit Testing lt res A gt lt gt lt limit A gt lt gt lt res B gt lt gt lt limit B gt lt gt lt res A gt EN limit A res B limit B gt lt NL gt END 2 35 HP 5373A Programming Manu
456. ve SINGIe Uu 5 S 5 5 3 Figure 5 1 System Command Syntax Diagram 2 of 3 RRSYSN3 CONTINUED Command Reference SYSTEM COMMANDS wTSend separator Con SUBS gt TODay sep hr_arg HI sep min_arg H gt sep H TODay gt WINTerval CLS ESE separator register bits_arg gt 5 gt ESR 000000600 Figure 5 1 System Command Syntax Diagram 3 of 3 HSE seporotor f register bitscorg H HSE HSR gt IDN c 4 Psc separator NN seporotor Le register number_org JH separator register number arg separator register bits org gt RRSYSSNS HP 5373A Programming Manual ABOR Abort command BEND Output Block End List query only BTIM Output Block Timestamp List query only Shortform ABOR ABORt Longform ABORT The ABORt command stops a measurement before the measurement cycle is completed After an ABORt command you can normally retrieve data by making the HP 5373A a Talker The effect of the ABORt command depends on your measurement setup See Appendix E Programming Examples for an example program Example OUTPUT 703 ABOR Stops the current meas
457. vel Bias Attenuation Hysteresis COMMon gt SOURce channel SLOPe lt POSitive or NEGative gt TRiGger lt MANual or RAUTo or SAUTo gt LEVel lt voltage number gt Manual Trigger or External Arm RLEVel lt number gt Auto Trigger BIAS lt ECL GROund or GND gt ATTenuation lt X1 or X2 gt HYSTeresis lt or MAXimum gt Figure 4 2 Relationship of Command Structure to Front Panel Control 3 of 3 Commands and Queries Duplication of Command Names Programming Rules and Guidance There are two command types those that issue instructions to the instrument to perform specific operations and queries that interrogate the instrument for a current state or request the return of data In this respect a query is just a specific kind of command that performs a distinct function Within the command structure is a subset of commands that you can transform into respective queries simply by appending a question mark On the other hand some commands exist only in the query form no parameter entry or non query mode exists for these commands Query only examples are ERR and ESR Each Command Reference entry Chapter 5 identifies the classification in the main entry of the listing that appears in the Table of Contents command command or query only Queries are not allowed while the instrument is in the Binary output mode Any re
458. vent counter rollovers 3 If measurement was made on Channel C multiply the event stamp data by four To produce valid time stamps your program must 1 Correct the binary time data for counter rollovers 2 Incorporate interpolator data 3 Correct for differences in electrical path length between the start channel and the stop channel PRODUCING VALID EVENT STAMPS Correcting Start Channel Event Data for Counter Rollovers Start channel event counts increase monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred Note that start channel event counts occur every other sample Monotonic increase should be expected for data 1 e3 5 etc see Figure 10C A An overflow processing routine must scan the start event data for any start event datum smaller than its immediate predecessor On detection of such a datum the routine must add the appropriate Event Overflow Correction value to that start datum and to all subsequent start data then continue with the scan Event Overflow Correction values are given in Technical Note 1 3 101 PZO HP 5373A Programming Manual Correcting Stop Channel Event Data for Counter Rollovers Correction of stop channel data is virtually identical to that performed for start channel data mE Successive stop channel event counts increase monotonically unless a counter rollover has occurred Note that stop channel event counts are provided with every other sample Monotonic increase sho
459. vervoltage Error 111 Power down before removing pods Error 130 Only graphs can be plotted Error 131 Plot meas data conflict Error 140 Register protected Error 141 Register not saved yet Type Static Failure Associated With Hardware Error This message occurs when an overvoltage condition is present on Input Channel B To correct this error change the signal Bias or Attenuation on the Input menu Type Static Failure Associated With Hardware Error This message occurs when an input pod is removed while the HP 5373A is powered on The instrument should be powered down before input pods are removed Type Momentary Associated With Plot Warning This message occurs when an attempt is made to plot a display other than Graphics Plots are only allowed of Graphic displays To get a hardcopy of any other menu use the PRINT function which outputs the current display to an attached printer Type Momentary Associated With Plot Warning This message occurs when the PLOT key is pressed while Graphics are available but the output source chosen on the System menu is Measurement instead of Display In this case the HP 5373A has been configured to output measurement results instead of display data Set the output source to Display before plotting Type Momentary Associated With Save Recall Warning This message occurs when an attempt was made to save the current instrument configuration to a register that
460. vices such as a printer or plotter In more sophisticated systems a controller can direct the HP 5373A to perform a specific measurement process the resulting measurement data and transfer the results Most HP 5373A remote programming operations are extensions of the front panel functions Other operations such HP 5373A Programming Manual HP IB DESCRIPTION 2 2 Party Line Structure Explained Interface System Terms as Teach Learn and instrument identification are only available in remote operation You can use any computer that is compatible with the HP IB standard All program examples given in this manual are written assuming an HP 9000 Series computer as the controller Refer to Appendix A for information about connecting a controller to the HP 5373A The is a parallel interface bus All devices on the bus can be addressed at one time however only one device may respond at a time The controller commands a specific device to respond and maintains the data flow and interface functions Data is transferred at the speed of the slowest device The HP IB uses a party line structure devices share signal lines A maximum of 15 devices may be connected in an HP IB system in virtually any configuration desired There must be an uninterrupted path to every device operating on the bus Sixteen lines interconnect devices in parallel Eight lines transfer data and commands three accomplish handshaking and five lin
461. x1 Index2 1 lt 0 Two_exp16 Buff Indexl Index2 1 1170 FNEND Get 4byte val 1180 1 1190 1 1200 SUB Plot data Time Freq 1210 Plot data Plots Frequency vs Time 1220 INTEGER I 1230 DISP Clear ALPHA screen 1240 GINIT 1250 GCLEAR 1260 GRAPHICS ON 1270 VIEWPORT 25 100 RATIO 30 98 1280 CSIZE 3 5 1290 PEN 7 1300 LINE TYPE 3 1310 FRAME 1320 LINE TYPE 1 1330 CLIP OFF 1340 Min freq MIN Freq 1350 Max freq MAX Freq 1360 IF Max freq Min freq THEN 1370 Max freq Max freqtl E 5 ABS Max freq 1380 Min freq Min freq 1 E 5 ABS Min freq 1390 END IF 1400 WINDOW 0 1 0 1 1410 MOVE 0 1 1420 LORG 8 1430 LABEL VAL DROUND Max freq 10 amp 1440 MOVE 0 5 1450 LABEL Hz 1460 MOVE 0 0 1470 LABEL VAL DROUND Min freq 10 amp 1480 MOVE 0 0 1490 LORG 6 1500 LABEL 1510 MOVE 0 0 1520 LORG 3 1530 LABEL 0 1540 MOVE 5 0 1550 LORG 6 1560 LABEL seconds 1570 MOVE 1 0 1580 LABEL 1590 MOVE 1 0 1600 LORG 9 E 24 Program Examples LABEL PROUND Time SIZE Time 1 12 CLIP ON PENUP PEN 3 MOVE 0 0 WINDOW 0 Time SIZE Time 1 Min freq Max freq PLOT 0 1 FOR I 1 TO SIZE Time 1 1 PLOT Time I Freq I PLOT Time I Freq I 1 NEXT I PLOT Time I Freq I SUBEND E 25 HP 5373A Programming Manual ASCII DATA This program shows three different result formats for a OUTPUT EXAMPLES frequency measurement NOTE Install an HP 54002A 50Q In
462. y if Local Lockout is not active Conditions for changing from Remote to Local and the operational status of each mode are described in following paragraphs In Local mode all front panel controls are operational and the instrument will respond to input commands over the bus If addressed to talk the HP 5373A sends data messages or the status byte Whether addressed or not the instrument responds to a Remote Local m Local Lockout a LCLL m Trigger Abort The HP 5373A can send a require service message when in Local mode The HP 5373A always switches from Remote to Local when a GTL or LCLL message is received The LCLL message sets the remote enable control line REN false If the HP 5373A is in Local Lockout the LOCAL key on the front panel is disabled Instrument settings remain unchanged during Remote to Local transition 2 13 HP 5373A Programming Manual Switching from Local to Remote Operation 2 14 HP IB Default Startup Conditions Switching from Remote to Local Operation The HP 5373A switches from Local to Remote when one of the following conditions occur listen address is received while the REN Remote Enable contro line is true The REMOTE programming command is received use the LOCAL command to return to Local when using the REMOTE command The instrument settings remain unchanged during Local to Remote transitions The front panel RMT LED lights while the HP 5373A
463. y different from the definition of Missed Events for all other Time Interval and Time Interval measurements In other Time Interval and Time Interval measurements Missed Events are events which occur between the stop of one measurement and the start of the next measurement In this format 5B Missed Events are those which occur between the start and stop events of an individual measurement In other words Missed Events in this format occur within the measurement rather than between measurements Binary Data Output Normal Mode Bits Fast Mode Bits 16 16 1 Era EJ E3 gi 6 Figure 5B B Format 5B Binary Output Format 5B binary output is shown in Figure 5B B above Each measurement consists of two samples start and stop Input channels associated with start and stop data must be identified See Technical Note 4 for information on how to determine the correct start and stop channels Each sample generates the binary data defined below EVENT binary event count TIME time of occurrence for each sample INT interpolator data provided to increase time resolution Valid status bits Block Start Inhibit Converting Binary Data to Event Stamps and Time Stamps CICIEJ GXGIEJ Figure 5B C Format 5B Binary Output 3 74 Binary Output The binary data stream shown above was derived from the signals shown in Figure 5B A To produce valid event stamps your program must correct the binary event data
464. y returns the current active marker color Parameters BLACk WHITe Examples OUTPUT 703 GRAP SMAR BLAC Sets active marker to Black OUTPUT 703 GRAP SMAR Queries for current active marker color Shortform SSCR Screen SCRoll Longform SSCROLL The SSCRoll command scrolls the screen one page s worth a page is defined by the portion of the total graph currently TVAR command Event Count First Channel query only EVT2 Event Count on Second Channel query only Command Reference displayed The command controls the scrolling of a screen from left to right or vice versa Parameters LEFT RIGHt Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP SSCR LEFT Scrolls screen to the left Shortform TVAR Time VARiation Longform TVARIATION The TVARiation command selects the Time Variation graph sublevel Additional subievel commands control Time Variation graph features Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP TVAR XARH Copies the current X axis values to the manual scaling parameters Shortform EVenT 1 Longform EVT1 The EVT1 query returns the current event count on the first channel The first channel is defined as the first channel in the source equation for instance A is the first channel in the source equation Example OUTPUT 703 GRAP TVAR EVTT1 Queries for the current event count on the first channel Shortform EVT2 EVenT 2 Longform EVT2 The

Agilent Technologies 5373A User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents